UBC Publications

UBC Publications

UBC Publications

The University of British Columbia Calendar Aug 30, 1933

Item Metadata

Download

Media
calendars-1.0169861.pdf
Metadata
JSON: calendars-1.0169861.json
JSON-LD: calendars-1.0169861-ld.json
RDF/XML (Pretty): calendars-1.0169861-rdf.xml
RDF/JSON: calendars-1.0169861-rdf.json
Turtle: calendars-1.0169861-turtle.txt
N-Triples: calendars-1.0169861-rdf-ntriples.txt
Original Record: calendars-1.0169861-source.json
Full Text
calendars-1.0169861-fulltext.txt
Citation
calendars-1.0169861.ris

Full Text

Array t
ty\\t Itttorattg
\
OF
Irittslj (Mumbta
CALENDAR
NINETEENTH SESSION
1933-1934
VANCOUVER,   BRITISH   COLUMBIA
1933
ay
:@»a — ipqg)£ ®Jj? Utttormig
OF
Iriitsff tolumtria
CALENDAR
NINETEENTH SESSION
1933-1934
VANCOUVER,  BRITISH  COLUMBIA
1933  CONTENTS
Page
Academic Year _ _... 5
Visitor  7
Chancellor  7
President -  7
The Board of Governors  7
The Senate  - - 7
Officers and Staff  8
Historical Sketch  15
The Constitution of the University  17
The Work of the University  18
Retiring Allowances   I9
Endowments and Donations - — 20
Suggested Local Scholarships  22
The Library  23
Location and Buildings  «>
General Information  39
Admission to the University  43
Registration and Attendance  46
Fees - - - - — 49
Medals, Scholarships, Prizes, Bursaries and Loans  55
Faculty of Arts and Science
Time Table of Lectures    72
Time Table of Supplemental Examinations    76
Regulations in Reference to Courses—
Courses Leading to the Degree of B.A    77
Courses Leading to the Degree of B.Com    92
Courses Leading to the Degree of M.A _.   96
Teacher Training Course _ _  102
Courses Leading to the Social Service Diploma  104
Examinations and Advancement _  105
Courses of Instruction—
Department of Bacteriology  108
"  Botany  110
"   Chemistry  116
"   Classics  _  122
"  Economics, Sociology and Political Science  125
"  Education  _  135
"   English  138
"  Geology and Geography   143
"   History  149
"   Mathematics    154
"   Modern Languages _  158
"   Philosophy   162
"   Physics   !...JI1".".""T" 165
"   Zoology  170
Faculty of Applied Science
Foreword   175
Regulations in Reference to Courses  173
General Outline of Courses '........  180
Courses in—
Chemical Engineering  183
Chemistry   '.'.'".'.'.'.".      184 4 The University of British Columbia
Page
Civil Engineering  185
Electrical Engineering  188
Forest Engineering _ _  189
Geological Engineering  192
Mechanical Engineering „ -  194
Metallurgical Engineering  196, 197
Mining Engineering. 196> 197
Nursing and Health..... -  J99
Double Courses for the Degrees of B.A. and B.Sc  208
Courses Leading to the Degree of M.ASc  210
Examinations and Advancement  211
Courses of Instruction—
Department of Botany _  £**
" "  Chemistry  J17
'* "   Civil Engineering  221
" "   Economics   -  232
" "   Forestry  233
"  Geology and Geography  239
"   Mathematics  243
"   Mechanical and Electrical Engineering  245
"   Mining and Metallurgy -  257
"   Physics   261
"   Nursing and Health....  262
"   Zoology   267
Faculty of Agriculture
Time Table of Lectures  270
Regulations in Reference to Courses—
For the B.S.A Degree  273
The Occupational Course _  273
Short Courses  273
Extension Courses  274
Graduate Work 274, 276
Examinations and Advancement  278
Courses of Instruction—
Department of Agronomy  281
"   Animal Husbandry  283
"   Dairying    284
"   Horticulture  285
"   Poultry Husbandry   288
List of Students in Attendance, Session 1932-33  295
Degrees Conferred, 1932.  313
Medals, Scholarships and Prizes Awarded, 1932  322
University Summer Session  327
Canadian Officers' Training Corps  332
Student Organization   334
Inter-University Exchange of Undergraduates  339
Affiliated Colleges-
Victoria College  340
Union College of British Columbia _  341
The Anglican Theological College of British Columbia  342 Academic Year
august
28th Monday
SEPTEMBER
1st Friday
4th Monday
13th Wednesday
to
20th Wednesday
19th Tuesday
20th Wednesday
22nd Friday
25th Monday
26th Tuesday
27th Wednesday
OCTOBER
2nd Monday
9th Monday
llth Wednesday
llth Wednesday
13th Friday
14th Saturday
18th Wednesday
25th Wednesday
27th Friday
NOVEMBER
llth Saturday
DECEMBER
* 8th Friday
♦llth Monday to )
*21st Thursday    J
13th Wednesday
15th Friday
20th Wednesday
25th Monday
ACADEMIC YEAR
1933
Matriculation Supplemental Examinations begin.
ACADEMIC YEAR begins.
Labour Day.   University  closed,  September
2nd-4th, inclusive.
Supplemental Examinations in Arts.
Supplemental Examinations in Applied Science
begin.
Last day for Registration of First Year Students in the Faculties of Arts and Science,
and Agriculture.
Last day for Registration of all other undergraduates except students in Extra-Sessional
Classes.
First Year Students in all Faculties report at
2 p.m. in the Auditorium.
The opening addresses to the students of all
the Faculties at 3 p.m. in the Auditorium.
Lectures begin at 9 a.m.
Last day for Registration of Graduate Students
and of Students in Extra-Sessional Classes.
Last day for payment of First Term fees. Payment  of   first   instalment  of   Scholarship
money.
 Thanksgiving Day.  University closed.
Last day for payment of fees for Autumn Graduation.
Meeting of the Faculty of Arts and Science.
Meeting of the Faculty of Agriculture.
Last day for change in Students' courses.
Meeting of the Senate.
Congregation.
Meeting of the Faculty Council.
Remembrance Day. University closed.
Last day of Lectures for Term.
Examinations.
Meeting of the Faculty of Arts and Science.
Meeting of the Faculty of Agriculture.
Meeting of the Senate.
Christmas Day. University closed December
25th and 26th.
•These dates are subject to change. The University of British Columbia
JANUARY
1st Monday
4th Thursday
8th Monday
22nd Monday
FEBRUARY
14th Wednesday
16th Friday
21st Wednesday
23rd Friday
MARCH
30th Friday     )
APRIL                 V
2nd Monday J
12th Thursday
12th Thursday
14th Saturday to
28th Saturday
26th Thursday
MAY
7th Monday
7th Monday
9th Wednesday
10th Thursday
10th Thursday
24th Thursday
JUNE
3rd Sunday
llth to 30th
JULY
1st Sunday
3rd Tuesday
AUGUST
18th Saturday
24th Friday
24th Friday
31st Friday
1934
New Year's Day. University closed January
1st and 2nd.
Meeting of the Faculty of Agriculture.
Second Term begins.
Last day for payment of Second Term fees.
Payment of second instalment of Scholarship money.
Meeting of the Faculty of Arts and Science.
Meeting of the Faculty of Agriculture.
Meeting of the Senate.
Meeting of the Faculty Council.
University closed March 30th to April 2nd,
inclusive.
Last day of Lectures.
Last day for handing in graduation essays and
theses.
Sessional Examinations.
Field work in Applied Science begins immediately at the close of the examinations.
Last day for payment of Graduation fees.
Meeting of the Faculty of Arts and Science.
Meeting of the Faculty of Agriculture.
Meeting of the Senate.
Congregation.
Meeting of Convocation.
Victoria Day. University closed.
King's Birthday.  University closed, June 4th.
Junior and Senior Matriculation Examinations.
(Time-tables to be arranged.)
Dominion Day.  University closed, July 2nd.
Summer Session begins.
Summer Session ends.
Meeting of the Faculty of Arts and Science.
Meeting of the Senate.
ACADEMIC YEAR ends. THE UNIVERSITY OF BRITISH COLUMBIA
VISITOR
The Hon. J. W. Fordham Johnson, Lieutenant-Governor of
British Columbia.
CHANCELLOR
R. E. McKechnie, Esq., M.D., CM., LL.D., F.A.C.S., F.R.C.S. (Can.)
PRESIDENT
L. S. Klinck, Esq., M.S.A., D.Sc, LL.D., Officier de l'Instruction
Publique.
BOARD OF GOVERNORS
R. E. McKechnie, Esq., M.D., CM., LL.D., F.A.CS., F.R.C.S. (Can.)
(ex officio), (Chairman).
L. S. Klinck, Esq., M.S.A., D.Sc., LL.D., Officier de l'Instruction Publique. (ex officio.)
The Hon. Mr. Justice Denis Murphy, B.A., Vancouver. Term expires 1935.
Mrs. Maude M. Welsh, New Westminster. Term expires 1935.
Frank P. Patterson, Esq., M.D., CM., F.R.C.S.E., F.A.C.S., Vancouver. Term expires 1935.
Robie L. Reid, Esq., K.C, Vancouver. Term expires 1937.
Christopher Spencer, Esq., Vancouver. Term expires 1937.
Francis James Burd, Esq., Vancouver. Term expires 1937.
His Honour Joseph N. Ellis, B.C.L., K.C, Vancouver Term expires
1939.
B. C. Nicholas, Esq., Victoria. Term expires 1939.
W. H. Malkin, Esq., Vancouver. Term expires 1939.
SENATE
(a) The Minister of Education, The Honourable Joshua Hinchltffe,
B.A. *
The Chancellor, R. E. McKecknie, Esq., M.D., CM., LL.D., F.A.
C.S., F.R.C.S. (Can.)
The President  (Chairman), L. S. Klinck, Esq., M.S.A., D.Sc.,
LL.D., Officier de l'Instruction Publique.
(b) Dean of the Faculty of Agriculture, F. M. Clement, Esq., B.S.A.,
M.A.
Dean of the Faculty of Applied Science, Reginald W. Brock,
Esq., M.A., LL.D., F.G.S., F.R.S.C.
Dean of the Faculty of Arts and Science, Daniel Buchanan,
Esq., M.A., Ph.D., LL.D., F.R.S.C.
Representatives of the Faculty of Agriculture: E. A. Lloyd, Esq.,
M.S.A.; G. G. Moe, Esq., B.S.A., M.Sc, Ph.D.
Representatives of the Faculty of Applied Science: F. A. Wilkin,
B.A.Sc; H. F. G. Letson, M.C, B.Sc, Ph.D., Engineering,
A.M.I. Mech. E. 8 The University of British Columbia
Representatives of the Faculty of Arts and Science: Henry F.
Angus,Esq., M.A., B.C.L.; Andrew H. Hutchinson, Esq.,
M.A., Ph.D., F.R.S.C.
(c) Appointed by the Lieutenant-Governor in Council:—
J. Newton Harvey, Esq., Vancouver.
H. C. Holmes, Esq., B.A., Victoria.
F. J. Nicholson, Esq., B.A., M.D., CM., F.A.C.S., Vancouver.
(d) The Superintendent of Education, S. J. Willis, Esq., B.A., LL.D.
The Principal of Vancouver Normal School, D. M. Robinson,
Esq., BA.
The Principal of Victoria Normal School, V. L. Denton, Esq.,
B.A.
(e) Representative of High School Principals and Assistants, G. W.
Clark, Esq., M.A.
(/) Representatives of Affiliated Colleges:—
Victoria College, Victoria, P. H. Elliott, Esq., M.Sc.
Union College of British Columbia, Vancouver (Theological),
Rev. J. G. Brown, M.A., D.D.
The Anglican Theological College of British Columbia, Vancouver, Rev. W. H. Vance, M.A., D.D.
(g)  Elected by Convocation:—
H. T. Logan, Esq., MA., Vancouver.
G. G. Sedgewick, Esq., B.A., Ph.D., Vancouver.
His Honour F. W. Howay, LL.B., LL.D., F.R.S.C, New
Westminster.
Miss M. L. Bollert, M.A., A.M., Vancouver.
Sherwood Lett, Esq., B.A., Vancouver.
Miss A. B. Jamieson, B.A., Vancouver
A. E. Lord, Esq., B.A., Vancouver.
The Most Rev. A. U. de Pencdir, M.A., D.D., Vancouver.
John C. Oliver, Esq., B.A., B.A. Sc, Vancouver.
P. A. Boving, Esq., Cand. Ph., Cand. Agr., Vancouver.
His Honour J. D. Swanson, B.A., Kamloops.
C. Killam, Esq., M.A., LL.D., D.C.L., Vancouver.
Mrs. Evlyn F. Farris, M.A., LL.D., Vancouver.
Sydney Anderson, Esq., B.A.Sc, Vancouver.
Miss Isobel Harvey, M.A., Vancouver.
OFFICERS AND STAFF
L. S. Klinck, B.S.A. (Toronto), M.S.A., D.Sc. (Iowa State College),
LL.D. (Western Ontario), Officier de l'Instruction Publique,
President.
Dandsl Buchanan, M.A- (McMaster), Ph.D. (Chicago), LL.D. (McMaster), F.R.S.C,'Dean of the Faculty of Arts and Science. Officers and Staff
Reginald W. Brock, M.A., LL.D. (Queen's), LL.D. (Hong Kong),
F.G.S., F.R.S.C, Dean of the Faculty of Applied Science.
F. M. Clement, B.S.A. (Toronto), M.A. (Wisconsin), Dean of the
Faculty of Agriculture.
Miss M. L. Bollert, M.A.  (Toronto), A.M.  (Columbia), Dean of
Women.
George M. Weir, B.A. (McGill), M.A. (Sask.), D. Paed. (Queen's),
Director of the Summer Session.
Stanley W. Mathews, M.A. (Queen's), Registrar.
Miss E. B. Abernethy, BA. (Brit. Col.), Assistant Registrar.
F. Dallas, Bursar.
John Ridington, Librarian.
FACULTY COUNCIL
The President (Chairman), L. S. Klinck, Esq., M.S.A., D.Sc, LL.D.,
Officier de l'Instruction Publique.
Dean of the Faculty of Agriculture, F. M. Clement, Esq., B.S.A., M.A
Dean of the Faculty of Applied Science, Reginald W. Brock, Esq.,
M.A., LL.D., F.G.S., F.R.S.C.
Dean of the Faculty of Arts and Science, Daniel Buchanan, Esq.,
M.A., Ph.D., LL.D, F.R.S.C.
Representative of the Faculty of Agriculture, Wilfrid Sadler, B.S.A.,
M.Sc, N.D.D.
Representative of the Faculty of Applied Science, H. N. Thomson,
B.Sc.
Representative of the Faculty of Arts and Science . _
Emeritus Professors
George E. Robinson, B.A. (Dal.), Emeritus Professor of Mathematics.
James Henderson, M.A. (Glasgow), Emeritus Professor of Philosophy.
Department of Agronomy
G. G. Moe, B.S.A., M.Sc. (McGill), Ph.D. (Cornell), Professor and
Head of the Department.
P. A. Boving, Cand. Ph. (Malmo, Sweden), Cand. Agr. (Alnarp, Agriculture, Sweden), Professor.
D. G. Laird, B.S.A. (Toronto), M.S., Ph.D. (Wisconsin), Associate
Professor.
Department of Animal Husbandry
H. M. King, B.S.A. (Toronto), M.S. (Oregon Agricultural College),
Professor and Head of the Department.
Department of Bacteriology
Hd3bert Winslow Hill, M.B., M.D., D.P.H. (Toronto), LL.D.
(Western Ontario), L.M.C.C, Professor and Head of the Department.   (On leave of absence.) 10 The University of British Columbia
Miss Helen M. Mathews, M.A., (Brit. Col.), Instructor.
D. C. B. Duff, M.A., Ph.D. (Toronto), Instructor.
Department of Botany
Andrew H. Hutchinson, M.A. (McMaster), Ph.D. (Chicago), F.R.
S.C, Professor and Head of the Department.
Frank Dickson, B.A. (Queen's), Ph. D. (Cornell), Associate Professor.
John Davidson, F.L.S., F.B.S.E., Associate Professor.
Miss E. M. R. Ashton, B.Sc. (London), M.A. (Brit. Col.), Assistant.
Edgar Black, B.A. (Brandon Col.), Assistant.
Miss Norah Hughes, B.A., (Brit. Col.), Assistant.
Department of Chemistry
Robert H. Clark, M.A. (Toronto), Ph.D. (Leipzig), F.R.S.C, Professor and Head of the Department.
E. H. Archibald, B.Sc. (Dal.), A.M. Ph.D. (Harvard), F.R.S.E.&C,
Professor of Analytical Chemistry,   i      ^L
W. F. Seyer, B.A., M.Sc. (Alberta), Ph.D. (McGill), Associate Professor.
M. J. Marshall, M.Sc. (McGill), Ph.D. (Mass. Inst, of Technology),
Associate Professor.
William Ure, M.A.Sc (Brit. Col.), Ph.D. (Cal, Inst, of Technology),
Assistant Professor,   j
Ralph G. D. Moore, B.A. (Brit. Col.), Assistant.
James E. R. Lawley, M.A.Sc (Brit. Col.), Assistant.
James B. Flynn, M.A.Sc. (Brit. Col.), Assistant.
Department of Civil Engineering
 Professor and Head of the Department.
F. A. Wilkin, B.A.Sc. (McGill), Assistant Professor and Acting Head
of the Department.
E. G. Matheson, B.A.Sc. (McGill), M.E.I.C, M.Am.S.C.E., Associate
Professor.
Allan H. Finlay, B.A.Sc. (Brit. Col.) M.S. in C.E. (Illinois), Assistant Professor.
A. Lightall, B.Sc. (McGill), Assistant Professor.
A. G. Stuart, B.Sc. (McGill), Instructor.
Edward S. Pretious, B.A.Sc. (Brit. CoL), Instructor.
Archie Peebles, B.A.Sc. (Brit. Col.), Assistant.
Department of Classics
Lemuel Robertson, M.A. (McGill), Professor and Head of the Department.
O. J. Todd, Ph.D. (Harvard), Professor.
H. T. Logan, M.C, B.A. (McGill), M.A. (Oxon), Professor. Officers and Staff 11
Department of Dairying
Wilfrid Sadler, B.S.A., M.Sc. (McGill), N.DD., British Dairy Institute, University College, Reading, England, Professor and Head of
the Department.
Blythe Eagles, B.A. (Brit. CoL), Ph.D. (Toronto), Research Assistant under grant from the Empire Marketing Board and the National Research Council.
Department of Economics, Political Science, Commerce
and Sociology
Henry F. Angus, B.A. (McGill), B.C.L., M.A. (Oxon.), Professor
and Head of the Department.
W. A. Carrothers, B.A. (Manitoba), Ph.D. (Edinburgh), D.F.C,
Professor.
J. Friend Day, B.A. (Toronto), M.A. (Chicago), Associate Professor
of Economics and Commerce.
Coral Wesley Topping, B.A. (Queen's), S.T.D. (Wesleyan TheoL
College), A.M., Ph.D. (Columbia), Associate Professor of Economics and Sociology.
G. F. Drummond, M.A. (St. Andrew's), M.Sc. (Econ.), (London),
Assistant Professor.        g
Frederick Field, Lecturer in Accountancy.
Department of Education
George M. Weir, B.A. (McGill), MA. (Sask.), D. Paed. (Queen's)
Professor and Head of the Department.
Mrs. Jennie Wyman Pilcher, B.A., M.Sc. (New Zealand), A.M.,
Ph.D. (Stanford), Associate Professor of Psychology and Education.
William G. Black, BA. (Brit. CoL), M.A. (Chicago), Associate Professor.   *     ^k
Department of English
G. G. Sedgewick, B.A. (Dal.), Ph.D. (Harvard), Professor and Head
of the Department.
W. L. MacDonald, B.A. (Toronto), M.A. (Wisconsin), Ph£>. (Harvard) , Professor.
Frederick G. C. Wood, B.A. (McGill), A.M. (Harvard), Associate
Professor.
Thorleif Larsen, M.A. (Toronto), B.A. (Oxon.), Associate Professor.
Francis Cox Walker, B.A. (U.N.B.), A.M., Ph.D. (Harvard), Associate Professor.
Miss M. L. Bollert, M.A. (Toronto), A.M. (Columbia), Assistant
Professor.   (On leave of absence.)
Hunter Campbell Lewis, M.A. (Brit. CoL), Assistant Professor. 12 The University of British Columbia
Department of Forestry
-Professor and Head of the Department.
F. Malcolm Knapp, B.S.F. (Syracuse), M.S.F. (Wash.), Assistant
Professor.
R. M. Brown, B.Sc.F. (Toronto), Honorary Lecturer in Forest Products.
Department of Geology and Geography
R. W. Brock, M.A., LL.D. (Queen's), LL.D. (Hong Kong), F.G.S.,
F.R.S.C., Professor and Head of the Department.
S. J. Schofield, M.A., B.Sc. (Queen's), Ph.D. (Mass. Institute of Technology), F.G.S.A., F.R.S.C, Professor of Physical and Structural
Geology.
M. Y. Williams, B.Sc. (Queen's), Ph.D. (Yale), F.G.S.A., F.R.S.C,
Professor of Palaeontology! and Stratigraphy.
T. C. Phemister, B.Sc (Glasgow), ScM. (Chicago), Ph.D., D.Sc.
(Glasgow), Associate Professor of Mineralogy and Petrology.
Victor Dolmage, B.A. (Brit. CoL), Ph.D. (Mass.), F.R.S.C, Lecturer.
Harry Warren, B.A.Sc (Brit. CoL), Ph.D. (Oxford), Lecturer in
Mineralogy and Petrography.
Department of History
W. N. Sage, B.A. (Toronto), M.A. (Oxon.), Ph.D. (Toronto), F.R.
Hist. S., Professor and Head of the Department.
F. H. Soward, B.A. (Toronto), B.Litt. (Oxon.), Associate Professor.
A. C. Cooke, B.A. (Manitoba), M.A. (Oxon.), Assistant Professor.
Department of Horticulture
F. M. Clement, B.S.A. (Toronto), M.A. (Wisconsin), Professor and
Head of the Department.
A. F. Barss, A.B. (Rochester), B.S. in Agr. (Cornell), M.S. (Oregon
Agricultural College), Ph.D. (Chicago), Professor.
G. H. Harris, B.S.A. (Brit. CoL), M.S. (Oregon State College), Ph.D.
(California), Assistant Professor.
Department of Mathematics
Daniel Buchanan, MA. (McMaster), Ph.D. (Chicago), LL.D. (McMaster), F.R.S.C, Professor and Head of the Department.
F. S. Nowlan, B.A. (Acadia), A.M. (Harvard), Ph.D. (Chicago),
Professor.
E. E. Jordan, M.A- (Dal.), Associate Professor.
L. Richardson, B.Sc. (London), Associate Professor.
Frederick J. Brand, B.A. (Brit. CoL), B.Sc. (Oxon.), Instructor. Officers and Staff 13
Department of Mechanical and Electrical Engineering
Herbert Vickers, M.E. (Liverpool), M.Sc, Ph.D. (Birmingham),
Professor and Head of the Department.
F. W. Vernon, B.Sc.Eng. (London), Wh.Sch., A.M.I.Mech.E., A.F.R.
A.S., Associate Professor of Mechanical Engineering.
H. F. G. Letson, M.C, B.Sc. (Brit. CoL), Ph.D., Engineering (London), A.M.I. Mech. E., Associate Professor of Mechanical and Electrical Engineering.
E. Geoffrey Cull wick, M.A. (Cantab.), A.M.I.E.E., Assistant Professor of Electrical Engineering.
W. B. Coulthard, B.Sc. (London), Assistant Professor of Electrical
Engineering.
John F. Bell, Eng. Capt. O.B.E., R.N., M.E.I.C, Lecturer in,Mechanical Engineering.
R. Rolleston West, Lecturer in Mechanical Engineering.
Department of Mining and Metallurgy
J. M. Turnbull, B.A.Sc.  (McGill), Professor and Head of the Department.
H. N. Thomson, B.Sc. (McGill), Professor of Metallurgy.
George A. Gillies, M.Sc. (McGill), Associate Professor of Mining.
W. B. Bishop, Assistant in Metallurgy.
Department of Modern Languages
H. Ashton, M.A., Litt.D., (Cantab.), D. Litt. (Birmingham), D.
Lett. (Univ. Paris), F.R.S.C, Officier de l'Instruction Publique
(France), Chevalier de la Legion d'Honneur, Professor and Head of
the Department.
David Owen Evans, M.A., Ph.D. (Oxon.), D. Lett. (Univ. of Paris),
Professor of French.
A. F. B. Clark, B.A. (Toronto), Ph.D. (Harvard), Professor of French.
Miss Isabel MacInnes, M.A. (Queen's), Ph.D. (California), Associate
Professor of German.
Miss Janet T. Greig, B.A. (Queen's), M.A. (Brit. CoL), Officier
d'Academie (France), Assistant Professor of French.
Miss Joyce Hallamore, M.A. (Brit. CoL), Instructor in German.
(On leave of absence.)
Miss Wessie Tipping, M.A. (Brit. CoL), Instructor in French.
Miss Dorothy Dallas, M.A. (Brit. CoL), Instructor in French.
Mrs. Alice Roys, Assistant in German.
Department of Nursing and Health
HrBBERT Winslow Hill, M.B., M.D.,D.P.H. (Toronto), LL.D. (Western Ontario), L.M.C.C, Professor and Head of the Department. (On
leave of absence.) 14 The University of British Columbia
Miss Mabel F. Gray, R.N., Cert. P.H.N. (Simmons College), Assistant
Professor of Nursing.
Miss Margaret E. Kerr, R.N., B.A.Sc. Nursing (Brit. Col.) M.A.
Columbia), Instructor.
G. F. Amyot, M.D., D.P.H. (Toronto), L.M.C.C., Lecturer in Preventable Diseases and Epidemiology.
J. W. McIntosh, B.A., M.B., D.P.H. (Toronto), L.M.CC, Lecturer
in Public Health.
Department of Philosophy
H. T. J. Coleman, B.A. (Toronto), Ph.D. (Columbia), Professor and
Head of the Department.
Mrs. Jennie Wyman Ptlcher, B.A., M.Sc.  (New Zealand), A.M.,
Ph.D. (Stanford), Associate Professor of Psychology and Education.
 Assistant Professor.
Department of Physics
T. C Hebb, M.A., B.Sc. (Dal.), Ph.D. (Chicago), Professor and Head
of the Department.
A. E. Hennings, M.A. (Lake Forest College, 111.), Ph.D. (Chicago),
Professor.
J. G. Davidson, B.A. (Toronto), Ph.D. (Calif.), Associate Professor.
Gordon Merritt Shrum, M.A., Ph.D. (Toronto), Associate Professor.
Ronald Smith, M.A. (Brit. Col.), Assistant.
Ronald Makepeace, MA. (Brit. Col.), Assistant.
Rognvald T. Hamilton, BA.Sc (Brit. CoL), Assistant.
Department of Poultry Husbandry
E. A. Lloyd, B.S.A. (Sask.), M.S.A. (Washington State College), Professor and Head of the Department.
Department of Zoology
C. McLean Fraser, M.A. (Toronto), Ph.D. (Iowa), F.R.C.S., Professor
and Head of the Department.
G. J. Spencer, B.S.A. (Toronto), M.S. (Illinois), Assistant Professor.
Miss Gertrude M. Smith, M.A.   (Brit. CoL), Assistant Professor.
Harold White, M.D., CM. (McGill), M.D., CM. (adeundemSask.),
D.P.H. (Toronto), L.M.C. Gr. Brit., L.M.C.C, Medical Examiner to
Students.
Mrs. C. A. Lucas, R.N., Public Health Nurse. THE UNIVERSITY OF BRITISH COLUMBIA
HISTORICAL SKETCH
The creation of a University in British Columbia was
first advocated by Superintendent Jessop in 1877, but it was
not until 1890 that the Provincial Legislature passed an Act
establishing a body politic and corporate named "The University of British Columbia." In 1891 this Act was amended
to require that a meeting of the Senate be held within one
month after the election of the Senators by Convocation.
The Senators were elected, but a quorum did not assemble
on the date fixed by the Chancellor, Dr. I. W. Powell, of
Victoria. Thus the first attempt to establish a University in
British Columbia failed.
However, some of the work normally done in a University was begun in 1894, when an Act was passed which permitted the affiliation of high schools in the Province with
recognized Canadian Universities. In 1899 Vancouver High
School was affiliated with McGill University in order to
provide First Year work in Arts, and took the name of Vancouver College. First Year work in Arts was offered by
Victoria High School when it became Victoria College by
affiliation with McGill University in 1902. In the same year
Vancouver College undertook the Second Year in Arts.
In 1906 an Act was passed incorporating the Royal
Institution for the Advancement of Learning of British
Columbia, which, in the same year, established at Vancouver the McGill University College of British Columbia. The
scope of the work undertaken by this college was gradually
increased until at the time it was taken over by the University of British Columbia it was giving three years in Arts
and Science, and two years in Applied Science. When the
University of British Columbia opened in the autumn of
1915, both the McGill University College of Vancouver and
Victoria College, which since 1907 had been a part of it,
ceased to exist.
Definite steps to establish the University were taken by
Dr. H. E. Young, Minister of Education, in 1907, when he 16 The University of British Columbia
introduced a "University Endowment Act." This Act was
followed in 1908 by an Act establishing and incorporating
the University of British Columbia and repealing the old
Act of 1890-1. This Act, with its subsequent amendments,
determines the present constitution of the University.
As authorized by an Act passed by the Provincial Legislature in 1910, the Lieutenant-Governor in Council appointed a Site Commission to decide upon a site for the proposed University. The Commission held its first meeting on
May 25 th, 1910, in Victoria, and after a thorough examination of the Province recommended the vicinity of Vancouver. In the autumn the Executive Council decided to
place the University at Point Grey—the site which the
Commission had named as its first choice. In 1911 the Legislature passed an Act authorizing the Lieutenant-Governor
in Council to grant this site to the University. The grant
was increased in 1915, so that it now consists of 548 acres
at the extremity of Point Grey. The waters of the Gulf of
Georgia form more than half the boundary of the University Campus. A tract of some 3,000 acres of Government
land immediately adjoining the site, and lying between it
and the City of Vancouver, has been set aside by the Government in order that University revenue may be provided
by its sale or lease.
In February, 1912, the Hon. H. E. Young, Minister of
Education, called for competitive plans which should include plans in detail for four buildings to be erected immediately, and a block plan showing all the proposed buildings
on the Campus. Messrs. Sharp and Thompson, of Vancouver, B.C., were the successful competitors, and were appointed University Architects.
The first Convocation, held on August 21st, 1912, chose
Mr. F. L. Carter-Cotton as first chancellor of the University. In March, 1913, the Lieutenant-Governor in Council
appointed as President of the University F. F. Wesbrook,
M.A., M.D., CM., LL.D. On April 4th, 1918, Dr. R. E.
McKechnie was elected Chancellor. Dr. McKechnie has Historical Sketch 17
been re-elected continuously since that date and entered on
his sixth term in May, 1933. On the death of President
Wesbrook, October 20th, 1918, L. S. Klinck, Dean of the
Faculty of Agriculture, was appointed acting President, and
on June 1st, 1919, President.
From its opening in 1915 till the Summer of 1925, the
University carried on its work in temporary quarters on
part of the site of the General Hospital in Fairview.
Construction work was commenced on the Science
Building at the permanent site in Point Grey in 1914, but
was interrupted because of war conditions. Work on this
building was resumed in 1923, and in the Autumn of the
same year the contract was let for the Library. These two
buildings, which are of stone and are fireproof, conform
closely to the original plans as prepared by the architects in
1914. The initial units of these structures, as well as nine
other buildings which are of a less permanent character and
are described at a later page in this Calendar, were completed in 1925, and at the beginning of Session 1925-26 the
University commenced work in its new quarters.
The Inauguration of the new buildings was held on
October 15th and 16th, 1925, on which occasion honorary
degrees were granted by the University for the first time.
THE CONSTITUTION OF THE UNIVERSITY
The Constitution of the University is governed by the
British Columbia University Act, B.C.R.S. 1924, c. 265, and
Amending Acts, which provide
That the University shall consist of a Chancellor, Convocation, Board of Governors, Senate, the Faculty
Council, and the Faculties; that the first Convocation
shall consist of all graduates of any university in His
Majesty's dominions resident in the Province two
years prior to the date fixed for the first meeting of
Convocation, together with twenty-five members selected by the Lieutenant-Governor in Council. After
the first Convocation it shall consist of the Chancel- 18 The University of British Columbia
lor, Senate, members of the first Convocation, and all
graduates of the University; that the Chancellor shall
be elected by Convocation; that the Board of Governors shall consist of the Chancellor, President, and
nine persons appointed by the Lieutenant-Governor
in Council; that the Senate shall consist of: (a) The
Minister of Education, the Chancellor, and the President of the University, who shall be chairman thereof; (b) the deans and two professors of each of the
Faculties elected by members of the Faculty;  (c)
three members to be appointed by the Lieutenant-
Governor in Council;   (d)  the Superintendent of
Education, the principals of the normal schools; (e)
one member elected by the high-school principals and
assistants who are actually engaged in teaching; (/)
one member to be elected by the governing body of
every affiliated college or school in this Province; (g)
fifteen members to be elected by Convocation from
the members thereof.
It is further provided that the University shall be non-
sectarian.
The University Act gives the University full powers to
grant such degrees in the several Faculties and different
branches of knowledge as the Senate may from time to time
determine. It reserves for the University the sole right in
this Province to confer degrees, except in Theology, and it
expressly enacts that "No other university having corporate
powers capable of being exercised within the Province shall
be known by the same name, nor shall any such university
have power to grant degrees."
THE WORK OF THE UNIVERSITY
The University of British Columbia is an integral part
of the public education system of the Province, and its
function is to complete the work begun in the public and
high schools. It is the policy of the University to promote
education in general, and in particular to serve its constitu- Retiring Allowances 19
ency through three channels—teaching, research, and extension work.
As regards teaching, the University furnishes instruction in the various branches of a liberal education and in
those technical departments which are most directly related
to the life and industries of the Province. The scope of the
teaching activity of the University is fully described in
Sec. 9 of the Act.
In order to make the teaching of the University more
vital and for the advancement of knowledge, research is
encouraged in every department.
The people of the Province are informed of the results
of special work by the staff of the University through a
system of extension lectures. The University sends lecturers
to various parts of the Province during the examination
weeks in December and April. In the case of places which
can be visited without prejudice to the duties of the lecturer
at the University, lectures are arranged to take place during
the University term. A list of subjects and lecturers can be
obtained on application to the Secretary of the Extension
Lecture Committee, through whom all arrangements are
made.
RETIRING ALLOWANCES
In March, 1924, the Board of Governors of the University of British Columbia adopted the contributory plan of
retiring allowances for members of the teaching staff. Contracts are placed with the Teachers' Insurance and Annuity
Association of America, a corporation made possible by the
Carnegie Corporation "to provide insurance and annuities
for teachers and other persons employed by colleges, by universities, or by institutions engaged primarily in educational
or research work."
In May, 1924, the University of British Columbia was 20 The University of British Columbia
elected as a member of the list of institutions associated
with the Carnegie Foundation for the Advancement of
Teaching and received a grant of $50,000.00, payable in
ten annual instalments, for the purpose of providing supplementary annuities for the older professors of the institution.
ENDOWMENTS AND DONATIONS
In anticipation of endowments the Act provides that:
"Any person or corporation may, with the approval of the Senate,
found one or more professorships, lectureships, fellowships,
scholarships, exhibitions, prizes, or other awards in the University, by providing a sufficient endowment in land or other property, and conveying the same to the University for such purposes,
and every such endowment of lands or other property shall be
vested in the University for the purpose or purposes for which it
is given."
Only a limited number are in a position to make endowments, but many—including alumni and friends of higher
education—may add greatly to the usefulness of the University by making contributions that lie within their power.
It is gratifying to note that the number of those who assist
in this way has been constantly growing.
It has become a tradition for each Graduating Class to
make a memorial gift to the University. That of the Class
of 1932 was the sum of $3 50 to form the nucleus of a Book
Endowment Fund for the Library. The interest of this Fund
is to be used for the purchase of books. The hope of the
Class in establishing this Trust is that the Fund would be
augmented by further gifts from graduating classes, from
friends of the University and its Library, and by bequests.
The removal of the University to its permanent home
in Point Grey has greatly stimulated interest in its welfare
and progress, and within the last few years many valuable
donations have been received, especially in the form of
equipment for the various Laboratories. Endowments and Donations
21
A list of the most important gifts received during last
year is given below under the various departments.
Department of Botany
(For Herbarium and Botanical Gardens)
SEEDS
CANADA Department of Agriculture, Ottawa.
Braham Griffith, Aleza Lake, B. C
R. Hammond, Victoria, B.C.
Mrs. J. R. Standon, Penticton, B.C.
Mrs. S. Stoker, Duncan, B.C.
Dr. T. M. C Taylor, University of Toronto.
John Zarelli, Victoria, B.C.
Miss Jean Davidson, Ann Arbor, Michigan.
Brooklyn Botanic Garden, Brooklyn.
Lexington Botanic Garden.
Marsh Botanical Garden, Tale University.
U. S. Department of Agriculture.
Royal Botanic Gardens, Kew, England.
Royal Botanic Gardens, Edinburgh, Scotland.
Botanic Gardens, Glasgow, Scotland.
Botanic Gardens, Glasnevin, Ireland.
Royal Horticultural Society, Ripley, Surrey.
George P. Baker, Esq., England.
Lloyd Botanic Garden, Darjeeling.
Botanical Garden, Lund.
Botanical Garden, Amsterdam.
Arboretum Landbouwhoogeschool, Wageningen.
Jardin Botanique pare de la Tete-d'or, Lyon.
Ecoles Forestieres des Barres.
Jardin Botanique, Ville de Nantes.
Museum d'Historie Naturelle, Paris.
Botanic Garden, Hakkaido Imperial University,
Sapporo.
Botanischen Gartens, Basel.
Botanlscher Garten der Universitat Griefswald.
Botanischen Gartens, Bremen.
Botanical Gardens, Koln am Rhein.
Botanischen Gartens, Berlin-Dahlem.
Department of Botany, University of Rome.
Dr. L. Lemperg, Hatzendorf, Steiermark.
Botanical Garden, University of Warsaw.
Botanical Garden of Poznan, Poznan.
Botanical Garden, Kaunas, Lithuania.
Botanical Garden, Kamianetz-Fodilskyj, U.S.S.R.,
Ucraina.
Botanic Garden, University of Latvia, Riga.
UNITED STATES
GREAT BRITAIN
SWEDEN
HOLLAND
FRANCE
JAPAN
SWITZERLAND
GERMANY
ITALY
AUSTRIA
POLAND
RUSSIA
HERBARIUM AND GARDEN SPECIMENS
E. C. Banno, Portland, Oregon—"A Flora of the United States and Canada,"
by Alphonso Wood, A.M.
George Fraser, F.R.H.S., Ucluelet, B.C.—Specimens for Botanical Gardens.
Braham Griffith, Aleza Lake—Malaxis paludosa (New record for Canada).
Miss C. Hansford—Collection of specimens from the Forbidden Plateau, V.I.
John Ridington, Vancouver—Eriodendron anfractuosum, "Kapok," Papeete.
John Zarelli, Victoria, B.C.—Ceratonia Siliqua, Fruits.
Department of English
Edgar S. Smith—Copy of The Works of Shakespeare, given as a prize to be
offered for competition in English 9.
Department of Forestry
Publications were received from the following:
Dominion Forest Service, Ottawa; Dominion Parks Branch, Ottawa;
National Development Bureau, Ottawa; Dominion Department of Agriculture, Ottawa; B. C. Forest Branch, Victoria; U. S. Department of Agriculture
and Forest Service, Washington; Yale University Forest School, New Haven; 22 The University of British Columbia
American Tree Association, Washington; Canadian Bank of Commerce,
Toronto; Canadian Pacific Railway, Montreal; Pacific Lumber Inspection
Bureau, Seattle; Touring Club of Italy, Milano; Timberman, Portland; West
Coast Lumberman, Seattle; Wood Preserving News, Chicago; West Coast
Lumberman's Association, Seattle; B. C. Lumber and Shingle Manufacturers' Association, Vancouver.
Other donations included tree seeds from Dominion Forest Service Seed
Extraction Plant, New Westminster; samples of wood, cones and foliage of
Pinus albicaulis from Lome F. Swannell, Victoria; and a sample board of
acacia from Professor G. A. Gillies.
Department of Geology and Geography
C. B. Darwin—Collection of stereoscope views of Western Indians, Hayden
Explorations, together with stereoscope.
F. Ebutt—Suite of rocks from Mt. Shasta, Cal.
R. H. Lerchen—Tetrahedite with galena, sphalerite and pyrite from Montana
Mine, Ruby, Santa Cruz Co., Arizona.
C. S. Lord—Antelope skulls, hippo and elephant teeth from Africa.
Edward Mahon—Photograph of mounted skeleton of Megaceros hibernicus,
at Powerscourt Castle, County Wicklow, Ireland.
J. F. M. Moodie and N. F. Moodie—Three specimens of "Barite Roses" from
the Permian Red Beds of Oklahoma.
Mitchell Pierce—Set of rock and mineral specimens, ethnological and natural history specimens from Bathurst Inlet, Coronation Gulf.
V. J. Southey—Mineral specimens.
Dr. H. V. Warren—Collection of rocks and ores from France and Spain.
SUGGESTED LOCAL SCHOLARSHIPS
As the number of Matriculation Scholarships offered at
present is quite inadequate to the needs of the Province, a
scheme which has great possibilities, both for the growth of
the University and the prosperity of the Province, is earnestly recommended to consideration.
In the large universities, both of Great Britain and the
United States, local or district scholarships have proved a
strong bond between the community and the University,
have brought the University close to the life of the young,
and opened up the prospect of a University education to
many who would not otherwise have contemplated it.
Such local or district scholarships might be established
as Matriculation Scholarships, by City or Municipal Councils or other public bodies, or by private benefactors. They
would be awarded by a local authority, but the University
would reserve the right of confirmation.
In awarding such scholarships, standing in the Matriculation Examination need not be the only consideration. It is
desirable that regard should be had also to financial circumstances, character, and intellectual promise. Scholarships
may be offered for students taking a particular course, and The Library 23
in this way the study of such sciences and technical branches
of knowledge as have special importance for the industries
of the district may be encouraged. In short, local scholarships may be arranged to meet local needs and to prepare
the native sons of the Province to play their part in the
development of its resources.
ADMISSION AT THE INNS OF COURT
The University of British Columbia has been approved
by the Council of Legal Education in England, and its degree examinations qualify its students for admission at any
one of the four Inns of Court.
This recognition is a great advantage to graduates of
The University of British Columbia who wish to read Law
and obtain Call to the Bar in England. It is particularly
useful to Rhodes Scholars who are often students at the Inns
of Court concurrently with their work at Oxford in the
final Honours School of Jurisprudence or in preparation for
the degree of B.C.L.
THE LIBRARY
The University Library consists of 85,000 volumes and
about 10,000 pamphlets. It includes representative works
in all the courses offered by the University, and a growing
collection of works on other subjects.
The Library receives regularly about 686 magazines and
periodical publications.
The book collection is classified throughout on the Congressional system.
Books can be borrowed by students for a period of seven
days, or for a shorter time should the work be in general
demand. Books to which the teaching staff have specially
referred their students are placed in a "Reserved" class.
These are shelved apart from the main collection, and are
loaned only for use in the building, and for a limited period
of two hours. They may, however, be taken from the
Library for over-night loan, or for any period in which the 24 The University of British Columbia
Library is closed. In these cases they are returnable before
9 a.m., or, in the case of students of classes meeting at 8:45
a.m., before 10 a.m.
Unbound periodicals are not loaned. Bound periodicals,
and books that are costly, rare, or unsuitable for general
circulation, are loaned only under special conditions.
While the Library is primarily for the staff and students
of the University, its resources are available to those of the
general public engaged in research or special study, and who
make personal application to the Librarian for the privilege
of its use. Such persons are known as "Extra-mural Readers." By order of the Board of Governors, a fee of $1.00 per
calendar year is charged such readers. In addition, they pay
necessary mailing costs, a deposit being required from those
unable to call personally for books loaned.
During the session the Library is open on week days
from 8:45 a.m. to 9:45 p.m., except on Friday, when the
hour of closing is 5 p.m., and on Saturday, when it closes at
1 p.m. These hours may be changed during the session 1933-
34. In vacation it is open from 9 a.m. to 4 p.m., except on
Saturdays, when the hours are from 9 a.m. to noon.
The University is deeply indebted to all who have made
gifts to the Library during the past year. These have been
both valuable and numerous. Their number prevents detailed acknowledgment, but recognition should be made of
a number of sets of transactions, and complete or partial
sets of scientific periodicals, given by societies and friends
of the University. The most interesting and valuable of
these gifts are listed in the annual report of the Library to
the Senate. LOCATION AND BUILDINGS
LOCATION
The University is situated on the promontory which
forms the western extremity of the Point Grey Peninsula.
On three sides it is bounded by the Gulf of Georgia. The site
comprises an area of 548 acres, of which approximately one-
half is campus. In all directions appear snow-capped mountains, strikingly rugged and impressive.
BUILDINGS
The buildings, planned to meet the requirements of fifteen hundred students, are of two classes, permanent and
semi-permanent. The former were designed by the University architects, Messrs. Sharp and Thompson, the latter by
architects of the Department of Public Works of the Provincial Government. The permanent buildings have been
erected in the location originally assigned for them; the
others in the quadrangle designated as "unassigned" in the
original plan. By utilizing the "unassigned" area for the
semi-permanent buildings, all the locations intended for
future expansion have been left available.
The entire mechanical equipment of these buildings was
designed after a close study had been made not only of
present requirements, but of the ultimate development of
the institution. This consideration accounts for the fact
that only a part of the present equipment is permanent.
After a careful survey of the whole system, a forced hot
water system was found to present advantages that made its
adoption advisable. Direct radiation with a system of
warmed air supply and extraction for ventilation is used
to take care of the heat losses in the buildings. A separate
system of ventilation is installed for all sanitary conveniences, and a specially constructed system for fume closets.
The various services throughout these buildings, such as
hot and cold water, distilled water, gas and steam for laboratory purposes, compressed air, etc., with the necessary apparatus, are all of a modern type. An attempt has been made
to reduce vibration and noise to a minimum by installing 26 The University of British Columbia
all moving apparatus on floating slabs, with a further insulation of cork.
The plan at the back of the Calendar shows the buildings which have been erected and indicates the nature of
their construction. It also shows their relation to the other
groups of buildings which are to be erected in the future.
PERMANENT BUILDINGS
Of the twelve buildings which have been erected, three
are of fire-proof construction, the Science Building, the
Library, and the Power House.
Science Building
The Science Building has been designed in the Tudor
Style, this being a phase of English Gothic which lends itself
fairly readily to those adaptations which are necessary in
order to meet modern collegiate requirements. Externally,
British Columbia granite has been used throughout. Wherever possible plain wall surfaces, consisting of the split
faces of granite arranged in random sizes with white joints,
have been used. The general grey tone is relieved by the use
of a small quantity of field stone of darker shades. All window openings are filled with leaded glass in steel sashes.
Internally, the building is finished in brick work and tiles
in pleasing tones of brown which harmonize with the oak
panelled doors, the total effect in keeping with that of the
period it is designed to represent.
This building accommodates the Departments of Chemistry, Physics, Bacteriology and Nursing and Health. One
and one-half floors are devoted to Chemistry; an equivalent
assignment of space has been allotted to Physics, and half of
one floor has been set aside for Bacteriology, and Nursing
and Health. All lecture rooms and laboratories are well
lighted, and a system of forced ventilation has been installed throughout the entire building. Distilled water, gas,
steam, compressed air, and electrical supply circuits have
been provided wherever required. These services are car- Location and Buildings 27
ried in trenches in the floor, an arrangement which facilitates any necessary repairs.
Ample provision has also been made for offices, balance
rooms, preparation rooms, apparatus rooms, supply rooms,
photographic rooms, technicians' rooms, and reading-room
for students.
Chemistry.—This Department is equipped with one
large and one small lecture room, a large laboratory for
general chemistry accommodating three hundred and forty
students, laboratories for elementary and advanced qualitative and quantitative analysis, an elementary organic
laboratory, an advanced organic laboratory and an organic
combustion laboratory. A laboratory is available for agricultural chemistry, another for industrial chemistry, and a
commodious laboratory for physical chemistry, with an adjoining dark room for work in photo-chemistry, is found on
the third floor. There are also several small laboratories well
equipped for research work.
Physics.—The Department of Physics has two large and
one small lecture rooms, four large and several smaller
laboratories, a constant temperature room, a battery room,
an apparatus room and an instrument maker's shop. Two of
the large laboratories are equipped for the study of Elementary Physics, while the other two are used for intermediate
work in Mechanics, and Heat and Electricity. A number of
the smaller laboratories have adjoining photographic dark
rooms and are used for more advanced work in light, X-rays
and Spectroscopy. Some of the small laboratories are specially equipped for research work in the various branches
of Physics.
Bacteriology.—Provision has been made in this Department for four laboratories. Two of these are for general
student use, one is for serological work and one is for advanced research. In addition to laboratory and lecture room
accommodation, an office, a preparation room and a sterilization room have been provided. 2 8 The University of British Columbia
Nursing and Health.—The three rooms assigned to this
Department constitute a teaching unit such as is provided
in modern training schools for the instruction of nurses.
All the equipment necessary for the demonstration of elementary nursing procedure is available, and can be used
for practice teaching purposes.
Library Building
The Central unit of the Library Building is a massive
structure of British Columbia granite which harmonizes
with the Science Building in its Gothic architectural lines.
Owing to the exigencies of the plan, however, the massing
is more broken, and thus better effects of light and shade
are obtained. Some tracery and stained glass in the upper
portion of the building is employed to obtain in a restricted
manner the richness of detail characteristic of this style of
architecture.
Internally the same effect has been striven for, wherever
such an end was possible with due regard to economy. The
Main Entrance Hall has a groined ceiling with arches and
wall surface finished in Caen Stone plaster. This treatment
is carried up to the Main Concourse floor through the staircase Hall; the lower portion of the Concourse walls is plastered with Caen stone, the quoins to windows and doors, and
corbels to roof trusses being finished in the same material.
The roofs of the Concourse and of the two reading rooms
adjacent are finished in native woods stained a dark brown,
with patterae and shields picked out in bright heraldic colours. Windows throughout the building are of leaded glass.
In the Concourse and the inner hall this is of a pale amber
shade, with the coats of arms of the Canadian Universities
worked into the centre light. On the window above the
Loan Desk on the East Side of the Concourse the armorial
bearings of Oxford and Cambridge, as the oldest universities
of the Empire, are used as flanking emblems to those of the
University of British Columbia. The floors of the Main
Entrance Hall staircases and of the Concourse are finished Location and Bueldings 29
with large marbled rubber tiles which harmonize with the
general colour scheme, and ensure quietness in the principal
parts of the building. Plain oak of simple detail, stained to
represent old fumed oak, is used throughout for doors and
other wood finish.
The principal reading room has a floor space of 100 ft.
by 50 ft. and is 60 ft. in height. Two other reading rooms,
each 60 ft. by 30 ft., open off the main reading room. These
rooms provide accommodation for 250 students. The sixth
and seventh tiers of the stack, not being required at present
to house the University book collection, are used as a periodical room, and will accommodate about fifty readers. The
Stack, which occupies the entire rear of the building, consists of seven tiers, four of which are fully equipped with
steel stacks of the latest design. Here fifty-two semi-private
study "carrels" facilitate research for advanced students.
The offices of the Librarian and the Library Staff provide
ample accommodation for receiving, cataloguing and accessioning. The Faculty common room, the "Browsing" room,
and the Frank Burnett museum are also located in this
building. The Burnett collection represents the arts, handicraft and weapons of Polynesia. This collection, which was
presented by the late Mr. Burnett to the University, is the
result of numerous voyages made by him to the Central and
South Pacific Islands. It constitutes one of the finest collections of this class of material yet accumulated by any private
collector.
Power House
The Power House has been placed in the centre of the
space which will ultimately be the Engineering Quadrangle,
and will therefore eventually be masked by the future permanent buildings towards the Mall. For this reason it does
not pretend to follow very closely the style of the other
permanent buildings except in mass, being finished in roughcast of broken texture, relieved with red quarry tiles as
diapers, copings, and offsets, with windows grouped as far 30 The University of British Columbia
as possible to give pleasing proportions of voids and solids.
The ultimate development of this plant will be 2500
horsepower at normal rating. The present installation consists of three units, each of 250 horsepower normal rating,
capable of developing 100 per cent, in excess of this. Each
unit, so equipped as to operate independently of the others,
may act as a service as well as an experimental station. In
other words, on any one boiler an experimental test may be
conducted while the rest of the plant is cut in on the service
lines. Instruments are provided to record every operation
so that close checking and comparisons of the performance
of the different types of boilers .may be made to a degree.
The B. & W. Unit is equipped with B. & W. Natural
Draft Stoker, the Sterling Boiler with forced draft Coxe
Travelling Grate. The Kidwell with forced draft Coxe
Travelling Grate is also equipped with air pre-heater, bypassed, so that tests may be conducted with or without preheated air. Induced draft is used with individual forced
draft fans; separate boiler feed lines and pump with Line-
hart Scale provide boiler feed for tests. A travelling weigh
scale records the amount of coal used, while a steam jet ash
conveyor elevates the ashes to an over-head bunker.
The efficiency and flexibility of the plant lends itself to
economical operation, while the knowledge gained in the
use of different appliances will be of interest and value to
power plant users.
SEMI-PERMANENT BUILDINGS
In this group there are ten buildings in all—Administration, Auditorium and Grill room, Arts, Applied Science,
Agriculture; three Engineering Buildings—Mechanical,
Electrical; Mining, Metallurgy and Hydraulics; the Forest
Products Laboratory Building and the Gymnasium. These
buildings, which are set on concrete foundations, are of
frame construction with stucco finish, and are designed for
a life of forty years. Their exterior design harmonizes with
the permanent buildings so far as materials of construction Location and Buildings 31
will permit. With the exception of a part of the Engineering Laboratories, these buildings have been finished internally with plaster and fir trim.
Administration Buildings
On the ground floor of this building are situated the
offices of the President, the Dean of the Faculty of Arts and
Science, the Registrar, and the Bursar. On the second floor
are two large rooms, one for meetings of the Board of Governors and the Senate, and the other for meetings of Faculties and Committees.
Auditorium Building
The Auditorium Building is designed in a pleasing treatment of Renaissance architecture and is furnished with the
most modern equipment. It has a seating capacity of 1029,
a large and admirably equipped stage for the encouragement of dramatic presentations, an orchestra pit and adequate off-stage dressing rooms. Provision has been made for
the operating of moving pictures, and the stage is equipped
with a cyclorama and all necessary electrical illumination
devices.
The Grill room is situated in the basement and is designed to accommodate 400 students at one time. There is
also a small dining room for the Faculty. The kitchen is furnished with the latest cooking and baking equipment.
The bookstore, post office, medical offices, women's rest
room, students' council offices, and numerous committee
rooms for subsidiary organizations are also located in this
building.
Arts Building
In the Arts Building, which forms the centre of the
semi-permanent group, are located the lecture rooms and
offices for the following Departments in the Faculty of Arts
and Science: Classics, Economics, Sociology and Political
Science, Education, English, History, Mathematics, Modern
Languages and Philosophy. 3 2 The University of British Columbia
The lecture rooms, 16 in number, are well designed and
exceptionally well lighted. The largest room accommodates
250 students; the seating capacity of the others ranges from
32 to 64. Four common rooms for the undergraduates in
Arts and Science are located in this building, as is also the
office of the Dean of Women.
Applied Science Building
This building houses the Departments of Geology, Botany, Zoology, Forestry, and the drafting rooms and offices
for Civil Engineering. All the laboratories have been
equipped with the essential services. One large lecture room,
providing accommodation for 250 students, and 11 smaller
lecture rooms with a seating capacity ranging from 25 to
112, are located in this building. These will be used by the
different Departments jointly as class requirements may
determine. Extensive provision has been made for drafting
rooms and for the necessary offices, preparation rooms, storage rooms, and photographic rooms. A geological museum, a
reading room and a common room for students have also
been provided.
Geology.—In addition to the necessary lecture rooms,
the Department of Geology has three large and well
equipped laboratories, the Mineralgoical, the Petrological
and the Geological. There are also two small research laboratories, one for graduate students and one for the staff.
The Department workroom is well equipped for the
preparation of specimens. The museum contains valuable
collections of illustrative material which supplements the
extensive working collections in the laboratories. The reading room is equipped with books, separates, maps, photographs and slides for reference.
Botany.—The Botanical laboratories include a large
junior laboratory, a senior laboratory, two student research
laboratories and three private research rooms. These laboratories are used for practical work in Botany and General
Biology. A Herbarium of over 15,000 sheets and a botanical Location and Buildings 33
garden containing over 1000 specimens of native plants
furnish an abundance of material for class room and laboratory purposes.
Zoology.—This Department, which includes courses in
Entomology, has two large laboratories, a small research
laboratory and two private laboratories, all well equipped.
There is also a room for class material, which will serve for
a time as a repository for museum collections and for specimens to be used for illustration.
Forestry.—While the Department of Forestry has its
own laboratory for work in wood technology, its own class
room and offices, it uses the laboratories of other Departments quite extensively, notably those in Biology, Civil
Engineering and Forest Products. The Department possesses, in the forest belt which has been preserved on the
campus as a natural park, a very valuable outdoor laboratory for forestry students.
Civil Engineering.—Well equipped and well lighted
draughting and designing rooms are available for all classes
in drawing, mapping, machine design and computation
work. The equipment necessary for all types of Civil Engineering work is available. The hydraulic laboratory, which
is situated in the Mining, Metallurgy and Hydraulics Building, is well equipped for demonstrations and tests covering
the main field of hydraulic principles and machinery; while
in the Forest Products Laboratory, which is at the disposal
of students in Civil Engineering, excellent facilities are
available for extensive tests of timber, cement and steel.
Agriculture Building
This building accommodates the Departments of Agronomy, Animal Husbandry, Dairying, Horticulture and
Poultry Husbandry. The office and record rooms for the
Farm Survey studies are also located in this building.
The lecture rooms, of which there are three, are exceptionally well lighted. The largest accommodates 112 stu- 34 The University of British Columbia
dents, while the seating capacity of the others ranges from
36 to 54.
In addition to lecture and laboratory accommodation,
provision has been made for the necessary offices, preparation rooms, storage rooms, and also for a photographic dark
room, a herd book room, and a students' common room.
Agronomy.—The laboratories of this Department are
provided with adequate equipment for studies in soil, field
husbandry and plant breeding problems. Additional space
is available in the Agronomy Building for studies in the
classification and grading of field crops. I
Animal Husbandry.—The different classes and types of
livestock constitute the main laboratory material of this
department. In this material and in the farm survey records,
the Department possesses equipment for teaching and illustration in farm management, livestock management, feed
and nutrition, and studies in pedigree and breeding.
Dairying.—The laboratories of the Department of
Dairying provide facilities for the training of students in
Dairy Science. 3
Horticulture.—In this Department facilities are provided for demonstration and student practice in the propagation, planting, pruning and general care of horticultural
crops. Laboratory materials for these purposes are provided
from the orchard, the garden, the nurseries, the campus
plantings, and the recently built greenhouse range which
consists of several sections devoted to practical horticulture
or used for special plant studies.
The well-equipped research laboratory in the Agriculture Building also enables both undergraduate and graduate
students to receive training in the technique of plant research.
Poultry Husbandry.—In the poultry laboratories facilities, materials and equipment are provided to assist in the
study of poultry nutrition, disease, breeding, marketing and
other problems related to the industry. Location and Buildings 35
Mechanical and Electrical Buildings
The Department of Mechanical and Electrical Engineering is housed in two large buildings. In both will be
found the most up-to-date equipment, enabling students to
obtain a thorough experimental knowledge of all phases of
the work in these departments. The mechanical laboratory
contains a modern 3-ton CO2 refrigerating plant; a large
Corliss engine; a two-stage air-compressor with inter-
cooler; a 50 H.P. Mirrlees Bickerton & Day pure Diesel engine with Froude water brake; a De Laval Steam Turbine
and D.C. generator with condenser; a gasoline engine and
generator; a Crossley two-stroke oil engine and a National
gas engine. A complete equipment exists for testing calorific
values of fuel oils and coals, and also for testing exhaust
gases of engines. There are also two steam engines, one a
single cylinder engine and the other a compound engine.
The mechanical students have available also the powerhouse
equipment for testing, which consists of three 250 H.P.
boilers—a Kidwell, a Babcock & Wilcox, and a Sterling. In
addition, a 250-K.W. compound engine and generator and
every variety of pump is available for experimental work.
The Electrical laboratory is entirely modern, and contains a 3-phase synchronous motor, driving a 75-K.W. compound wound generator with static balancer. There is a
three-phase rotary converter with reactance control and
panels, and a Deri brush-shifting repulsion motor; a three-
phase shunt commutator motor of the Schrage type, several
squirrel cage and slipring induction motors, a three-phase
alternator and D.C. motor; two-level compound D.C. generators on the same base. Another machine, specially designed for us by the Cerlikon Company, serves as three-
phase shunt and series commutator motor, single-phase
repulsion, three-phase induction motor, three-phase rotary
converter, and is intended to illustrate the principles of most
of the A.C. commutator motors. There is also a small induction motor with a condenser attached to illustrate power
factor improvement. 3 6 The University of British Columbia
There are also series, shunt and compound wound D.C.
motors and an induction regulator, a single-phase rotary
converter; a Winter-Eichberg single-phase commutator
motor; several transformers; a mercury-arc rectifier; an
oscillograph of the Duddell type; a cathode-ray oscillograph
of the General Electric type; a Campbell inductometer and
complete equipment for high frequency bridge-testing. An
alternating current potentiometer made by Tinsley, Gall's
patent, exists for standardizing work, and also vacuum tube
instruments for obtaining characteristics of tubes. In addition, a large amount of equipment is available for carrying out all the junior tests, including potentiometers,
standard bridges, iron testing, Epstein iron tester, ballistic
galvanometers and other instruments.
Mining, Metallurgy and Hydraulics Building
The Mining and Metallurgical laboratories cover a total
area of 5,000 square feet. The Ore Dressing laboratory,
which includes a workshop, storage room and flotation
room, is well equipped with a variety of small scale machines,
including crusher, rolls, screens, jigs, ball mill and tables.
The laboratory is fully wired for power and light, and has
large water mains and drains, and a two-ton travelling
crane. The Metallurgical laboratory includes a fire assay
room, with oil, gasoline and gas furnaces; a wet assay room,
with large fan-draught hood, and work benches fitted for
electric and gas heating; two balance rooms; a photographic
dark room; and ample storage space.
The Hydraulics laboratory is well equipped for tests
and demonstrations of high and low pressure hydraulic
machines and pumps. A 60-horsepower D.C. motor is
utilized to drive either a 10-inch single stage centrifugal
pump having a capacity of 2400 gallons per minute against
a 70-foot head, or to drive a 4-inch two-stage pump having
a capacity of 525 gallons per minute against a 325-foot
head. The water from the large pump can be used to drive
a 10-inch vertical reaction turbine, while the flow from the Location and Buildings 37
high-pressure pump can be used to drive an 18-inch Pelton
Wheel, thus providing students with actual working demonstrations of all the ordinary types of machines. Installations include apparatus for weir, nozzle, and orifice
measurements, flow in pipes, tests and demonstrations of
Venturi, current and service meters. One section of the
laboratory is set apart for making the standard tests of
cement and sand.
The Gymnasium
This building was completed in 1929 and presented to
the University by the Alma Mater Society. It is situated
adjacent to the tennis courts and conveniently close to the
playing fields. The style of architecture and exterior finish
harmonizes well with that of the other buildings on the
campus. The playing floor has an area of 6000 square feet,
and is surrounded on three sides by tiers of benches which
will accommodate 1400 persons. In the space behind these
seats are located the dressing rooms, drying rooms, locker
rooms and shower baths. Approximately one-third of this
space has been set aside for the exclusive use of the women
students. In addition there are four large rooms. Three of
these have been assigned to the Boxing and Wrestling Club,
the Chess Club, and the Musical Society respectively. The
fourth is a well-equipped kitchen. The main floor is used for
basketball and badminton as well as for class exercises and
games. Equipment suitable for general gymnasium and
indoor athletic work has been provided.
Forest Products Laboratory Buildings
The Forest Products Laboratories of Canada, Vancouver Laboratory, which is maintained by the Forest Service
of the Department of the Interior, Canada, occupies three
buildings provided and kept up through a co-operative
agreement between the University and the Dominion Government.
Administrative and executive offices occupy the second 3 8 The University of British Columbia
floor of the main building, while the first floor is devoted
to the Timber Testing and Pathological laboratories and the
Carpenter Shop. Equipment in the Timber Testing laboratory consists of two Olsen Universal machines of thirty
thousand pounds capacity, for testing small, clear test
pieces; one Olsen Universal machine, of two hundred thousand pounds capacity, for tests on structural timbers, poles,
etc.; and one Hatt-Turner Impact machine. These machines are all operated by individual direct current motors
and are furnished with all necessary accessory testing equipment. They are adapted to the testing of materials of construction other than timber and are at the disposal of students in Civil Engineering and Forestry for such tests. There
are also three electric ovens, with thermostatic control, for
the conditioning of test material.
The Pathological laboratory is equipped with two electric incubators with thermostatic control, an autoclave and
apparatus of the latest type for the mounting and identification of wood specimens. The laboratory maintains a reference collection of mycelial cultures of the chief wood
destroying fungi of British Columbia; also a collection of
microscopic slides of North American wood species. These
collections are being increased as opportunity offers.
The Experimental Dry Kiln building contains the most
up-to-date equipment for the scientific seasoning of lumber
and other forest products. It includes a semi-commercial
dry kiln, twenty feet in length, and a boiler and instrument
room, with a covered platform extending across the front
of the building, which provides protection for the kiln
charges during loading and unloading. The kiln is the latest
design of internal fan cross-circulation type, but is so arranged that it may be readily converted to the natural circulation type. Its equipment includes three disc-type fans
driven by a variable speed motor, 1100 feet of heating coils,
steam traps, steam and water meters and compressed air-
operated temperature and humidity recording and control
instruments. The equipment in the boiler room consists of General Information 39
a 10-HP. oil-fired boiler, an air compressor, electric ovens
for small tests, kiln circulation test instruments, an electric
meter for the measurement of moisture content of lumber,
a Parr calorimeter for testing the heating value of wood
fuel, and all necessary minor apparatus.
The Air Seasoning Shed provides accommodation for
the storage of test material and for conditioning lumber by
natural means. It is provided with racks for storing small
test bolts and with a soak tank for bringing test sticks to a
saturated moisture condition.
GENERAL INFORMATION
The Session
The academic year begins on the First of September and
ends on the last day of August. The Winter Session is
divided into two terms—the first, September to December;
the second, January to May. The Summer Session consists
of seven weeks' instruction in July and August, for which
preparatory reading is required except in certain cases. For
"Admission to the University" see Page 43, and for "Registration and Attendance" see Page 46.
Courses of Study
For the Session of 1933-34 the University offers instruction in each of the three Faculties, Arts and Science,
Applied Science (including Nursing), and Agriculture,
leading to the degrees of Bachelor of Arts, Bachelor of Commerce, Bachelor of Applied Science and Bachelor of Science
in Agriculture. In addition a course is given in the Faculty
of Arts and Science leading to a Diploma of Social Service,
and a Teacher Training Course is offered for graduates of
the Faculties of Arts and Science and Applied Science. It
is also possible to proceed to a Master's degree in each Faculty. Advanced courses of instruction and facilities for
research are offered to students who are graduates of any
University or College of recognized standing. Admission to 40 The University of British Columbia
these advanced courses, or to the privileges of research, does
not in itself imply admission to candidacy for a higher
degree.
Academic Dress
The undergraduate's gown is black in colour and of the
ordinary stuff material, of ankle length, and with long
sleeves and the yoke edged with khaki cord. The graduate's
gown is the same, without cord. The Bachelor's hood is of
the Cambridge pattern, black bordered with the distinctive
colour of the particular Faculty, the Bachelor of Commerce
hood being differentiated by the addition of a white cord;
the Master's hood is the same, lined with the distinctive
colour. The colours are, for Arts and Science, the University blue; for Applied Science, red; for Agriculture, maize.
University Health Service
The University Campus is situated within the University Endowment Lands, which, as unorganized territory,
comes under the direct control of the Provincial Government. Shortly after the opening of the present University
Buildings in 1925, the Lieutenant-Governor in Council, by
the recommendation of the Provincial Health Officer, appointed a Medical Health Officer for the Reserve, including
the University Campus. This Health Officer has on the
Campus and in the Reserve all the powers of any Health
Officer anywhere.
In the fall of 1927, the Provincial Health Officer added
to the University Health Service a Public Health Nurse,
whose presence permits the continuous operation of a local
Health Department on the Campus and Reserve.
In addition, the Public Health Nurse is engaged by the
University for the general supervision of the individual
health of the students, first aid, etc. An office for the Public
Health Nurse is provided in the Auditorium Building, and,
by the gift of the Graduating Class of 1927, has been
equipped with first aid furniture and supplies. General Information 41
Physical Examination.—In order to promote the physical welfare of the student body, students on entering the
University are required to report immediately to the University Health Service and obtain an appointment for their
physical examination; the examination is conducted by, or
under the direction of, the University Medical Examiner.
Physical defects and weaknesses, amenable to treatment,
may thus be discovered, and the student is advised to apply
to his physician for such remedial measures as his case may
require. About 10 to 15 per cent, of the students are reexamined in their second and subsequent years.
Rules Governing Medical Examinations.—(1) Students
must present themselves for medical examination on the
date and at the time assigned by the University Health Service. (2) Students failing to report on the right date or
reporting on a wrong date lose their assignment. (3) Students who do not conform to the above regulations will be
referred to the University Health Committee.
Infectious Diseases.—Students developing any illness or
suffering from any injury while on the Campus should apply
for first aid to the Public Health Nurse. This is particularly
required if the student develops any illness of an infectious
nature, including the Common Cold. Provision is made also
for the diagnosis of the infectious cases and their safe removal to suitable quarters.
Students developing any illness or suffering any injury
while at home, boarding house, fraternity house, etc., are
required to report the same to the Public Health Nurse.
The development of any infectious disease in a University
student must be reported by the student to the University
Health Service without delay.
Students exposed to any infectious disease must immediately report to the University Health Service. Such students
may be permitted, by special order of the Medical Health
Officer, to attend the University for a prescribed period,
despite the exposure. 42 The University of British Columbia
Such students shall report daily (or oftener, at the discretion of the Medical Health Officer), to the Public Health
Nurse for such prescribed period. Failure to so report will
result in immediate exclusion from the University.
Students absent on account of illness must present Medical Certificates. If the absence occurs during the session,
the student must appear in person, with the certificate, at
the University Health Service immediately on return to the
University, and before attendance upon class work. The
University Health Service will examine the person concerned and will immediately forward the certificate, with
report thereon, to the Dean of the Faculty. If the absence
occurs during the examinations, the medical certificate
must be sent to the Dean of the Faculty within two days
after the termination of the examination period. A medical
certificate must show the nature and the period of the disability. Medical report forms may be obtained from the
Dean's office.
University Employment Bureau
The objects of the Employment Bureau are to provide
students with summer employment, to provide part-time
work for students during the Winter Session, and to help
students in obtaining positions after graduation. This service is for employers seeking help and for students desiring
employment. Those who know of positions vacant are requested to notify the Bureau. Correspondence should be
addressed to the Employment Bureau, Registrar's Office.
Dean of Women
During the session the Dean of Women may be consulted
by parents and students on matters pertaining to living conditions, vocational guidance, and other questions that
directly affect the social and intellectual life of the women
students.
Board and Residence
A list of boarding-houses, which receive men or women Admission to the University 43
students, but not both, may be obtained from the Registrar
after September 1st. Men and women students are not permitted to lodge in the same house, unless they are members
of the same family, or receive special permission from the
Senate. Women students under twenty-five years of age
are permitted to occupy suites in apartment houses only
when accompanied by some older person. Any such arrangement must be made in consultation with the Dean of
Women. The Dean of Women also undertakes the inspection and approval of the boarding houses listed for women.
The cost of good board and lodging is from $25 per month
upwards; of a room alone, $8 to $12 per month. A grill is
operated under the supervision of the University, and lunch,
afternoon tea and light supper may be obtained there at
very reasonable prices. Refreshments at social functions are
also supplied.
General Conduct
The University authorities do not assume responsibilities which naturally rest with parents. This being so, it is
the policy of the University to rely on the good sense and on
the home training of students for the preservation of good
moral standards. 	
ADMISSION TO THE UNIVERSITY
All inquiries relating to admission to the University
should be addressed to the Registrar.
The accommodation for students in the University is
limited. The University, therefore, reserves the right to
limit the attendance.
For the session 1933-34 the number of First Year students in the Faculty of Arts and Science and the Faculty of
Agriculture will be limited to 500, in the Second Year of the
course in Applied Science to 120, in the First Year of the
course in Nursing to 15, and in the Teacher Training course
to 60.
1. Except under special circumstances no student
under the age of sixteen is admitted to the University. For 44 The University of British Columbia
admission to the course in Nursing a student must be seventeen years of age, and for admission to any course in Social
Service, twenty-one years of age.
2. Candidates for admission to the courses in the First
Year of the Faculty of Arts and Science or the Faculty of
Agriculture and to the course in Nursing in Applied Science are required to pass the Junior Matriculation Examination of the Province of British Columbia or to submit
certificates showing that they have passed an equivalent
examination elsewhere. Students over 18 years of age with
full "Normal Entrance" standing, who hold Normal School
certificates, are admitted to the University as having full
Junior Matriculation standing. Special regulations are prescribed for admission to courses in Applied Science, and are
given under the heading of "Admission" in the Applied
Science Section of the Calendar.
3. Students who have passed the Senior Matriculation
Examination are admitted to the courses of the Second
Year in the Faculty of Arts and Science. Students who have
partial Senior Matriculation standing, obtained in 1927 or
subsequently, will be granted credit in First Year Arts in
each subject in which they have made 50 per cent, or over,
or in each paper in which they have made 5 0 per cent, or
over, in so far as these papers correspond with those of First
Year Arts.
4. Certificates or diplomas showing that a candidate
has passed the Matriculation Examination of another University will be accepted in lieu of the Junior or Senior
Matriculation Examinations if the Faculty concerned considers that the examination has covered the same subjects
and required the same standard. If, however, the examination covers some but not all of the necessary subjects, the
candidate will be required to pass the Matriculation Examination in the subjects not covered.
5. A candidate who wishes to enter by certificates other
than a Matriculation certificate issued in British Columbia
should submit to the Registrar the original certificates. If Admission to the University 45
he wishes these returned to him, he must present also a copy
of each certificate for record at the University. He should
under no circumstances come to the University without
having first obtained from the Registrar a statement of the
value of the certificates he holds, as these may lack one or
more essential subjects, or the work done in a subject may
not be adequate, or, again, the percentage gained may not
be sufficiently high. Moreover, it must be remembered that
a certificate may admit to one Faculty and not to another.
When an applicant's diploma or certificate does not show
the marks obtained in the several subjects of the examination, he must arrange to have a statement of his marks sent
to the Registrar by the Education Department or University issuing such diploma or certificate. The fee for examination of certificates is $2.00. This fee must accompany
the application.
6. A student of another University applying for exemption from any subject or subjects which he has already
studied is required to submit with his application a Calendar of the University in which he has previously studied,
together with a complete statement of the course he has
followed and a certificate of the standing gained in the
several subjects.* The Faculty concerned will determine
the standing of such a student in this University. The fee
for the examination of certificates is $2.00. This fee must
accompany the application.
7. A student who has a failure in a subject of the Junior
Matriculation examination standing against him will not
be admitted to the University.
8. The Junior and Senior Matriculation Examinations
of the Province of British Columbia are conducted by the
High School and University Matriculation Board of the
Province. This Board consists of members appointed by
the Department of Education and by the University. The
requirements for Matriculation are stated in the publica-
•For the conditions under which exemption is granted In the Faculty of
Arts and Science, see "Courses Leading to the Degree of B.A." 46 The University of British Columbia
tion, "Requirements for Matriculation," issued by the University. The courses of study for the various grades in the
high school are given in the "Programme of Studies for the
High and Technical Schools," issued by the Department of
Education.
REGISTRATION AND ATTENDANCE
Those who intend to register as students of the University are required to make application to the Registrar, on
forms to be obtained from the Registrar's office. This application should be made in person or by mail early in August,
or as soon as the results of the Matriculation examinations
are known, and must be accompanied by the Registration
and Library Fee of $5.00. For First Year students in the
Faculties of Arts and Science, and Agriculture, and for
other students coming to the University for the first time,
the last day for registration is Wednesday, September 20th,
and for all other undergraduate students, Friday, September
22nd, 1933. (See regulations in reference to "Admission to
the University," page 43.)
1. There are four classes of students:—
(a) Graduate students — Students who are pursuing
courses of study in a Faculty in which they hold
a degree, whether they are proceeding to a Master's
degree or not.
(b) Full undergraduates—Students proceeding to a degree in any Faculty who have passed all the examinations precedent to the year in which they are
registered.
(c) Conditioned undergraduates—Students proceeding to a degree with defects in their standing which
do not prevent their entering a higher year under
the regulations governing "Examinations and Advancement" of the Faculty in which they are registered.
(d) Partial students—Students not belonging to one
of the three preceding classes.   (See 7, page 48.) Registration and Attendance 47
2. All students other than graduate students are required to register at the office of the Registrar on or before
the last day for registration, to furnish the information
necessary for the University records, to enrol for the particular classes which they wish to attend, and to sign the
following declaration:
"I hereby accept and submit myself to the statutes,
rules, regulations, and ordinances of The University of
British Columbia, and of the Faculty or Faculties in which
I am registered, and to any amendments thereto which
may be made while I am a student of the University, and I
promise to observe the same."
In the information furnished for the University records, students are requested to state what churches they
propose to make their place of worship. This information
is available for any of the city churches desiring it.
3. A late registration fee of $2.00 will be charged all
students who register after the above dates and up to and
including the day when lectures begin—Wednesday, September 27th.
In addition to the $2.00 for late registration a fine of
$1.00 a day ($6.00 a week) for a period of two weeks will
be imposed upon all students who register after the day
when lectures begin, the maximum fine being $14.00.
No registration after Wednesday, October llth (two
weeks beyond the date when lectures begin) will be accepted without the special permission of the Faculty concerned. A candidate so accepted for registration will have
to pay the maximum fine of $14.00 and may be required to take fewer courses than the regular year's work:
provided that if the student is required (on account of late
registration) to take less than fifteen units the fine may be
reduced or waived by the Faculty concerned.
4. Students registering for the first time must present
the certificates which constitute their qualification for admission to the course of study for which they wish to register. The Registrar is empowered to register all duly quali- 48 The University of British Columbia
fied students.   Doubtful cases will be dealt with by the
Faculty concerned.
5. Students doing work in two academic years will
register in the lower year and fill out their course cards in
such a way as to make clear which courses are required to
complete the lower year.
6. Students desiring to make a change in the course for
which they have registered must apply to the Registrar on
the proper form for a "change of course." Except in special
circumstance, no change will be allowed after the fifteenth
day of the session. If the application is approved by the
Faculty concerned, the Registrar will give the necessary
notifications.
7. Partial students, who are not proceeding to a degree,
are not normally required to pass an examination for admission, but before registering they must produce a certificate showing that they have satisfied the Dean and the
Heads of the Departments concerned that they are qualified to pursue with advantage the course of study which
they propose to undertake.
8. Students are required to attend at least seven-eighths
of the lectures in each course that they take. Lectures will
commence on the hour, and admission to a lecture or laboratory and credit for attendance may be refused by the
Instructor for lateness, misconduct, inattention or neglect
of duty. Absence consequent on illness or domestic affliction may be excused only by the Dean of the Faculty concerned, and medical certificates or other evidence must be
presented. If the absence occurs during the session, the
student must appear in person, with the certificate, at the
University Health Service immediately on return to the
University, and before attendance upon class work. The
University Health Service will examine the person concerned and will immediately forward the certificate, with
report thereon, to the Dean of the Faculty. If the absence
occurs during the examinations, the certificate must be sent
to the Dean of the Faculty within two days after the ter- Fees 49
mination of the examination period. A medical certificate
must show the nature and the period of the disability.
Medical report forms may be obtained from the Dean's
office. In cases of deficient attendance students may (with
the sanction of the Dean and the Head of the Department
concerned) be excluded from the Christmas or the final
examinations in a course; but, in the case of a final examination, unless the unexcused absences exceed one-fourth of
the total number of lectures in a course, such student may
be permitted to sit for supplemental examination. (See
regulation in each Faculty in reference to "Examinations
and Advancement.")
9. All candidates for a degree must make formal application for graduation at least one month previous to the
Congregation at which they expect to obtain the degree.
Special forms for this purpose may be obtained from the
Registrar's office. 	
FEES
All cheques must be certified and made payable to "The
University of British Columbia."
The Registration Fee is not returnable.
The Sessional Fees are as follows:—
For Full and Conditioned Undergraduates
in arts and scd2nce	
Registration and Library Fee—Payable before
registration  $    5.00
First Term—Payable on or before October 9th:
Sessional Fee $65.00
Alma Mater Fee  10.00
Caution Money     5.00
      80.00
Second Term—Payable on or before Jan. 22nd     60.00
$145.00 5 0 The University of British Columbia
in social service course—
Registration and Library Fee—Payable before
registration  $    5.00
First Term—Payable on or before October 9th:
Sessional Fee $65.00
Alma Mater Fee  10.00
Caution Money     5.00
      80.00
Second Term—Payable on or before Jan. 22nd     60.00
$145.00
NOTE:—Social Service Workers taking any of Courses 1-10, and these
courses only, are relieved from paying the Alma Mater fee.
IN TEACHER TRAINING COURSE	
Registration and Library Fee—Payable before
registration   $    5.00
First Term—Payable on or before October 9th:
Sessional Fee $65.00
Alma Mater Fee  10.00
Caution Money     5.00
      80.00
Second Term—Payable on or before Jan. 22nd     60.00
$145.00
IN APPLIED SCIENCE	
Registration and Library Fee—Payable before
registration   $    5.00
First Term—Payable on or before October 9th:
Sessional Fee $90.00
Alma Mater Fee  10.00
Caution Money     5.00
    105.00
Second Term—Payable on or before Jan. 22nd     85.00
$195.00 Fees 51
in nursing and public health—
Registration and Library Fee—Payable before
registration $    5.00
First Term—Payable on or before October 9th:
Sessional Fee $65.00
Alma Mater Fee  10.00
Caution Money     5.00
80.00
Second Term—Payable on or before Jan. 22nd    60.00
$145.00
NOTE:—For Third and'Fourth Year students in Nursing the Sessional
fee Is 11.00, payable with the Alma Mater fee of 110.00, on or before October 9th.
Students admitted to Nursing B or C and proceeding to the Certificate on
a basis of part-time attendance over two or more years, will pay the regular
fee for the whole course, but the amount payable each year will be prorated to correspond with the proportion of work taken In that year.
IN AGRICULTURE	
Registration and Library Fee—Payable before
registration  $    5.00
First Term—Payable on or before October 9 th:
Sessional Fee $65.00
Alma Mater Fee.  10.00
Caution Money     5.00
      80.00
Second Term—Payable on or before Jan. 22nd    60.00
OCCUPATIONAL COURSE— $145.00
Registration and Library Fee—Payable before
registration  $    5.00
First Term—Payable on or before October 9th:
Sessional Fee $25.00
Alma Mater Fee  10.00
Caution Money     5.00
40.00
Second Term—Payable on or before Jan 22nd     25.00
$ 70.00 5 2 The University of British Columbia
For Partial Students
Fees per "Unit" $12.50
Registration and Library Fee—Payable
before registration     5.00
First half payable on or before Oct. 9th,
along with—
Alma Mater Fee  10.00
Caution Money     5.00
Second half payable on or before Jan. 22nd.
For Students in Extra Sessional Classes
Fees per 3-Unit Course - $30.00
First half payable on or before Oct. 9th,
along with Caution Money -     5.00
Second half payable on or before Jan. 22nd.
For Graduates
Registration and Library Fee—Payable before registration  $    5.00
Class Fees—Payable on or before Oct. 9th:
First Registration  $75.00
Caution Money     5.00
      80.00
$ 85.00
Each subsequent Session Registration $  5.00
Caution Money     5.00
Registration and Library Fee—Payable
before registration     5.00
 —$   15.00
Late Registration
See page 47 $2.00 to $14.00
After the dates given above and up to and including
October 26th and February 8th an additional fee of $2.00
will be exacted of all students in default.
The Alma Mater Fee is a fee exacted from all students Fees 53
for the support of the Alma Mater Society. It was authorized by the Board of Governors at the request of the students themselves.
The Caution Money is a deposit from which deductions
will be made to cover breakages, wasteage, and use of special
materials in laboratories, etc. If the balance to the credit
of a student falls below $1.50, a further deposit of $5.00
may be required. Caution Money will be refunded after
the 30th day of April. Any caution money unclaimed by
the 11th day of May will be turned over to the Alma Mater
Society.
Immediately after October 9th and January 22nd, the
Bursar will notify students who have not paid their fees
that steps will be taken to ensure their exclusion from
classes while the fees remain unpaid. Such students will be
excluded from classes and will not be readmitted except on
presentation of a special certificate signed by the Bursar,
certifying that the required fees have been paid.
Students registering after October 9th shall pay their
fees at the time of registration, failing which they become
subject to the provisions of the preceding Regulation.
Students borrowing books from the University Library
for Preparatory Reading courses will be required to make
the usual deposit of two dollars ($2.00) with the Librarian
to cover mailing cost.
For Summer Session Students
Fees are payable on registration, otherwise an additional
fee of $2.00 will be exacted.
Minimum fee $25.00
Per "Unit"  10.00
Caution Money     5.00
Summer Session Association     2.00 54 The University of British Columbia
Special Fees
Regular supplemental examination,
per paper $ 5.00
Special examination (Applied Science
and Agriculture), per paper     7.50
Re-reading, per paper     2.00
Graduation   15.00
Supplemental examination fees must be paid two weeks
before the examination, and special examination fees and
fees for re-reading when application is made.
Graduation fees must be paid two weeks before Congregation. (See regulation in reference to application for
a degree, page 49.)
If fees are not paid when due an additional fee of $2.00
will be charged. Medals, Scholarships and Prizes 5 5
MEDALS, SCHOLARSHIPS, PRIZES, BURSARIES
AND LOANS FOR 1933-34
GENERAL REGULATIONS
1. For scholarships, prizes and bursaries which are not
based solely on academic standing, intending candidates
must make application to the Registrar on forms provided
for the purpose. These applications must reach the Registrar not later than the last day of the final examinations,
unless other instructions are given in the Calendar notice.
2. All awards of medals, scholarships, prizes and bursaries are made by Senate, unless otherwise provided for by
special resolution of Senate.
3. Medals, scholarships, prizes, bursaries and loans are
open to winter session students only, unless otherwise stated,
and marks obtained in summer session courses are not taken
into account in awarding them.
4. If the award of a medal, scholarship, or prize is based
on an examination, no award will be made to a candidate
who obtains less than 75 per cent, of the possible marks.
5. Winners of more than one scholarship will be given
recognition in the published lists but may not enjoy the
proceeds of more than one scholarship. Scholarships thus
relinquished will be awarded to the candidates next in order
of merit.
6. Scholarships under the jurisdiction of the University
are paid in two instalments:—on the last day for the payment of fees in each term. Undergraduate winners must
continue their courses to the satisfaction of the Faculty
concerned during the session following the award. A Faculty is authorized, in some cases, to permit the scholarship
to be reserved for one year, provided the student shows
satisfactory reasons for postponing attendance. Application for reservation should be made to the Registrar.
7. Winners of scholarships who desire to do so may resign the monetary value, while the appearance of their 5 6 The University of British Columbia
names in the University list enables them to retain the honour. Any funds thus made available will be used for additional scholarships or student loans.
8. In awarding Bursaries consideration will be given to
the financial need of the applicant.
9. The Senate of the University of British Columbia
reserves the right so to change the terms under which any
exhibition, scholarship or prize may be established at the
University of British Columbia that the terms may better
meet new conditions as they arise and may more fully carry
out the intentions of the donor and maintain the usefulness
of the benefaction. The right so reserved shall be exercised
by a resolution of the Senate duly confirmed by the Board
of Governors, provided always that a year's notice shall be
given in Senate of any proposed change and that the donor
or his representatives, if living, shall be consulted about the
proposed change.
10. Limited funds are provided from which loans, not
to exceed $100.00, may be made to undergraduate students
who have completed satisfactorily two years' University
work and who can show they are in need of pecuniary assistance. Loans must be secured by approved joint promissory note given for a definite term and signed by the applicant and his parent or guardian. Loans are not granted to
graduate students, to students in the Teacher Training
Course, nor to students in diploma courses. Applications
for loans should be addressed to the Bursar of the University.
11. The University is in possession of a great deal of information regarding post-graduate scholarships, fellowships and assistantships in other Universities, or as given by
various research bodies^ Places are available in practically
all departments of University work. Students wishing to
pursue post-graduate work outside this University are advised to consult the Registrar for information.
12. Endowed scholarships and bursaries will be paid
provided the invested funds produce the necessary revenue. Medals, Scholarships and Prizes 57
MEDALS
The Governor-General's Gold Medal
A gold medal, presented by His Excellency the Governor-General of Canada, will be awarded to the student
standing at the head of the graduating class for the B.A.
degree. Honour and pass students are eligible for this medal.
The Kiwanis Club Gold Medal
A gold medal, given by the Kiwanis Club of Vancouver,
will be awarded to the student standing at the head of the
graduating class for the B. Com. degree.
The French Government Medal
A bronze medal, offered by the French Consul for
Western Canada on behalf of the French Government, will
be awarded to a student of the French language on the recommendation of the Head of the Department of Modern
Languages.
SCHOLARSHIPS FOR POST-GRADUATE
STUDIES
University Graduate Scholarship
A scholarship of $200 may be awarded to a graduate
student who shows special aptitude for post-graduate
studies.
The Anne Wesbrook Scholarship
This scholarship of $100, given by the Faculty Women's
Club of the University, is open to graduates of this University who intend in the following year to pursue postgraduate study in this or any other approved university.
The French Government Scholarship
A scholarship of 10,000 francs is donated by the French
Government for one year's post-graduate study in France.
It is tenable for one year and is contingent upon the voting
of the credits for the year by the French Chambers. As this 5 8 The University of British Columbia
contingency applies to every item of the French budget, the
scholarship may be considered as permanent.
The award is made by the French Consul for Western
Canada, residing in Vancouver, on the recommendation of
the Head of the Department of French in the University.
The Brock Scholarship
A scholarship of $100, donated by Dean R. W. Brock,
may be awarded to a graduate student in Applied Science
who shows special aptitude for post-graduate studies.
The Exhibition of 1851 Scholarship
Under the revised conditions for the award of the Exhibition of 1851 Scholarship in Science, The University of
British Columbia is included in the list of universities from
which nominations for scholarships allotted to Canada may
be made. These scholarships of £250 per annum are tenable, ordinarily, for two years. They are granted only to
British subjects under 26 years of age who have been bona
fide students of pure or applied science of not less than three
years' standing.
SCHOLARSHIPS FOR UNDERGRADUATES
1.   IN ALL FACULTIES
The Rhodes Scholarship
A Rhodes Scholarship is tenable at the University of
Oxford and may be held for three years. Since, however,
the majority of Rhodes Scholars obtain standing which enables them to take a degree in two years, appointments are
made for two years in the first instance, and a Rhodes
Scholar who may wish to remain for a third year will be
expected to present a definite plan of study for that period
satisfactory to his College and to the Rhodes Trustees.
Rhodes Scholars may be allowed, if the conditions are
approved by their own College and by the Oxford Secretary to the Rhodes Trustees, either to postpone their third
year, returning to Oxford for it after a period of work in Medals, Scholarships and Prizes 59
their own countries, or may spend their third year in postgraduate work at any University of Great Britain, and in
special cases at any University on the continent of Europe,
the overseas Dominions, or in the United States, but not in
the country of their origin.
The stipend of a Rhodes Scholarship is fixed at £400
per year. At most colleges, and for most men, this sum is
not sufficient to meet a Rhodes Scholar's necessary expenses
for Term-time and Vacations, and Scholars who can afford
to supplement it by say £50 per year from their own resources will find it advantageous to do so.
A candidate to be eligible must:
1. Be a British subject, with at least five years' domicile
in Canada and unmarried. He must have passed his
nineteenth, but not have passed his twenty-fifth
birthday on October 1st of the year for which he is
elected.
2. Have reached such a stage in his course at one of the
Universities of Canada that he will have completed
at least two years at the University in question by
October 1st of the year for which he is elected.
Candidates may apply either for the Province in which
they have their ordinary private domicile, home, or residence, or for any Province in which they have received at
least two years of their college education before applying.
In that section of the Will in which he defined the general type of scholar he desired, Mr. Rhodes wrote as follows:
"My desire being that the students who shall be elected
to the Scholarships shall not be merely bookworms, I direct
that in the election of a student to a Scholarship regard
shall be had to:
1. His literary and scholastic attainments.
2. His fondness for and success in manly outdoor sports
such as cricket, football and the like.
3. His qualities of manhood, truth, courage, devotion
to duty, sympathy for and protection of the weak,
kindliness, unselfishness and fellowship, and 60 The University of British Columbia
4. His exhibition during school days of moral force of
character and of instincts to lead and to take an interest in his schoolmates, for those latter attributes
will be likely in after life to guide him to esteem the
performance of public duties as his highest aim.
Full particulars can be obtained from Sherwood Lett,
Esq., 626 Pender Street West, Vancouver, B. C, Secretary
of the Selection Committee for the Province of British Columbia.
Each candidate for a Scholarship is required to make application to the Secretary of the Committee of Selection
of the province in which he wishes to compete not later
than November 3rd. Application forms may be obtained
from the Registrar's office or from the Secretary of the
Selection Committee.
University Great War Scholarships
Two scholarships of $150 each may be awarded, on the
basis of the work of the First Year, to returned soldiers,
their dependents and the children of deceased soldiers proceeding to the work of the Second Year.
2.   HEARTS AND SCIENCE
University Scholarships in Arts and Science
Two scholarships in Arts and Science of $150 each
will be awarded to students proceeding to the Fourth Year,
the award to be based on the Work of the Third Year.
Two scholarships in Arts and Science of $150 each will
be awarded to students proceeding to the Third Year, the
award to be based on the work of the Second Year.
The Shaw Memorial Scholarship"'
This scholarship of $125, founded by friends of the late
James Curtis Shaw, Principal of Vancouver College, and
♦Originally donated to the Royal Institution (See Historical Sketch),
this has been transferred by that body, with the consent of the donors, to
the University of British Columbia. Medals, Scholarships and Prizes 61
afterwards of McGill University College, Vancouver, will
be awarded upon the results of the examination of the Second Year in Arts and Science to the undergraduate student
standing highest in any two of three courses, English 2,
Latin 2, Greek (1 or 2), and proceeding to the work of the
Third Year.
The McGill Graduates' Scholarship*
A scholarship of $125, founded by the McGill Graduates' Society of British Columbia, will be awarded to the
undergraduate student standing highest in English and
French of the Second year in Arts and Science and proceeding to the work of the Third Year.
The Terminal City Club Memorial Scholarship
This scholarship of $100, founded by the members of
the Terminal City Club as a memorial to those members of
the Club who lost their lives in the Great War, will be
awarded to the undergraduate student standing highest in
English 2 and Economics 2 in the Second Year in Arts and
Science and proceeding to the work of the Third Year.
The Imperial Order Daughters of the Empire
Scott Memorial Scholarship
This scholarship of $100—the proceeds of an endowment of $2,000—founded by the Imperial Order of the
Daughters of the Empire of the City of Vancouver, in
memory of Captain Robert Falcon Scott, R.N., the Antarctic explorer, who sacrificed his life in the cause of Science, will be awarded for general proficiency in biological
subjects to the student who has completed his Second Year
in Arts and Science, and who is proceeding in the Third
Year to Honour work either in Biology or in a course including Biology.
Royal Institution Scholarship in Arts and Science
A scholarship of $150 will be awarded to the student
•Originally donated to the Royal Institution (See Historical Sketch),
this has been transferred by that body, with the consent of the donors, to
the University of British Columbia. 62 The University of British Columbia
taking first place in the examinations of the First Year in
Arts and Science.
University Scholarships in Arts and Science
Two scholarships of $150 each will be awarded to the
students taking second and third places in the examinations
of the First Year in Arts and Science.
The P.E.O. Sisterhood Scholarship
A scholarship of $75, given by Vancouver Chapters of
the P.E.O. Sisterhood, will be awarded to the woman student standing highest in English in the First Year of the
Faculty of Arts and Science.
The Beverley Cayley Scholarship
A scholarship of $100, given by His Honour Judge
Cayley and Mrs Cayley in memory of their son, Beverley
Cayley, Arts '18, will be awarded to the male student standing highest in English in the First Year of the Faculty of
Arts and Science.
The I. J. Klein Scholarship
This annual scholarship of $100, given by I. J. Klein,
Esq., Vancouver, B. C, for ten years, beginning in May,
1930, will be awarded to the student obtaining first place in
the examination of the Third Year of the course in Commerce.
The Vancouver Women's Canadian Club Scholarship
A scholarship of $ 100, the proceeds of a fund created by
the Vancouver Women's Canadian Club, will be awarded
to the student of the Second Year obtaining first place in
the subject, Canadian History.
3.   IN APPLIED SCIENCE
University Scholarship in Nursing and Health
A scholarship of $150 will be awarded for general proficiency in previous work in this University, to a student Medals, Scholarships and Prizes 63
proceeding to the Third Year (or in the double course proceeding to the fourth year) of the Course in Nursing and
Health and having successfully completed the hospital probationary period. Applications shall be made to the Registrar not later than September 1st.
The Vancouver Women's Canadian Club Scholarship
A scholarship of $100, given by the club, will be
awarded to the student who attains the highest standing in
the first four years' training, academic and practical (or in
the first five years' training, academic and practical, in the
double course) of the Nursing and Health course.
The Dunsmuir Scholarship*
A scholarship of $150, founded by the Hon. James
Dunsmuir, will be awarded to the undergraduate student
standing highest in the Mining Engineering Course of the
Fourth Year in Applied Science, and proceeding to the
work of the Fifth Year.
University Scholarship in Applied Science
A scholarship of $150 will be awarded to a student proceeding to the Fourth Year in Applied Science, the award
to be based on the work of the Third Year.
Royal Institution Scholarship in Applied Science
A scholarship of $150 will be awarded for general proficiency in the work of the Second Year in Applied Science.
G. M. Dawson Scholarship
A scholarship of $50 will be awarded to the undergraduate student standing highest in the Geological Engineering
course, in Geological subjects, in the Fourth Year of the
Faculty of Applied Science, and proceeding to the work of
the Fifth Year.
•Originally donated to the Royal Institution (See Historical Sketch),
this has been transferred by that body, with the consent of the donors, to
the University of British Columbia. 64 The University of British Columbia
4.   IN AGRICULTURE
University Scholarship in Agriculture
A scholarship in Agriculture of $150 will be awarded to
a student proceeding to the Second Year, the award to be
based on the work of the First Year.
The David Thom Scholarship
A scholarship in Agriculture of $100 will be awarded to
a student proceeding to the Second Year, the award to be
based on the work of the First Year.
MATRICULATION SCHOLARSHIPS
University Senior Matriculation Scholarship
One scholarship of $150 will be awarded upon the results of the Senior Matriculation Examination.
Royal Institution Senior Matriculation Scholarships
Two scholarships, each of the value of $150, will be
awarded upon the results of the Senior Matriculation examinations. One of these scholarships will be for open competition throughout the Province; the other will be for open
competition in all school districts of the Province other than
the City of Vancouver, the City of North Vancouver, the
District Municipalities of North Vancouver, West Vancouver, and Burnaby, and the City of New Westminster.
Postponement of Senior Matriculation scholarships will
be granted only on medical grounds.
Royal Institution Junior Matriculation Scholarships
Seven General Proficiency scholarships will be awarded
on the result of the Junior Matriculation examinations:
(a) $150 to the candidate of highest standing in the Province, and (b) $150 to the candidate of next highest standing in each of the following districts: (1) Victoria District,
(2) Vancouver Island (exclusive of Victoria District),
and Northern Mainland, (3) Vancouver Central District
(comprising the former limits of the City of Vancouver), Medals, Scholarships and Prizes 65
(4) The Lower Mainland (exclusive of Vancouver Central
District but including Agassiz), (5) Yale, (6) Kootenays.
These scholarships will be paid only to students in attendance at the University of British Columbia, with the
exception that the Victoria District Scholarship will be paid
to any winner of that scholarship in attendance at Victoria
College.
Postponement of Junior Matriculation Scholarships will
be granted only on medical grounds.
Winners of all Matriculation Scholarships must notify
the Registrar before Sept. 1st of their intention of attending
the University (or Victoria College in the case of the Victoria District Junior Matriculation Scholarship) during the
following session; failing such notification, the winner's
rights will lapse.
PRIZES
1.   IN ALL FACULTIES
The University Essay Prize
A book prize of the value of $25, open to all students
of the University, will be awarded for an essay on a special
literary subject, to be announced at the beginning of the
session by the Department of English.
The Players' Club Prize
A prize of $50, given by the Players' Club, is offered
for an original play suitable for the Club's Christmas performance. The award will be made on the recommendation
of the Faculty members of the Advisory Board of the Players' Club. All entries for this prize must be in the hands of
the Honorary President of the Players' Club not later than
September 30th, 1933.
The Isabel Ecclestone Mackay Prize
A prize of $25 from the estate of the late Mrs. Isabel
Ecclestone Mackay will be awarded to the student of the
University who submits an original poem in the English
language which shall be deemed of sufficient merit, the 66 The University of British Columbia
award to be made upon the recommendation of the Head of
the Department of English. The poem submitted may have
been published or may be published subsequently by the
writer.
Poems entered for this competition must be in the hands
of the Registrar not later than the last day of the final
examinations.
2.   IN ARTS AND SCIENCE
The French Government Book Prize
A book prize, offered by the French Consul for Western
Canada on behalf of the French Government, will be
awarded to a student of the French language on the recommendation of the Head of the Department of Modern
Languages.
3.   IN APPLIED SCIENCE
The Convocation Prize
A prize of $50, given by Convocation of The University of British Columbia, will be awarded to the student in
the Fifth Year of Applied Science whose record, in the
opinion of the Faculty, is the most outstanding.
The Walter Moberly Memorial Prize
A book prize of the value of $25, given by the Vancouver Branch of the Engineering Institute of Canada in
memory of the late Walter Moberly, will be awarded for
the best engineering thesis submitted by any Fifth Year
student in the Faculty of Applied Science.
The Engineering Profession's Prizes
Five book prizes, each of the value of $25, are offered
by the Engineering Profession in British Columbia (Association of Professional Engineers) for competition by those
students in the Fourth Year of the Faculty of Applied
Science who are registered as engineering pupils according
to the by-laws of the Association.
3B Medals, Scholarships and Prizes 67
One of these prizes is awarded for the best summer essay
in each of any five branches of engineering, to be selected
and specified by the Faculty.
The five successful essays may be made available by the
Faculty to the Council of the Engineering Profession and,
through the Council, may be referred to or quoted in the
literature of the Profession.
The Provincial Board of Health Prizes
The Provincial Board of Health of the Province of
British Columbia offers the sum of $100 in prizes for competition in the Course in Public Health Nursing.
The Engineering Institute of Canada Prize
The Engineering Institute of Canada offers an annual
prize of $25 to each of eleven Canadian Universities of
which the University of British Columbia is one.
The prize will be awarded to a student of the Fourth
Year in Applied Science on the basis of the marks made in
his academic work in that year. His activities in the students' engineering organization or in the local branch of a
recognized engineering society will also be considered.
BURSARIES
The Captain LeRoy Memorial Bursary
This bursary of the annual value of $250 was given by
the Universities Service Club in memory of their comrades
who fell in the Great War. It is named after Captain O. E.
LeRoy, who commanded the overseas contingent from this
University and who was killed at Passchendaele in 1917.
It will be awarded to a student, or students, requiring
financial assistance to enable him, or them, to attend the
University. For this purpose it may be awarded to a matriculant, to a student of any year or to a graduate student
of the University proceeding to post-graduate work in
this or any approved university. In making the award preference will be given first to returned soldiers, then to the 68 The University of British Columbia
dependents of soldiers, and finally to suitable candidates
from the student body at large.
Application must contain a statement of the academic
record and special circumstances of the applicant, with two
supporting references, and, in the case of the preferred categories, of the war record of the soldier.
The award will be made by the Senate upon the recommendation of the Faculties acting in consulation with the
Executive or accredited representatives of the Universities
Service Club.
The Khaki University and Young Men's Christian
Association Memorial Fund Bursaries
A sum of money given to the University by the administrators of the Khaki University of Canada provides a fund
from which are awarded annually ten bursaries of the value
of $100 each, known as the Khaki University and Young
Men's Christian Association Memorial Bursaries.
Under conditions specified by the donors these bursaries
may be used for undergraduate purposes only, and in
making the awards a preference is given to the sons and
daughters of the soldiers of the Great War. The financial
necessities of candidates are also taken into account.
To be eligible for an award a soldier's dependent must
obtain at least second class standing, i.e. 65 per cent.; for all
others 75 per cent, is required.
Dependents of soldiers and others who have expectations
of attaining standing as stated above and who are in need of
financial assistance should apply to the Registrar on the
special form provided not later than the last day of the final
examinations.
These bursaries are open to students from Victoria College proceeding to a course of study in this University.
The American Women's Club Bursary
Through the generosity of the American Women's Club
of Vancouver a sum of $125 will be available for 1933-34 Medals, Scholarships and Prizes 69
to assist a student who has satisfactorily completed the
First Year in Arts and Science, and who could not otherwise continue the course in the Second Year. Application
must be made to the Registrar not later than September 1st.
David Thom Bursaries
From the funds of the David Thom Estate a sum of
$160 is available annually for the following bursaries:
1. A sum of $100 to be awarded to the junior matriculant
with the highest matriculation standing registering in
the First Year of Agriculture.
2. A sum of $60 to be awarded to a student who has satisfactorily completed the work of the First Year in Agriculture and is proceeding to the work of the Second Year.
LOANS
General Loan Fund
The General Loan Fund is maintained by annual grants
made by the Board of Governors.
The Canadian Institute of Mining and Metallurgy
B. C. Division Fund
This is a fund of $ 100, given by the Institute to the University as a trust, to be used for loans to students taking the
mining course. Applicants for loans must be recommended
by the Departments of Geology, Mining and Metallurgy.
The David Thom Fund
From the David Thom Estate funds a sum of $ 15 00 has
been set aside for loans to Third and Fourth Year students
in Agriculture. A loan from this fund will supplement one
from the existing University loan funds.  THE
FACULTY
OF
ARTS AND SCIENCE TIME TABLE
FACULTY OF ARTS
KEY TO BUILDINGS: A, Arts; Ag, Ag
MORNINGS
Monday
Room
Tuesday
Room
Wednesday
Room
Biology 2..
Biology 3..
Botany 6 e —
Economics 6	
Education	
English 1	
Sees. 4, 6, 6	
English 18	
French 2
Sees, a, b, c, d..
Geology 4...
Greek A	
History 12..
Greek 9..
Mathematics 3	
Mathematics 10	
Mathematics 17.	
Philosophy 1 a, Sec 1
Physics 1	
Ap 101
AplOl
Ap 101
S 300
Ap 204
A 103
106, 203
A 100
A 101
104,105,
108
Ap 102
A 102
A 207
A 205
A 204
A 208
A 201
Ap 100
S 200
Botany 2	
Botany 4	
Economics 2...
Economics 18	
Education	
English 1
Sees. 1, 2, 3	
French 2,
Sees, e, f, g, h...
Geology 5 and 12..
German 1, Sec a._
German 4 	
History 2 	
Latin 2 a.	
Latin 6..
Mathematics 16_
Physics 2. 	
Zoology 2	
Zoology 3	
Ap 101
S 300
Ap 100
Ap 204
A   100
106, 205,
A 101
104, 105,
204
Ap 102
A 108
A 206
A 207
A 108
A 102
A 208
S 200
Ap 101
Ap 101
Biology 2	
Biology 3 	
Botany 6 e	
Economics 6._	
Education	
English 1,
Sees. 4, 5, 6	
English 13	
French 2,
Sees, a, b, c, d..
Geology 4~
Greek A„
History 12..
Greek 9..
Mathematics 3	
Mathematics 10	
Mathematics 17.	
Philosophy 1 a, Sec. 1
Physics 1 	
Ap 101
Ap 101
Ap 101
S 300
Ap 204
A 103
106, 203
A 100
A 101
104, 105,
108
Ap 102
A 102
A 207
A 206
A 204
A 208
A 201
Ap 100
S 200
10
Botany 5 a 	
Botany 6 d	
Chemistry 8	
Economics 1, Sec 1..
Economics 9	
Economics 11	
Education	
English 9	
French 8 b	
French 4 b	
Geology 1_ 	
History 16..
Mathematics 1,
Sees. 1, 2, 8, 4._
Philosophy 1 a, Sec. 2
Philosophy 8, Sec. 2...
Physics 8.	
Ap 101
Ap 101
S 800
S 400
A 201
A 102
A 204
A 100
A 104
A 105
Ap 100
A 101
A 106
1«8, 203
205
Ap 202
A 103
S 210
Botany 3	
Botany 6 c 	
Chemistry 9 	
Economics 1, Sec 3„
Economics 4	
Education..
English 10. 	
English 17	
French 4 a. 	
Geology 2	
German 1, Sec. b	
Government 1	
Greek 2 _	
History 14	
Latin 2 b._	
Mathematics 1,
Sees .6, 6, 7__	
Philosophy 2.	
Ap 101
Ap 101
S 417
A 100
A 103
Ap 202
A 207
A 208
A 104
Ap 102
A 203
A 108
A 102
A 101
A 201
A 105
106, 205
A 204
Botany 6 b. 	
Botany 6 b and d	
Chemistry 3	
Economics 1, Sec. 1	
Economics 9	
Economics 11 	
Education	
English 9 	
French 3 b. 	
French 4 b._
Geology 1 _	
Geology 7 	
History 15.__	
Mathematics 1,
Sees. 1, 2, 8, 4.	
Philosophy 1 a, Sec. 2
Philosophy 8, Sec 2 „
Physics 3._	
Ap 101
S 300
S 400
A 201
A 102
A 204
A 100
A 104
A 105
Ap 100
Ap 106
A 101
A 106,
108, 203,
205
Ap 202
A 103
S 210
Agricultural
Economics.-
Biology 1..
11
Chemistoy 7	
Economics 1, Sec. 2	
Economics 3	
Education	
English 14.	
French 1
Sees, a, b, c, d _
French 4 e.	
Geology 8	
German, Beg., Sec. a .
Government 4.	
History 11	
Mathematics 2	
Philosophy 8.	
Physics 6	
Zoology 1	
Ag 104
Ap 100
S 417
S 400
S 200
Ap 202
A 108
A106,106
108, 206
A 104
Ap 102
A 206
A 201
A 208
A 204
A 102
S 210
Ap 101
Botany 1  _. _
Botany 6b.	
Chemistry 1, Sec. 2	
Chemistry 4	
Economics 1, Sec. 4.„.
Economics 10	
Education.-	
English 19	
French 1,
Sees, e, f, g, h._	
French 8 a	
Geography 5...
Geology 6_
Government 2._
Latin 1..
Philosophy 6.	
Philosophy 8, Sec. 1?..
Zoology 7	
Ap 101
Ap 235
S 300
S 417
Ap 100
A 100
A 206
S200
A 104
106, 108,
203
106, 208
A 100
Apl02
A 201
A 108
A 101
A 205
Ap 101
Agricultural
Economics....
Biology 1_.
Botany 6 b	
Chemistry 7	
Economics 1, Sec. 2..
Economics 3._	
Education	
English 14._	
French 1,
Sees, a, b, c, d	
French 4 e._	
Geology 8 _	
German, Beg. Sec. i
Government 4.	
History 11—	
Mathematics 2...—
Philosophy S._. _.
Physics 6.	
Zoology 1 ...
Ag 104
Ap 100
S 417
S 400
S 200
Ap 202
A 103
A 105,
106, 108,
206
A 104
Ap 102
A 205
A 201
A 203
A 204
A 102
S 210
Ap 101
CONSULT DEPARTMENT HEADS FOR - 1933-34
AND SCIENCE
riculture; Ap, Applied Science; S, Science.
MORNINGS
Thursday
Room
Friday
Room
Saturday
Room
Botany 2.._	
S 300
Ap 100
Ap 204
A 100
106, 205,
A 101,
104,105,
204
Ap 102
A 108
A 206
A 207
A 103
A 102
A 208
S 200
Ap 101
Ap 101
Ap 101
Ap 101
Botany 5 b Lab.	
Chemistry 9 Lab	
Commercial Law 1	
Botany 6 f.	
A 20i
S 300
Ap 100
Ap 204
A 100
106, 205,
A 101,
104,105,
204
A"i08
A 206
A 207
A 103
A 102
A 208
S 200
Economics 6	
Education. 	
English 1,
Sees. 4, 5, 6.__	
S 300
Ap 204
A 103
106, 203
A 100
A 101
104, 105,
108
Ap 102
A 102
A 207
A 205
A 204
A 208
A 201
Ap 100
3 200
English 1,
Sees. 1, 2, 3 	
English 1,
Sees. 1, 2, 3._ 	
English 18._	
Geology 5 and 12 	
German 1, Sec a	
German 4	
French 2,
Sees, a, b, c, d	
French 2,
Geology 10.	
German 1, Sec a	
German 4_ 	
History 2. 	
9
History 12.	
Mathematics 3—	
Latin 6	
Latin 6.	
Mathematics 17	
Philosophy 1 b. Sec. 1
Zoology 3	
Physics 2.	
Ap 101
An 101
S 417
A 100
A 103
Ap 202
A 207
A 208
A 104
Ap 102
A 203
A 108
A 102
A 101
A 201
A 105
106, 205,
A 204
Ap 101
S 300
S 400
A 201
A 102
A 204
A 100
Botany 5 b Lab.	
Chemistry 9 Lab.	
Economics 1, Sec 3	
Economics 4	
Economics 1, Sec. 1	
Economics 9 .	
A 100
A 103
Ap 202
A 207
A 208
A 104
A~208
A 108
A 102
A 101
A 201
A 105,
106, 205,
A 204
Economics 1, Sec. 3	
English 10	
English 17.	
English 10 	
English 9	
French 3 b 	
A 104
A 105
Ap 106
A 101
A 106
108, 203,
205
Ap 202
A 103
10
Greek 2.  	
History 14	
Latin 2 b._	
Government 1- 	
Greek 2	
Mathematics 1,
Sees. 1, 2, 3, 4.	
Philosophy 1 b. Sec. 2
Philosophy 8, Sec. 2._.
Tflti" 2 h
Mathematics 1,
Sees. 5, 6, 7.	
Philosophy 2. 	
Mathematics 1,
Ap 101
S 300
S 417
Ap 100
A 100
A 206
S 200
A 104,
106, 108,
203
A106, 208
Agricultural
Ag 104
S 400
S 200
Ap 202
A 103
A105, 106
108, 206
A 104
Ap 102
A 205
A 201
A 203
A 204
A 102
S 210
Ap 101
Ap 101
Botany 5 b Lab.	
Chemistry 1, Sec 2	
Chemistry 9 Lab.	
Economics 1, Sec 4.	
Chemistry 1, Sec. 2    .
S 300
Economics 1, Sec. 2	
Ap 100
A 100
A 206
S 200
A 104,
105, 108,
203
A106, 208
A 100
English 19.	
French 1,
English 19.      .
French 1,
Sees, e, f, g, h	
French 3 a	
Sees, e, f, g, h__	
Geology 8..-	
German, Beg. Sec. a....
Government 4._   _	
11
A 100
Ap 102
A 201
A 103
A 101
A 206
Ap 101
Geology 10	
Latin 1    	
Mathematics 2.	
Philosophy 3 _	
A 201
A 103
A 206
A 101
Philosophy 8, Sec 1 ....
Philosophy 6.	
Philosophy 8, Sec. 1....
Zoology 6 	
SUBJECTS NOT IN THIS TIME TABLE AFTERNOONS
TIME TABLE
Monday
Room
Tuesday
Room
Wednesday
Room
Botany 8 Lab.	
Botany 5 c Lab.	
Chemistry 1, Sec. 1	
Chemistry 1 Lab.,
Sees, a and b.	
S 300
A 103
A 100,
Ap 100,
A 104,
105
A 204
A 106
A 207
A 201
Ap 202
S 210
Bacteriology 1 and 2....
Botany 2.	
Botany 5 a and c...
Botany 6 c Lab...	
Chemistry 1, Sec. 1
Botany 6 e _	
Education 1 	
Geology 1 Lab	
Geology 7 Lab. 	
Mathematics 1,
Sees. 1, 2, 3, 4..
Physics 3 Lab., Sec. 1..
A 100
Ap 106
A 106,
108, 203,
205
Ap "T"
S 300
A 103
English 2 a	
A 100,
French 1,
Ap 100
French 1,
A 104,
105
A 204
1
Geology 7 Lab 	
Ap 106
A 106
A 207
A 201
Ap202
Ap 208
Zoology 5 Lab—	
Bacteriology 1 and 2....
Bacteriology 1 and 2....
A 104
A 100,
106, 205,
Ap  106
A 203
Botany 3 Lab 	
Botany 5 c Lab. 	
Chemistry 7 Lab...	
Botany 2	
A"l06
A 206
A 208
Ap 100
A 205
A 201
A 100
A 108
A 101
S 210
A 108 i
A 106
English 16.	
A 206
Chemistry 4 Lab—	
French 4 c..	
Geology 7 Lab—	
A 203
Ap 106
English 1,
Sees. 1, 2, 3 	
Geology 1 Lab. 	
Geology 7 Lab.._	
Latin 8 B 	
Ap 100
German, Beg. Sec. c —
German, Beg. Sec. c...
A 205
A 201
2
A 100
History 13..	
A 108
Physics 3 Lab., Sec. 1..
History 19.	
A 101
S 210
Zoology 3 Lab...	
A 103
Zoology 6 Lab.._	
Ap 208
Bacteriology 1 and 2	
A 100
A 102
Botany 2 Lab	
Chemistry 1 Lab.,
A 100
Ap 102
Chemistry 2 Lab. b
Chemistry 2 Lab. a ....
Chemistry 7 Lab	
3
Geology 6 Lab	
Physic e8 Lab., Sec. 1..
Zoology 2 Lab—	
Bacteriology 1 and 2....
Chemistry 1 Lab.,
4
Chemistry 2 Lab. a	
Chemistry 7 Lab	
Geology 5 Lab. 	
Physics 5 Lab.
Chemistry 2 LaK b
Geology 6 Lab...	
Chemistry 1 Lab.,
Biology 1 Lab. 2	
5
Chemistry 2 Lab. a—
Chemistry 2 Lab. b	
CONSULT DEPARTMENT HEADS FOR —Continued
AFTERNOONS
Thursday
Room
Friday
Room
Bacteriology 1 and 2	
Biology 1, Sec 3	
A 100
	
Biology 1, Sec 5.	
Biology 8.	
Botany 6 d Lab	
S 300
Chemistry 3 lab.	
Chemistry 1, Sec 1	
Chemistry 3 Lab. a	
Education	
English 2 a	
A 103
A 100,
Ap 100
A 104
105
A 204
Ap 112
A 105,
106, 206,
Mathematics 1,
Sees. 5, 6, 7	
Physics 8 Lab., Sec 2..
French 1,
1
Statistics 2     	
Ap "T"
Hlatory Ifl
A i06
A 207
A 201
Ap 202
Latin 4     	
Philosophy 7   	
Philosophy 9... 	
Bacteriology 1 and 2—
Bacteriology 6 	
Biology 2, Sec 5	
Biology 8._     ..
	
Botany 6 d Lab.
Chemistry 3 Lab. a	
Chemistry 4 Lab.	
Chemistry 3 Lab. b.	
A 104
A 103
106, 203,
A 106
English 1,
Sees. 4, 6, 6 	
A 106
A 206
A 203
Ap 100
A 205
A 201
A 100
A 108
7 A 101
S 210
A 103
English 16.	
2
T.«t)n R A
A 203
A'p"'"'f"
Physics 3 Lab., Sec. 2..
Statistics 2	
German, Beg. Sec. c	
History 13 	
History 19 	
Bacteriology 5 —
Chemistry 1 Lab.,
3
A 100
Chemistry 2 Lab. a
Chemistry 3 Lab. a	
Chemistry 4 Lab.	
Physics 3 Lab., Sec. 2..
A'lOO
Zoology 7 Lab...	
Chemistry 2 Lab. b	
Botany 6 d Lab	
Chemistry 1 Lab.,
 	
4
Chemistry 2 Lab. a	
Chemistry 3 Lab. a	
Chemistry 4 Lab	
Zoology 7 Lab	
	
Chemistry 1 Lab.,
Sees, d, e  	
Chemistry 2 Lab. a—
	
5
SUBJECTS NOT IN THIS TIME TABLE Faculty of Arts and Science Supplemental Examinations
SEPTEMBER, 1933
Date
Hour
First Year
Second Year
Third and
Fourth Years
Wednesday,
September 13th|
Thursday,
September 14th|
Friday,
September 15th[
Saturday,
Monday,
Tuesday,
September 16th
September 18th
September 19th
Wednesday,
September 20th
9 A.M.
2 P.M.
9 A.M.
2 P.M.
9 A.M.
2 P.M.
9 A.M.
9 A.M.
2 P.M.
9 A.M.
2 P.M.
9 A.M.
2 P.M.
History 1, 2, 3	
English Literature..
Latin Authors.	
Chemistry 1	
Latin Composition..
French	
Geometry..
Greek	
Physics 1, 2
Trigonometry..
Algebra	
English Composition..
German	
Biology 1	
Economics 1.
Geography....
History 1, 2, 3	
English Literature..
Latin 2 	
Chemistry 1, 2	
French	
Geometry..
Greek	
Physics 1, 2, 3.
Logic	
Botany	
Calculus	
Zoology 1	
Algebra	
Psychology..
English Composition-
Biology 1	
German.....	
Economics 1, 2..
Geography	
►■3
o
a
«9
>
o
C
p
o
t
>
o
S
H
s FACULTY OF ARTS AND SCIENCE
The degrees offered in this Faculty are Bachelor of Arts
(B.A.), Bachelor of Commerce (B.Com.), and Master of
Arts (M.A.).
Courses which do not lead to degrees are offered in
Teacher Training and Social Service.
*COURSES LEADING TO THE DEGREE OF B.A.
The degree of B.A. is granted with Honours or as a
Pass degree. A Pass degree will be granted on completion
of courses amounting to 60 units chosen in conformity with
Calendar regulations. No distinction is made between Pass
and Honour students in the First and Second Years, except
as regards prerequisites for later work, but in the Third and
Fourth Years there are special requirements for Honour
Students.
Students holding the degree of B.Com. from this University may proceed to the degree of B.A. in one year by
completing 15 additional units of work open to students
in their Third and Fourth Years, provided that their additional units are chosen so as to complete the requirements
for the B.A. degree.
It is also possible to obtain the B.A. and B.Com. degrees
concurrently in five years on completion of 75 units chosen
so as to cover the requirements for both degrees.
Double courses are offered in Arts and Science and
Applied Science leading to the degrees of B.A. and B.A.Sc.,
or B.A. and B.A.Sc. (in Nursing).
Credit will not be given for more than 15 units in the
First or Second Year of the "Winter Session; nor for more
•The University reserves the right to limit the registration in, or to
cancel, any of the courses listed in this Faculty. Limitation may be imposed
if the numbers desiring any course are found to be too large for the lecture
rooms and laboratories available for that course, or for the number of
instructors in the Department concerned, or for the equipment and supplies
which can be obtained. Certain courses may be cancelled if the numbers of
instructors in the Departments concerned prove to be inadequate to offer all
the courses listed. 78 Faculty of Arts and Science
than 18 units in the Third or Fourth Year. (See regulations
under "First and Second Years" and "Third and Fourth
Years.")
Credits obtained at the Summer Session (see "University Summer Session") may be combined with Winter Session credits to complete the 60 units required for the degree
of B.A.; but not more than 30 units of credit may be obtained in the two academic years subsequent to Junior
Matriculation nor more than 15 in the academic year subsequent to Senior Matriculation. The degree of B.A. will not
be granted within three years from Senior Matriculation
nor within four years from Junior Matriculation.
The maximum credit for Summer Session work in any
one Calendar year is 6 units; and the maximum credit for
work other than that of the regular Summer and Winter
Sessions is 3 units per academic year, and 15 units in all
subsequent to Senior Matriculation or First Year Arts.
No credit will be granted for work done at other universities in the same academic year in which work has been
attempted at this University, whether in the Summer Session or in the Winter Session or otherwise. Extra-mural
work done at other universities prior to registration at this
University may be accepted, if approved by the Faculty, but
may not exceed 3 units in respect of any one academic year
or 15 units in all subsequent to Senior Matriculation. If a
student is granted credit for extra-mural work taken elsewhere the number of units which he may take at this University without attendance at a Winter or Summer Session
will be correspondingly reduced.
Candidates for the degree of B.A. are advised to attend
at least one Winter Session, preferably that of the Fourth
Year. A student seeking the degree of B.A. without attending a Winter Session in his Fourth Year will be required to
write, in addition to the examinations in each course, one
paper in each of the two departments in which his major
work has been done. This paper will be on the whole of the First and Second Years 79
student's work in the department during his Third and
Fourth Years.
Courses are described in terms of units. A unit normally
consists of one lecture hour (or one continuous laboratory
period of not less than two or more than three hours) each
week throughout the session, or two lecture hours (or equivalent laboratory periods) throughout a single term.
Note 1:—Students in any of the affiliated Theological
Colleges who file with the Registrar a written statement
expressing their intention of graduating in Theology will
be allowed to offer in each year of their Arts course, in place
of optional subjects set down in the Calendar for the Year
and course in which they are registered, Religious Knowledge options, to the extent of three units taken from the
following list: Hebrew, Biblical Literature, New Testament
Greek, Church History, Christian Ethics and Apologetics.
Note 2:—Students who intend to enter Normal School
at any time before or after graduation are reminded they
will have to meet the requirements for Normal Entrance in
Health IV, Geography II, Arithmetic II and Arts I.
First and Second Years
1. The requirements of the first two years consist of
30 units, 15 of which must be taken in each year. Courses
must be chosen in conformity with the requirements that
follow. Details of courses are given under the various departments.
Each student must take: Units
(a)  English 1 in the First Year and English 2 in the Second Year     6
* (b) The first two courses in a language
offered for Matriculation, one course
in each year     6
(c) Mathematics 1, in the First Year     3
(d) Economics 1, or History 1 or 2 or 4,
or Philosophy 1 (a) orl (b)     3
•See Regulation "2." 80 Faculty of Arts and Science
(e)  Biology 1, or Chemistry 1, or Geology 1, or Physics 1, or Physics 2     3
(/) Three courses—not already chosen—
selected from the following:
Biology 1, Botany 1, Chemistry 1,
Chemistry 2, Economics 1, Economics 2, Economics 10, French 1,
French 2, Geography 1, Geology 1,
Geology 2, fBeginners' German,
German 1, German 2, Greek A,
Greek 2, History 1, History 2, History 4, Latin 1, Latin 2 (a), Latin
2 (b), Mathematics 2, Mathematics 3, Philosophy 1 (a), Philosophy
1 (b), Physics 1 or Physics 2, Physics 3, Zoology 1     9
Note:—Botany 1, Zoology 1, Geology 1 and
2, Geography 1, Economics 10,
History 4 and Philosophy 1 (b) are
not open to First Year Students.
Economics 1, and Philosophy 1 are
open to First Year students only if
the permission of the Heads of these
departments is obtained. History 2
is open to First Year students only
if they are preparing for entrance
to the Normal School. Geography
1 and Geology 1, normally Third
Year subjects, may be taken by
Second Year students (Full Undergraduate and Conditioned). It
must be taken in the Second Year
by students intending to take the
Honour course in Geology.
tSea Regulations "3" and "i." First and Second Years 81
2. Students who have not matriculated in German may
take the Beginners' Course to meet the Junior Matriculation requirements (without University credit) and follow
it up with German 1 and German 2 to satisfy the language
requirements under Section 1 (b). Students who contemplate specializing in any of the natural sciences are advised
to take German under this regulation.
3. No student in his First Year may elect more than one
beginners' course in a language, and no beginners' course in
a language will count towards a degree unless followed by a
second year's work in that language.
4. Except in the case of beginners' courses, no course in
a language may be taken by a student who has not offered
that language at Matriculation. A beginners' course in a
language may not be taken for credit by a student who has
obtained credit for that language at Matriculation.
Greek A.— (which may be taken by students having no
previous knowledge of Greek), followed by Greek 2, will
be accepted as satisfying the Language requirements in the
case of students who have matriculated in Latin.
5. A student taking three languages in the first two
years may defer the course selected under Section 1 (e) to
the Third or Fourth Year, and a student taking four science
courses may defer the course selected under Section 1 (d)
to the Third or Fourth Year.
6. Students who intend to enter the Teacher Training
Course are advised to take Philosophy 1 in the First or Second Year. 	
Note:—Students thinking of entering Applied Science
are referred to the list of subjects required to be taken by
them in First Year Arts and to the regulations in reference
to these, given under "Admission" and "General Outline of
Courses" in Applied Science. They are advised to attend
the noon hour talks on the choice of a profession and on the
life and work in vocations likely to appeal to Applied
Science graduates. 82 Faculty of Arts and Science
To ensure the conformity of their courses to Calendar
regulations, all students in their Second Year are advised to
submit to the Dean of the Faculty, on or before March 31st
of each year, a scheme of the courses they propose to take
during their last two years.
Third and Fourth Years
The requirements of the Third and Fourth Years consist of 30 units, of which students must take, in their Third
Year, not less than 15 units. The graduation standing is
determined by the results of the Third and Fourth Years
combined.
Pass Curriculum
1. A minimum of 15 units must be taken in two Major
subjects, not less than 6 units in either, and a minimum of
6 units in some other subject or subjects of the Third and
Fourth Years. Work in the First or Second Year is required
in each of the Major subjects, except Education and Bacteriology. Both Major subjects must be chosen from one of
the following groups:
(a) Bacteriology, Botany, Chemistry, Geology, Mathematics, Physics, Zoology.
(b) Economics, Education (not more than six units),
English, French, German, Government, Greek,
History, Latin, Mathematics, Philosophy.
2. Details of courses available in the Third and Fourth
Years are given under the various departments.
3. Only two subjects (6 units) of the First or Second
Year courses may be taken in the combined Third and
Fourth Years. In a number of these courses extra reading
will be required of Third and Fourth Year students.
When two First or Second Year subjects, other than a
Beginner's Language or Language 1, are taken in the Third
and Fourth Years, not more than one of these subjects may Honour Courses 83
be outside the departments in which the student is doing
his major work
4. No credit will be given for a language course normally taken in the First Year unless it is taken in the Third
Year and continued in the Fourth Year. Some courses, however, are intended for Honour students only.
5. Students in the Third and Fourth Years may, with
the consent of the departments concerned, take one or two
courses of private reading (each to count not more than 3
units), provided that:
1. (a) The candidate for a reading course shall have
completed his First and Second Years and shall
have taken at least 6 units either of Second or
Third Year work or of Second and Third Year
work in the subject in which the reading course
is taken; and
(b) shall have made an average of at least Second
Class in the 6 units in question.
2. Both reading courses shall not be chosen in the same
subject.
3. A reading course shall not be taken concurrently
with a Late Afternoon and Saturday Morning Class
or with Summer Session courses except by a student
in the Fourth Year.
Credit for a course of private reading is part of the
maximum of 15 units which may be taken in addition to
the regular work of Winter and Summer Sessions; and no
other additional work may be taken in the same academic
year.
HONOURS
1. Students whose proposed scheme of work involves
Honour courses must obtain the consent of the departments
concerned and of the Dean before entering on these courses;
and this consent will normally be granted only to those stu- 84 Faculty of Arts and Science
dents who have a clear academic record at the end of their
Second Year with at least Second Class standing in the subject or subjects of specialization. (Cards of application for
admission to Honour courses may be obtained at the Registrar's office.)
2. Certain departments offer Honour courses either
alone or in combination with other departments. For Honours in a single department, at least 18 of the requisite 30
units must be taken in the department concerned, and at
least 6 outside it. For Honours in combined courses, at least
12 units are required in each of two subjects. Particulars of
these courses are given below.
3. Candidates for Honours may, with the consent of the
Department concerned, offer a special reading course (to
count not more than 3 units) in addition to the reading
courses offered on page 83, section 5.
4. All candidates for Honours may, at the option of the
department or departments concerned, be required to present a graduating essay embodying the results of some investigation that they have made independently. Credit for the
graduating essay will be not less than 3 or more than 6 units.
5. Candidates for Honours are required, at the end of
their Fourth Year, to take a general examination, oral or
written, or both, as the department or departments concerned shall decide. This examination is designed to test the
student's knowledge of his chosen subject or subjects as a
whole, and is in addition to the ordinary class examinations
of the Third and Fourth Years.
6. Honours are,of two grades—First Class and Second
Class. Students who, in the opinion of the department concerned, have not attained a sufficiently high ranking, may be
awarded a pass degree. If a combined Honour course is taken,
First Class Honours will be given only if both the departments concerned agree;  and an Honour degree will be Honour Courses 85
withheld if either department refuses a sufficiently high
grade.
7. It is hoped to offer the following Honour Courses
during the session 1933-34. But, if, for the reasons stated
in the footnote to page 77, it is found impossible to do so,
the University reserves the right to refuse new registrations
in any of them.
HONOUR COURSES IN SINGLE DEPARTMENTS
Biology (Botany Option)
Prerequisites'.—Biology 1, Chemistry 1, Botany 1.
Chemistry 2 and 3, Physics 1 or 2, and Zoology 1 are required before completion of the course and should be taken
as early as possible.
Required Courses:—Botany 3 (a), 4, 5 (a), and 6 (c).
Optional Courses:—Biology 2 and 3; courses in Botany
not specifically required; and courses in Zoology. Optional
courses should be selected in consultation with the department.
Biology (Zoology Option)
Prerequisites:—Biology 1, Chemistry 1, Botany 1.
Physics 1 or 2, Zoology 1, Chemistry 2 and 3 are required
before completion of the course and should be taken as early
as possible.
Students specializing in Entomology may substitute
Zoology 9 for one of the required courses given above.
Required Coures:—Zoology 2, 3, 5, 6.
Optional Courses:—Zoology 4, 7, 8, 9; courses in Botany; Geology 6. These optional courses should be selected
in consultation with the Head of the department.
Chemistry
Prerequisites:—Chemistry 1; Physics 1 or 2 and Mathematics 2.
Course:—Candidates are required to complete the following courses: Chemistry 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 9 and 10. 8 6 Faculty of Arts and Science
Classics
Course:—Any three of Greek 3, 5, 6, 7; any three of
Latin 3, 4, 5, 6; and either Greek 9 or Latin 7.
As proof of ability to write Greek and Latin prose, candidates must attain not less than Second Class standing in
Greek 8 and Latin 8. During the candidate's Fourth Year,
papers will be set on sight translation, and the candidate is
advised to pursue a course of private reading under the
supervision of the department.
There will also be a general paper on Antiquities, Literature and History.
Economics
Prerequisite:—A reading knowledge of French or German. A paper in translation to be written at the end of the
Fourth Year will be required to ensure that this knowledge
has been kept up.
Course:—Economics 2, if not already taken, any 15 further units in the department, to include Economics 4, Economics 9, and Statistics 1, and two from the following
group:
Economics 3, Economics 5, Economics 6, Economics 7,
Economics 11, Statistics 2, Government 1, Sociology 1. Also
a graduating essay which will count 3 units. (Tutorial instruction will be arranged in connection with the essay.)
Students must pass an oral examination, and, if required,
address a general audience on a designated subject.
Attendance at the Seminar in Economics is required in
the Third and Fourth Years.
Economics and Political Science
Prerequisites—A reading knowledge of French or German. A paper in translation to be written at the end of the
Fourth Year will be required to ensure that this knowledge
has been kept up.
Course:—Economics 2, if not already taken, any 15 further units in the department to include Government 1, Statistics 1, and three from the following group: Honour Courses 87
Sociology 1, Sociology 2, Government 2, Government
3, Government 4, Economics 3, Economics 4, Economics 5,
Economics 6, Economics 7, Economics 9, Statistics 2.
Also a graduating essay which will count 3 units. (Tutorial instruction will be arranged in connection with the
essay.)
Students must pass an oral examination and, if required,
address a general audience on a designated subject.
Attendance at the Seminar in Economics is required in
the Third and Fourth Years.
English Language and Literature
Prerequisites:—Satisfactory work in English 2 (c) or its
equivalent, and a reading knowledge of French or German.
The Department may require candidates to write a paper in
translation at the end of the Fourth Year.
Course:—English 25 (involving an examination on the
life, times, and complete works of some major English
author), 20, 21 (a), 21 (b), 22, 24 (the seminar, which
must be attended in both years, though credit will be given
only for the work of the final year), and a graduating essay
which will count 3 units.
Candidates will be required to take the following final
Honours examinations on the History of English Literature:
1. From the beginning to 1500.
2. From 1500 to 1660.
3. From 1660 to 1780.
4. From 1780 to 1890.
One of these examinations will be oral.
In the award of Honours special importance will be attached to the graduating essay and to the final Honours
examinations.
If the candidate's work outside the department does not
include a course in English History, he must take an examination in that subject. 8 8 Faculty of Arts and Science
Geology
Prerequisites:—Geology 1. If possible Geology 2 also
should be taken in the Second Year. Chemistry 1 should be
taken in the First Year, as it is prerequisite to Geology 2
and is also of great value in Geology 1. Physics 1 or 2 should
also be taken in the First Year. Biology 1 is recommended in
the Second Year, as it is prerequisite to Zoology 1, which
should be taken in the Third Year as a valuable preparation
for Geology 6.
Courses:—18 units to be chosen from Geology 4, 5, 6,
7, 8, 10, 12. If Geology 2 has not been taken in the Second
Year it must be taken in the Third Year, as it is prerequisite
to Geology 7 and 8.
History
Course:—Any 18 units, of which the graduating essay
will count 3 units. The seminar (which carries no credit)
must be attended in the Third and the Fourth Years. A
reading knowledge of French is required.
Frendk
Course:—French 3 (a), I (b),i (c) in the Third Year.
French 4 (a), 4 (b),4 (c) in the Fourth Year.
A graduating essay (in French)  which will count 3
units.
Latin
Course:—Latin 3,4, 5, 6 and 7 and Greek 9. The candidate must also take Latin 8 in both years, obtaining at least
second class standing. His general knowledge will be tested
by papers on Antiquities, Literature, and History at the end
of the Fourth Year.
Mathematics
Prerequisites:—Mathematics 2, Physics 1 or 2.
Course:—Any 18 units in Mathematics, and Physics 3
and 5. A final Honours examination is required. Honour Courses 89
Physics
Prerequisites:—Mathematics 2, Physics 1 or 2, Chemistry 1.
Course:—Mathematics 10, 16, 17. Physics 3 and 5, and
15 additional units. Students are advised to take Chemistry
4 and 7, if possible.
COMBINED HONOUR COURSES
(a) Biology (Botany and Zoology) and Bacteriology
Prerequisites:—Chemistry 1 and 2; Biology 1; Botany
1, or Zoology 1.
Course:—Bacteriology 1, 2 and 5; the required courses
for either the Botany option or the Zoology option of the
Honour course in Biology.
(b) Biology (Botany and Zoology) and Geology
Prerequisites:—Chemistry 1; Biology 1; Geology 1.
Course:—Geology 2 and 6; the required courses for
either the Botany option or the Zoology option of the Honour course in Biology.
(c) Chemistry and Biology (Botany and Zoology)
Prerequisites:—Chemistry 1 and 2; Physics 1 or 2;
Biology 1.
Course:—Chemistry 3, 4, 5, 7 and 9; the required
courses for either the Botany option or the Zoology option
of the Honour course in Biology.
(d) Chemistry and Physics
Prerequisites:—Chemistry 1; Physics 1 or 2 and Mathematics 2.
Course:—Chemistry 2, 3, 4, 5 and 7, and Physics 3, 5,
8 or 19, and two units from 7, 10, 12, 13 or 14. Candidates
are advised to take Mathematics 10. 90 Faculty of Arts and Science
(e) Chemistry and Geology
Prerequisites:—Chemistry 1; Physics 1 or 2; and Geology I.
Course:—Chemistry 2, 3, 4, 5 and 7, and at least 12
units in Geology.
(f) Chemistry and Mathematics
Prerequisites:—Chemistry 1; Physics 1 or 2; and Mathematics 2.
Course:—Chemistry 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, and at least 12 units
in Mathematics, including Mathematics 10.
(g) Mathematics and Physics
Prerequisites:—Mathematics 2; Physics 1 or 2.
Course:—Mathematics, at least  12  units, including
Mathematics 10,16 and 17.
Physics 3,5,8, and six additional units.
(h) Any Two of:
Economics or Economics and Political Science, English,
French, History, Latin, Philosophy.
Economics or Economics and Political Science
Prerequisite:—A reading knowledge of French or German. A paper in translation to be written at the end of the
Fourth Year will be required to ensure that this knowledge
has been kept up.
Course in Economics:—12 units, including Economics
4, Economics 9, Statistics 1, and Economics 2, if not already
taken.
Course in Economics and Political Science:—12 units,
including Government 1, Statistics 1, and Economics 2, if
not already taken.
English
Prerequisite:—A reading knowledge of French or German. The Department may require candidates to write a
paper in translation at the end of the Fourth Year. Honour Courses 91
Course:—English 20 and 24, and any three of the English courses of the first division. The seminar must be attended during both the final years, but credits which count
for the B.A. degree will be given only for the work of the
Fourth Year.
Candidates will be required to take the following final
Honours examinations on the History of English Literature:
1. From 1500 to 1660.
2. From 1660 to 1780.
3. From 1780 to 1890.
In the award of Honours special importance will be
attached to these examinations. One of them will be oral.
French
Course:—If the graduating essay is written on a French
subject, 3 (a) and 3 (c), 4 (a) and 4 (c); otherwise either
these courses or 3 (a) and 3 (b), 4 (a) and 4 (b).
Courses 3 (b) and 4 (b) are intended primarily for
Honour students and should be taken whenever possible,
even if they are not required to make up the minimum number of units.
History
Prerequisite:—A reading knowledge of French.
Course:—History 10 and any 9 additional units, of
which the graduating essay, if written in History, will count
3 units.
The seminar (which carries no credits) must be attended in the Third and Fourth Years.
Latin
• Course:—Latin 8 and any four of 3, 4, 5, 6, 7. In the
final year candidates must pass an examination (a) in sight
translation, and (b) in Latin Literature, History and Antiquities. Private reading under the direction of the department is recommended.
Philosophy
Course:—Any 12 units besides Philosophy 1, six units
in each year. 92 Faculty of Arts and Science
COURSES LEADING TO THE DEGREE of B.COM.
The degree of B.Com. is granted with Honours or as a
Pass degree. A Pass degree will be granted on completion of
courses amounting to 60 units chosen in conformity with
Calendar regulations.
Students holding the degree of B.A. from this University may proceed to the degree of B.Com. by completing 15
additional units of work, provided that the additional units
are chosen so as to complete the requirements for the B.Com.
degree.
It is also possible to obtain the B.A. and B.Com. degrees
concurrently in five years on completion of 75 units chosen
so as to cover the requirements for both degrees.
No distinction is made between Pass and Honour students in the First and Second Years; but a student will not
be accepted as a candidate for Honours in the Third Year
unless he has obtained an average of second class on the
courses required to be taken in the Second Year.
While the B.A. degree can be completed in one year by
students holding the B.Com. degree, the converse is not true,
as work in two consecutive years is required for the B.Com.
degree in both Accountancy and Commercial Law. It is,
however, possible for students who are taking the combined
degree in five years to qualify for the B.A. degree at the end
of four years by taking additional courses either in Winter
or Summer Session to make up for the six units of Accountancy and Commercial Law 1 which do not count towards
the B.A. degree.
The regulations as to Summer Session credits, number
of units to be taken in any academic year, etc., apply to
courses leading to the degree of B.Com. in the same way as
to courses leading to the degree of B.A.
During the summer vacations students are advised to
obtain as much business experience as possible. Courses Leading to the Degree of B.Com.     93
First Year
The following courses comprising 15 units are required:
English 1.
The first course in a language offered for matriculation
(Latin or French or German or Greek).
Mathematics 1.
Economics 1.
One course selected from the following: Biology 1,
Chemistry 1, Physics 1, or Physics 2.
Second Year
The following courses comprising 15 units are required:
English 2. ^
A continuation course in the language taken in the First
Year.
Mathematics 3.
Economics 2.
Economics 10.
A clear academic record at the end of the Second Year
will be required of students proceeding to the Third Year.
In view of the importance which rightly attaches to the
capacity for adequate and clear expression in writing, regulation 13, on page 108 of the Calendar, will be rigidly enforced at the end of the Second Year, and a reasonable legibility in handwriting will be insisted on.
To ensure the conformity of their courses to Calendar
regulations, all students in their Second Year are advised to
submit to the Dean of the Faculty, on or before March 31
of each year, a scheme of the courses they propose to take
during their last two years.
Third and Fourth Years
The requirements of the Third and Fourth Years comprise 30 units, of which students must take, in their Third
Year, not less than 15 units. The graduation standing is
determined by the results of the Third and Fourth Years 94 Faculty of Arts and Science
combined. Courses must be chosen in conformity with the
requirements that follow.
Each student must take:
(a) An additional course in a language already
taken for credit in the first two years, that is
French, German or Latin (to be taken in the
Third Year) or an additional course in English.
3 units.
(b) The following seven courses:
Economics 4.  (Money and Banking.)
Economics 6.  (Foreign Trade.)
Commercial Law 1.
Commercial Law 2.
Accountancy 1.
Statistics 1.
Accountancy 2 or Accountancy 3.      21 units.
(c) One of the following courses:
Economics 19.   (Marketing.)
Statistics 2.
Economics 11.  (Transportation.) 3 units.
(d) Mathematics 3, if not already chosen, otherwise
one course—not already chosen—selected from
the following:
Accountancy 2 or Accountancy 3.
Statistics 2.
Economics 11 (Transportation).
Government 1.
Government 4.
Economics 5 (Taxation).
Mathematics 2.
Education (3 units).
English, if not chosen under (a), (3 units).
Additional course in Latin, French or German.
Geology (3 units). Courses Leading to the Degree of M.A.       95
Forestry (3 units).
Mining (3 units).
Agricultural Economics 1.
Biology (3 units). 3 units.
In the Fourth Year satisfactory work must be done in
connection with a discussion class of one hour a week.
HONOURS
1. Candidates for Honours are required to take Statistics 2 and to present a graduating essay embodying the results of some investigation that they have made independently. Credit for the graduating essay will be 3 units. These
requirements take the place of the options offered to Pass
students under (c) and (d) above.
2. Candidates for Honours are required at the end of
their Fourth Year to take a general examination, oral or
written or both. This examination is designed to test the
student's knowledge of his chosen subject as a whole and
is in addition to the ordinary class examinations of the Third
and Fourth Years, i
3. Honours are of two grades—First Class and Second
Class. First Class Honours will not be given unless the
Graduating Essay is First Class nor will Second Class Honours be given unless the Graduating Essay is at least Second
Class. Students who, in the opinion of the department,
have not attained a sufficiently high ranking for Honours
may be awarded a Pass degree.
COURSES LEADING TO THE DEGREE OF M.A.
1. Candidates for the M.A. degree must hold the B.A.
degree from this University, or its equivalent.
2. A graduate of another university applying for permission to enter as a graduate student is required to submit
with his application, on or before September 1st, an official statement of his graduation together with a certificate of the standing gained in the several subjects of his
course. The Faculty will determine the standing of such a 96 Faculty of Arts and Science
student in this University. The fee for examination of certificates is $2.00. This fee must accompany the application.
3. Candidates with approved degrees and academic records who proceed to the Master's degree shall be required:
To spend one year in resident graduate study; or
(i) To do two or more years of private work under
the supervision of the University, such work
to be equivalent to one year of graduate study;
or;
(ii) To do one year of private work under University supervision and one term of resident graduate study, the total of such work to be equivalent to one year of resident graduate study.
4. One major and one minor shall be required. In general the minor shall be taken outside the Department in
which the student is taking his major, but special permission
may be given by the Faculty to take both major and minor
in the same department, provided the subjects are different
and are under different professors. The major or the minor
may, with the consent of the Department or the Departments concerned, be extended to include work in an allied
subject.
5. Two typewritten copies of each thesis, on standardized thesis paper, shall be submitted. (See special circular
of "Instructions for the Preparation of Masters' Theses.")
6. Application for admission as a graduate student shall
be made to the Registrar by October 1st.
7. The following requirements apply to all Departments: Prerequisites:
Minor:—For a minor, courses regularly offered in the
Third and Fourth years amounting to at least
six units are prerequisite, and at least second
class standing must have been obtained in each
of these courses. For details of requirements,
see regulations of the several departments. Courses Leading to the Degree of M.A.       97
Major:—For a major, courses regularly offered in the
Third and Fourth years amounting to at least
eight units are prerequisite, and at least second
class standing must have been obtained in each
of these courses. For details of requirements,
see regulations of the several departments.
Students who have not fulfilled the requirements outlined above during their undergraduate course may fulfil
the same by devoting more than one academic years' study
to the M.A work.
M.A. Courses:
Minor:—Five or six units of regular Third or Fourth
year work, or equivalents in reading courses.
Examinations to be written, or oral, or both at
the discretion of the Department concerned.
At least second class standing is required in
the subjects of the minor.
Major:—Nine or ten units of regular Third or Fourth
year work, or equivalents in reading courses,
of which units three to six shall be counted
for the thesis.
All candidates must submit to a general examination on the major field. This examination
may be written, or oral, or both, at the discretion of the Department concerned.
At least second class standing is required in
the work of the major.
Languages:—No candidate will receive the degree of
M.A. who has not satisfied the Head of the Department in
which he is majoring of his ability to read technical articles
either in French or in German.
8. Philosophy 7 and 9 will be accepted as prerequisites
for a minor in Education, if these subjects have not already
been counted as prerequisites towards a major or a minor
in Philosophy. 98 Faculty of Arts and Sceence
Graduate students, who are Assistants, giving not more
than four hours a week of tutorial instruction, are permitted to qualify for the M.A. degree after one regular winter
session of University attendance, provided they have done,
in the Summer vacation, research work of a nature and extent satisfactory to the Head of the Department concerned.
Such students must be registered as graduate students and
must have secured the approval of the Head of the Department concerned and of the Faculty before entering upon
the research in question. Other graduate students doing
tutorial work shall not be allowed to come up for final examination in less than two academic years after registration
as M.A. students.
The following special requirements are prescribed by
different departments:
Bacteriology
Prerequisites:
Minor:—Zoology 1, Biology 3, Chemistry 3.
Major:—Bacteriology 1, 2, 5, and Bacteriology 3 or 6.
M.A. Course:
Minor:—Chemistry 9 a, Chemistry 19, Zoology 5.
Major:—Thesis, five or six units, and other courses to
complete required units.
Biology (Botany Option)
Prerequisites:
Minor:—Biology 1, and six additional units in Botany
and Zoology.
Major:—Biology  1, Botany  1, and eight additional
units, including Zoology 1.
M.A. Course:
Minor:—A minimum of five units chosen in consultation with the Department.
Major:—Thesis, at least five units, and other courses to
complete required units.
IB Courses Leading to the Degree of M.A.       99
Biology (Zoology Option)
Prerequisites:
Minor:—Biology 1, and six additional units in Botany
and Zoology.
Major:—Biology 1, Zoology 1, and eight additional
units, including Botany 1.
M.A. Course:
Minor:—A minimum of five units chosen in consultation with the Department.
Major:—Thesis, at least five units, and other courses to
complete the required number of units.
Prerequisites: Economics
Minor:—A minimum of fifteen units of work in subjects in the Department, or an equivalent. The
fifteen units must include Economics 4, Economics 9, and Statistics 1.
Major:—Honours in Economics; or in Economics in
combination with some other subject; or an
equivalent.
Economics and Political Science
Prerequisites:
Minor:—A minimum of fifteen units in the Department (or an equivalent), including Government 1 and Statistics 1.
Major:—Honours in Economics and Political Science;
or in Economics; or in Economics in combination with some other subject; or an equivalent.
M.A. Course:
All candidates for the Master's degree in this Department must attend the Honour Seminar.
Prerequisites:
Minor: At least nine units of credit for English courses
elective in the Third and Fourth years of the
undergraduate curriculum. 100 Faculty of Arts and Science
Major:—At least fifteen units of credit for courses elective in the Third and Fourth years.
M.A. Course:
Minor:—Six units of credit in advanced courses in
English not already taken.
Major:—(a) Twelve units of credit in advanced
courses not already taken, one of which
courses must be English 21a, or its equivalent, if this has not been previously offered for credit.
(b) A graduating essay which will count as
an advanced course involving three units
of credit.
(c) Oral examinations on the history of English Literature.
(d) A reading knowledge of either French or
German. A student who offers both languages will be allowed three units of credit
towards the M.A. degree.
Detailed Study:  I
(a) O.F.—Aucassin et Nicoletie.
(b) XVIth Century — Montaigne, Essais, Hatier.
Chefs-d'oeuvre poetiques du XVIe siecle, Hatier.
Less Detailed:
(c) XVIIih Century and after—The evolution of the
French Novel, particularly the novels treated in
Le Breton's Roman au XVHe siecle, and the chief
Romantic Novels.
(d) XVIIIth Century—Beaumarchais, Barbier de Seville. Rousseau, La Nouvelle Heloise—Emile. Diderot, Le Neveu de Rameau. Voltaire, Les Lettres
philosophiques.
(e) XlXth Century—Auzas, La Poesie au 19e siecle.
(Oxford). Alfred de Musset, Theatre. Oxford.
Rostand, Cyrano de Bergerac. Fasquelle. Courses Leading to the Degree of M.A.     101
(f) A general knowledge of French literary history
from XVIth Century to end of XLXth. This not
to be detailed, but to treat of main movements.
(g) A thesis in French on a subject to be approved by
the Head of the Department.
Note:—It is expected that the candidate will have read
and will be able to discuss three plays of Moliere, three of
Corneille, three of Racine, and something of Boileau, Bos-
suet, Chateaubriand, La Fontaine, Lamartine, Victor Hugo,
Balzac, Flaubert, Anatole France.
Some help will be given by lectures, explanations of
texts, and advice in reading; but the Department cannot
undertake to cover the whole or any considerable part of
the syllabus. 'r
History
Prerequisites:
Minor:—Two courses (six units) to be chosen from
History 10 to 20 inclusive.
Major:—Three courses (nine units) to be chosen from
History 10 to 20 inclusive.
M.A. Course:
Minor:—Two courses (six units) to be chosen from
History 10 to 20 inclusive; or the equivalent
in reading courses.
Major:—Two related courses (six units) to be chosen
from History 10 to 20 inclusive, or the equivalent in Reading Courses, and a thesis embodying original work to which 3 units of credit
are given. All candidates for a major in History who have not already done so must attend the Honours Seminar in Historical
Method, or submit to an examination on a
parallel Reading Course approved by the Department. 102 Faculty of Arts and Science
Prerequisites: Mathematics
Minor:—Mathematics 10 and at least two other Honour
Courses.
Major:—Candidates must have completed the Honour
Course in Mathematics, or its equivalent.
M.A. Course:
Minor:—Mathematics 16 and an additional three units
to be chosen from the Honour Courses.
Major:—Any four of the graduate courses and a thesis.
Prerequisites: ^
Minor:—Physics 3 and 5 and at least two more units of
work regularly offered in the Third or Fourth
Year.
Major:—At least eight units of work regularly offered
in the Third and Fourth Years.
M.A. Course:
Minor:—Six units of work in advanced courses in Physics not already taken.
Major:—(a)  At least six units of work in the graduate courses,
(b)  A thesis.
TEACHER TRAINING COURSE
Candidates qualifying for the "Academic Certificate"
(given by the Provincial Department of Education, Victoria, on the completion of the Teacher Training Course)
take the courses prescribed on Pages 136 to 138. These
courses are open only to graduates registered in the Teacher
Training Course.
1. Registration
Documentary evidence of graduation in Arts or Science
from a recognized university must be submitted to the
Registrar by all candidates other than graduates of the University of British Columbia. All correspondence in connec- Teacher Training Course 103
tion with the Teacher Training Course should be addressed
to the Registrar, from whom registration cards may be procured. _
2. Certificates and Standing
At the close of the University session successful candidates in the Teacher Training Course will be recommended
to the Faculty of Arts and Science for the University Diploma in Education and to the Provincial Department of
Education for the Academic Certificate. Successful candidates will be graded as follows: First Class, an average of
80 per cent, or over; Second Class, 65 to 80 per cent; Passed,
50 to 65 percent.
All students registered in the Teacher Training Course
at the University are entitled to the privileges accorded to
students in the various faculties, and are also subject to the
regulations of the University regarding discipline and attendance at lectures.
In the case of students who have completed the Teacher
Training Course, First or Second Class standing in each of
(1) History and Principles of Education, and (2) Educational Psychology is accepted as equivalent to a minor for
an M.A. degree, subject in each case to the consent of the
Head of the Department in which the student wishes to
take his major.
3. Preparatory Courses in Arts and Science
Candidates will not be admitted to courses in High
School Methods unless they have obtained at least nine (9)
units of credit in each of the corresponding subjects from
the academic courses normally offered in the Third and
Fourth Years. Special cases will be decided on their merits
by the Head of the Department concerned and by the Professor of Education. (The academic courses referred to
above are English, History, Mathematics, etc., and not
courses in Education.)
4. A description of the courses offered is given under
Department of Education. 104 Faculty of Arts and Science
COURSES LEADING TO THE SOCIAL
SERVICE DIPLOMA
The Diploma in Social Service will be granted on the
completion of courses amounting to 30 units chosen in conformity with the following outline:
First Year:
Biology 1 (Introductory Biology) 3 units
Economics 1 (Principles of Economics) or
Economics 2 (Economic History) 3 units
English 1 (Literature and Composition) 3 units
Social Service 1 (Introduction) 2 units
Social Service 2 (Case Work) 1 unit
Social Service 3 (Child Welfare) 1 unit
Social Service 4 (Hygiene) 1 unit
Social Service 9 (Field Work Seminar) 1 unit
Second Year:
Either one of:
Philosophy 1 (Psychology)
Nursing 24 (Psychology for Nurses) and
Nursing 27 (The Family) 2 units
Any two of:
Philosophy 8 (Social Psychology)
Philosophy 9 (Child Psychology)
Economics 3 (Labour Problems) 6 units
Sociology 1 (General Sociology) 3 units
Social Service 5 (Advanced Case Work) 1 unit
Social Service 6 (a) (Advanced Child Welfare)    1 unit
Social Service 7 (Group Work)
Social Service 10 (Field Work Seminar) 1 unit
Social Service 11 1 unit
A minimum of eight hours' field work each week for
four terms is required. A student must, in addition, spend
two months with an accredited social agency as a full-time
worker under supervision prior to registration for the technical courses of the second year. The agency is not respon- Examinations and Advancement 105
sible for expenses (such as carfare) incident to the field
work.
Graduates in Arts and Science, who have some experience in social work, and who have taken as part of their
undergraduate courses a sufficient number of the subjects
required for the Diploma in Social Service to enable them
to devote additional time to field work, may be allowed to
obtain the Diploma in one Winter Session and the succeeding Summer Session.
EXAMINATIONS AND ADVANCEMENT
1. Examinations in all subjects, obligatory for all students, are held in April. In the case of subjects which are
final at Christmas and in the case of courses of the First
and Second years, examinations will be held in December
as well. Applications for special consideration on account
of illness or domestic affliction must be submitted to the
Dean not later than two days after the close of the examination period. In cases where illness is the plea for absence
from examinations, a medical certificate must be presented
on the appropriate form which may be obtained from the
Dean's office/!
2. The passing mark will be 50 per cent, in each subject, except in the case of First and Second Year students
who, during one session, do 15 units of regular work, in
which case a percentage of 50 or more will be required in
each subject or a general average of 60 per cent, and not
less than 40 per cent, in each subject. In Beginners' German, however, the passing mark is 50 per cent. In any
course which involves both laboratory work and written
examinations, students may be debarred from examinations
if they fail to present satisfactory results in laboratory
work, and they will be required to pass in both parts of the
course.
3. Successful candidates will be graded as follows: First
Class, an average of 80 per cent, or over; Second Class, 65
to 80 per cent.; Passed, 50 to 65 per cent. 106 Faculty of Arts and Science
4. A student who makes 50 per cent, of the total required for a full year's work (at least 15 units chosen in
conformity with calendar regulations), but who fails in an
individual subject, will be granted a supplemental examination in that subject if he has not fallen below 30 per cent, in
that subject. If his mark is below 30 per cent, a supplemental examination will not be granted. Notice will be
sent to all students to whom supplemental examinations
have been granted.
A student who makes less than 50 per cent, of the total
required for a full year's work (15 units) will not be allowed a supplemental examination.
5. A request for the re-reading of an answer paper must
be forwarded to the Registrar WITHIN FOUR WEEKS
after the results of the examinations are announced. Each
applicant must state clearly his reasons for making such a
request in view of the fact that the paper of a candidate
who makes less than a passing mark in a subject is read at
least a second time before results are tabulated and announced. A re-reading of an examination paper will be
granted only with the consent of the Head of the Department concerned. The fee for re-reading a paper is $2.00.
6. Supplemental Examinations will be held in September in respect of Winter Session examinations, and in June
or July in respect of Summer Session examinations. In the
Teacher Training Course Supplemental Examinations will
be held not earlier than the third week in June. To pass a
supplemental examination a candidate must obtain at least
50 per cent.
In the first three years a candidate who has been granted
a supplemental may try the supplemental only once. If he
fails in the supplemental he must either repeat his attendance in the course or substitute an alternative chosen in accordance with Calendar regulations. This regulation will
apply in respect of examinations held at Christmas, 1933,
and subsequently. In the case of Fourth Year students two Examinations and Advancement 107
supplemental examinations in respect of the same course
will be allowed.
A candidate with a supplemental examination outstanding in any subject which is on the Summer Session
curriculum may clear his record by attending the Summer
Session course in the subject and passing the required examinations.
7. Applications for supplemental examinations, accompanied by the necessary fees (see Schedule of Fees),
must be in the hands of the Registrar at least two weeks before the date set for the examinations.
8. No student may enter a higher year with standing
defective in respect of more than 3 units. (See regulations
in regard to advancement to Third Year Commerce, page
93, and in reference to admission to Second Year Applied
Science, page 81.) ^
No student who has failures or supplementals outstanding in more than 3 units, or who has any failure or supplemental outstanding for more than a year of registered
attendance, shall be allowed to register for more than 15
units of work, these units to include either the subject (or
subjects) in which he is conditioned or permissible substitutes.
9. A student may not continue in a later year any subject in which he has a supplemental examination outstanding from an earlier year, except in the case of compulsory
subjects in the Second Year.
10. A student who is not allowed to proceed to a higher
year may not register as a partial student in respect of the
subjects of that higher year. But a student who is required
to repeat his year will be exempt from attending lectures
and passing examinations in subjects in which he has already made at least 50 per cent. In this case he may take,
in addition to the subjects of the year which he is repeating, certain subjects of the following year. 108 Faculty of Arts and Science
11. A student who fails twice in the work of the same
year may, upon the recommendation of the Faculty, be required by the Senate to withdraw from the University.
12. Any student whose academic record, as determined
by the tests and examinations of the first term of the First
or Second Year, is found to be unsatisfactory, may, upon
the recommendation of the Faculty, be required by the
Senate to discontinue attendance at the University for the
remainder of the session. Such a student will not be readmitted to the University as long as any supplementary examinations are outstanding.
13. Term essays and examination papers will be refused
a passing mark if they are noticeably deficient in English;
and, in this event, students will be required to pass a special
examination in English to be set by the Department of
English.
DEPARTMENTS IN ARTS AND SCIENCE
Department of Bacteriology
Professor: Hibbert Winslow Hill.
Instructor: Helen M. Mathews.
Instructor: D. C. B. Duff.
1. General Bacteriology.—A course consisting of lectures, demonstrations, and laboratory work.
The history of bacteriology, the place of bacteria in
nature, the classification of bacterial forms, methods of
culture and isolation and various bactericidal substances
and conditions will be studied. The relationship of bacteria
to agriculture, household science, and public health will be
carefully considered.
Text-book: Lutman, Microbiology, latest edition, McGraw-Hill.
Students proceeding to Bacteriology 2 need procure
Park, "Williams & Krumweide only (see Bacteriology 2).
Prerequisites: Chemistry 1, and Biology 1.
Seven hours a week. First Term. 2 units. Bacteriology 109
2. Special Bacteriology.—A course consisting of lectures, demonstrations, and laboratory work.
The more common pathogenic bacteria will be studied,
together with the reactions of the animal body against invasion by these bacteria. The course will include demonstrations in immunity and the various diagnostic methods
in use in public health laboratories.
Text-book: Park, Williams & Krumwiede, Pathogenic
Microorganisms, latest edition, Lea & Febiger.
Prerequisite: Bacteriology 1.
Seven hours a week. Second Term. 2 units.
3. As in Dairying 3 (under Faculty of Agriculture).
1 Yz units.
4. As in Dairying 5 (under Faculty of Agriculture).
1 l/z units.
5. Advanced Bacteriology.—A reading and laboratory
course, including immunology. Tutorial instruction of one
hour per week; laboratory and demonstration hours to be
arranged with the class.
Prerequisites: Bacteriology 1 and 2, with at least second
class standing in Bacteriology 2.
6. Soil Bacteriology.—A laboratory and lecture course,
in which the bacteria of soils are studied qualitatively and
quantitatively, with special reference to soil fertility.
Text-book: Lohnis and Fred, Text-book of Agricultural Bacteriology, latest edition, McGraw-Hill.
Prerequisite: Bacteriology 1.
Six hours a week. First Term. 2 units.
7. As in Dairying 7 (under Faculty of Agriculture).
3 units.
8. Reading Course in Bacteriology: a directed reading
course in advanced bacteriology or immunity. Written or
oral examination to be given at the discretion of the department.
Prerequisites: Bacteriology 1, 2 and 5. (The course in
certain cases may run concurrently with Bacteriology 5.)
3 units. 110 Faculty of Arts and Science
Department of Botany
Professor: A. H. Hutchinson.
Associate Professor: Frank Dickson.
Associate Professor: John Davidson.
Assistant: E. Miriam R. Ashton.
Assistant: Edgar Black.
Assistant: Norah Hughes.
Biology
1. Introductory Biology.—The course is introductory
to more advanced work in Botany or Zoology; also to
courses closely related to Biological Science, such as Agriculture, Forestry, Medicine.
The fundamental principles of Biology; the interrelationship of plants and animals; life processes; the cell and
division of labour; life-histories; relation to environment.
The course is prerequisite to all courses in Botany and
Zoology.
A list of Reference Books is supplied.
Two lectures and two hours laboratory a week. 3 units.
2. (a) Principles of Genetics.—The fundamentals of
Genetics illustrated by the race histories of certain plants
and animals; the physical basis of heredity; variations; mutations; acquired characters; Mendel's law with suggested
applications.
Text-book: Castle, Genetics and Eugenics, Harvard
Press.
Prerequisite: Biology 1.
Two lectures and one laboratory period a week. First
Term. 1 x/z units.
2. (b) Principles of Genetics.—A continuation of the
studies of genetic principles with suggested applications.
A lecture and laboratory course. The laboratory work will
consist of problems, examination of illustrative material
and experiments with Drosophila.
Text-book: Sinnott and Dunn, Principles of Genetics,
McGraw-Hill.
Prerequisite: Biology 2 (a). Botany 111
One lecture and four hours laboratory a week. Second
Term. 1 Vz units.
2. (c) An introduction to biometrical methods as applied to genetics.
Prerequisite: Biology 2 (a).
One lecture and two hours laboratory a week. Second
Term. 1 unit,
2. (d) A review of advanced phases and the more recent development in genetics.
Prerequisite: Biology 2 (b).
Two hours a week. First Term.
3. General Physiology.—A study of animal and plant
life processes. Open to students of Third and Fourth years
having prerequisite Biology, Chemistry and Physics; the
Department should be consulted.
Text-book: Bayliss, Principles of General Physiology,
Longmans, Green. %
Two lectures and three hours laboratory a week. Reference reading. Second Term. 3 units.
Botany
1. General Botany.—A course including a general survey of the several fields of Botany and introductory to more
specialized courses in Botany.
This course is prerequisite to all other courses in Botany,
except the Evening Course. Partial credit (2 units) toward Botany 1 may be obtained through the Evening
Course.
Text-book: Coulter, Barnes & Cowles, Text-book of
Botany, Vol. 1, University of Chicago Press.
Prerequisite: Biology 1.
Two lectures and two hours laboratory a week. 3 units.
2. Morphology.—A comparative study of plant structures. The relationship of plant groups. Comparative life-
histories. Emphasis is placed upon the increasing complexity of plant structures, from the lower to the higher forms, 112 Faculty of Arts and Scdznce
involving a progressive differentiation accompanied by an
interdependence of parts.
Text-book: Coulter, Barnes & Cowles, Text-book of
Botany, Vol. I, University of Chicago Press.
Prerequisite: Botany 1.
Two lectures and four hours laboratory a week. First
Term.   (Not given in 1933-34.) 2 units.
3. Plant Physiology.
3 (a) A course dealing with the fundamental life-processes in plants, such as nutrition, photosynthesis, absorption, permeability, respiration, transpiration and growth.
This course is prerequisite for Botany 3 (b) and 3 (c).
Text-book: O. Raber, Principles of Plant Physiology,
1929, Macmillan.
Prerequisite: Botany 1.
Two lectures and four hours laboratory work a week.
First Term. 2 units.
3 (b) This course comprises a more advanced study of
the organic constituents of plants and the physiological
changes occurring during plant growth.
Prerequisite: Botany 3 (a).
Two lectures and four hours laboratory work a week.
First Term, j 2 units.
3 (c) A course similar to Botany 3 (a) designed to
train students of the plant sciences in an understanding of
the inter-relations of plants and soils.
Prerequisite: Botany 3 (a).
Two lectures and four hours laboratory work a week.
Second Term. 2 units.
4. Histology.—A study of the structure and development of plants; methods of killing, fixing, embedding, sectioning, staining, mounting, drawing, reconstruction. Use
of microscope, camera lucida, photo-micrographic apparatus.
Text-books: Eames and McDaniels, Introduction to
Plant Anatomy, McGraw-Hill. Chamberlain, Methods in
Plant Histology, University of Chicago Press. Botany 113
Prerequisite: Botany 1.
Seven hours a week. Second Term. 2 units.
5. Systematic Botany.
5. (a) Economic Flora.—An introduction to the classification of plants through a study of selected families of
economic plants of British Columbia; useful for food, fodder, medicine and industrial arts; harmful to crops and
stock. Weeds, and poisonous plants. Methods of control.
Prerequisite: Botany 1.
Texts: Jepson, Economic Plants of California, University of California; Thomson & Sifton, Poisonous Plants and
Weed Seeds, University of Toronto Press.
Two lectures and two hours laboratory a week. First
Term. { V/z units,
5 (b) Dendrology.—A study of the forest trees of
Canada, the common shrubs of British Columbia, the important trees of the United States which are not native to
Canada. Emphasis on the species of economic importance.
Identification, distribution, relative importance, construction of keys. .
Prerequisite: Botany 1.
Text-books: Morton & Lewis, Native Trees of Canada,
Dominion Forestry Branch, Ottawa; Sudworth, Forest
Trees of the Pacific Slope, Superintendent of Documents,
Washington; Davidson and Abercrombie, Conifers, Junipers and Yew, T. F. Unwin.
One lecture and one period of two or three hours laboratory or field work a week. 2 units.
5 (c) Descriptive Taxonomy.—An advanced course
dealing with the collection, preparation and classification
of "flowering plants." Methods of field, herbarium and laboratory work. Plant description, the use of floras, preparation of keys, identification of species. Systems of classification. Nomenclature.
Prerequisites: Botany 1 and 5 (a).
Texts:   Hitchcock,   Descriptive  Systematic  Botany, 114 Faculty of Arts and Scebnce
Wiley & Sons; Henry, Flora of Southern British Columbia,
Gage, Toronto.
One lecture and four hours laboratory a week. Second
Term. \l/z units.
6 (b) Forest Pathology.—Nature, identification and
control of the more important tree-destroying fungi and
other plant parasites of forest.
Text-book: Rankin, Manual of Tree Diseases, Macmillan.
One lecture and two hours laboratory a week during
one-half of the Second Term. 1 l/z units.
6 (c) Plant Pathology (Elementary). — A course
dealing with basic concepts of plant disease and plant disease
control. A number of economically important plant diseases are studied in detail.
Text-book: Heald, Manual of Plant Diseases, McGraw-
Hill.
Prerequisite: Botany 1.
Two lectures and four hours laboratory a week. Second
Term. 2 units.
6 (d) Plant Pathology (Advanced). — A course designed for Honour or Graduate students. Technique, isolation and culture work; inoculations; details concerning the
various stages in the progress of plant diseases; a detailed
study of control measures.
Prerequisite: Botany 6 (c).
Two lectures and four hours laboratory a week. 3 units.
6 (e) Mycology.—A course designed to give the student a general knowledge of the fungi from a taxonomic
point of view.
Text-books: Stevens, Plant Disease Fungi, Macmillan.
Prerequisite: Botany 1.
Two lectures and four hours laboratory a week. Credit
will be given for a collection of fungi made during the
summer preceding the course. First Term. 2 units.
6 (/) History of Plant Pathology.—A lecture course Botany 115
dealing with the history of the science of Plant Pathology
from ancient times to the present.
Text-book: Whetzel, An Outline of the History of
Phytopathology, Saunders.
Prerequisite: Botany 6 (c).
One lecture a week. Second Term. l/z unit.
(Not given in 1933-34.)
7. Plant Ecology.
7 (a) Forest Ecology and Geography.—The interrelations of forest trees and their environment; the biological
characteristics of important forest trees; forest associations;
types and regions; physiography.
Reference books: Whitford and Craig, Forest of British
Columbia, Ottawa; Zon and Sparhawk, Forest of the
World, McGraw-Hill; Hardy, The Geography of Plants,
Oxford University Press. *
Prerequisite: Botany 1.
One lecture and one period of field and practical work
a week. First Term. 1 unit.
Evening and Short Courses in Botany
A course in General Botany, comprising approximately
fifty lectures, is open to all interested in the study of plant
life of the Province. No entrance examination and no previous knowledge of the subject is required.
The course is designed to assist teachers, gardeners, foresters, and other lovers of outdoor life in the Province. As
far as possible, illustrative material will be selected from
the flora of British Columbia.
The classes meet every Tuesday evening during the
University session (Sept.-May) from 7.30 to 9.30 p.m.
Field or laboratory work, under direction, is regarded as a
regular part of the course.
No examination is required except in the case of University students desiring credit for this course. Biology 1
is a prerequisite in the case of students desiring credit for
this course. This course may be substituted for the lecture 116 Faculty of Arts and Science
part of Botany; but credit is not given until the laboratory
work is complete.
Other students desiring to ascertain their standing in
the class may apply for a written test.
A detailed statement of requirements and of work covered in this course is issued as a separate circular. Copies
may be had on request.
Department of Chemistry
Professor: R. H. Clark.
Professor of Analytical Chemistry: E. H. Archibald.
Associate Professor: W. F. Seyer.
Associate Professor: M. J. Marshall.
Assistant Professor: William Ure.
Assistant: Ralph G. D. Moore.
Assistant: James E. R. Lawley.
Assistant: James B. Flynn.
1. General Chemistry.—This course is arranged to give
a full exposition of the general principles involved in modern Chemistry and comprises a systematic study of the
properties of the more important metallic and non-metal-
he elements and their compounds, and the application of
Chemistry in technology.
Text-book: Smith's, College Chemistry, revised by
Kendall, 1929 Edition. The Century Co.
For the Laboratory: Harris and Ure, Experimental
Chemistry for Colleges, McGraw-Hill.
Three lectures and three hours laboratory a week.
1 3 units.
2. Qualitative and Quantitative Analysis.
(a) Qualitative Analysis.—A study of the chemical
reactions of the common metallic and acid radicals, together with the theoretical considerations involved in these
reactions.
Text: A. A. Noyes, Qualitative Analysis, Macmillan.
Reference: Miller, The Elementary Theory of Qualitative Analysis, The Century Co. Chemistry 117
One lecture and six hours laboratory a week. First
Term.
(b) Quantitative Analysis.—This course embraces the
more important methods of gravimetric and volumetric
analysis.
Text-book: Engelder, Elementary Quantitative Analysis, John Wiley & Sons.
Prerequisite: Chemistry 1.
One lecture and six hours laboratory a week. Second
Term. 3 units.
Course (b) must be preceded by Course (a).
3. Organic Chemistry.—This introduction to the study
of the compounds of carbon will include the methods of
preparation and a description of the more important groups
of compounds in both the aliphatic and the aromatic series.
Chemistry 3 will only be given to those students taking
Chemistry 2, or those who have had the equivalent of
Chemistry 2.
Books recommended: Holleman-Walker, Text-book of
Organic Chemistry, Wiley; Gatterman-Wielands, Laboratory Methods of Organic Chemistry, Macmillan.
Two lectures and three hours laboratory a week. 3 units.
4 (a) Theoretical Chemistry. — An introductory
course in the development of modern theoretical chemistry,
including a study of gases, liquids and solids, solutions, ionization and electrical conductivity, chemical equilibrium,
kinetics of reactions, thermochemistry and thermodynamics, colloids.
Text-book: Millard, Physical Chemistry for Colleges,
McGraw-Hill.
Reference: Noyes and Sherrill, Chemical Principles,
Macmillan.
For laboratory use: Findlay, Practical, Physical, Chemistry, Longmans; and Sherrill, Laboratory Experiments on
Physical Chemical Principles, Macmillan.
Prerequisites: Chemistry 2 (except for students majoring in Physics) and Mathematics 2. Honour students ma- 118 Faculty of Arts and Sceence
joring in Chemistry should take Mathematics 10 concurrently.
Two lectures and three hours laboratory a week. 3 units.
4 (b) This course is the same as Chemistry 4 (a) with
the omission of the laboratory, and is open only to students
not majoring in Chemistry. 2 units.
5 Advanced Qualitative and Quantitative Analysis.
(a) Qualitative Analysis. — The work of this course
will include the detection and separation of the less common metals, particularly those that are important industrially, together with the analysis of somewhat complex
substances occurring in nature.
One lecture and six hours laboratory a week. First
Term.
(b) Quantitative Analysis.—The determinations made
will include the more difficult estimations in the analysis
of rocks, as well as certain constituents of steel and alloys.
The principles on which analytical chemistry is based will
receive a more minute consideration than was possible in
the elementary course.
Prerequisite: Chemistry 2.
One lecture and six hours laboratory a week. Second
Term. 3 units.
6. Industrial Chemistry.—Those industries which are
dependent on the facts and principles of Chemistry will be
considered in as much detail as time will permit. The lectures will be supplemented by visits to manufacturing establishments in the neighbourhood, and it is hoped that
some lectures will be given by specialists in their respective
fields.
Prerequisites: Chemistry 2 and 3.
Two lectures a week. 2 units.
7. Physical Chemistry.—This course is a continuation
of Chemistry 4 and treats in more detail the kinetic theory
of gases, properties of liquids and solids, elementary ther- Chemistry 119
modynamics and thermochemistry, properties of solutions,
theoretical electrochemistry, chemical equilibrium, kinetics
of reactions, radioactivity.
Books recommended: Getman, Outlines of Theoretical
Chemistry, Wiley; Noyes and Sherrill, Chemical Principles,
Macmillan; for Laboratory: Sherrill, Laboratory Experiments on Physico-Chemical Principles, Macmillan; Findlay, Practical Physical Chemistry, Longmans.
Prerequisites: Chemistry 2, 3 and 4.
Two lectures and three hours laboratory a week. 3 units.
8. Electrochemistry.—(a) Solutions are studied from
the standpoint of the osmotic and dissociation theories. The
laws of electrolysis, electroplating, electromotive force,
primary and secondary cells are considered in detail.
Texts: LeBlanc, Elements of Electrochemistry, Macmillan; Creighton-Fink, Theoretical Electrochemistry,
Vol. I, Wiley; Allmand, Applied Electrochemistry, Longmans.
Two lectures and three hours laboratory a week. First
Term. \l/z units.
(b)  As in Applied Science.
9 (a) Advanced Organic Chemistry.—The lectures
will deal with some of the more complex carbon compounds, such as the carbohydrates and their stereochemical
configurations, fats, proteins, ureides and purine derivatives
and enzyme action.
Two lectures and three hours laboratory a week. First
Term. \l/z units.
9 (b) The terpenes and alkaloids will be considered.
The more complicated types of organic reaction and various theoretical conceptions will be presented. In the laboratory some complex compounds will be prepared and
quantitative determinations of carbon, hydrogen, nitrogen,
sulphur and the halogens made. 120 Faculty of Arts and Scdznce
Text: Cohen, Organic Chemistry, Arnold.
Prerequisites: Chemistry 2 and 3.
Two lectures and three hours laboratory a week. Second
Term. 1 Vz units.
10. History of Chemistry.—Particular attention will
be paid to the development of chemical theory.
Text: Moore, History of Chemistry, McGraw-Hill.
Prerequisites: Chemistry 2, 3 and 4.
Two hours a week. Second Term. 1 unit.
11. Physical Organic Chemistry. — Stereochemical
theories will be discussed in greater detail than in Chemistry
9, and chemical and physico-chemical methods employed
in determining the constitution of organic compounds will
be studied. The electronic conception of valency as applied
to organic compounds will be considered, and an outline of
the work done in Electro-Organic Chemistry will be given.
Prerequisites: Chemistry 7 and 9.
One hour a week. 1 unit.
(Given in 1933-34 and alternate years.)
12. Colloid Chemistry.—The chemistry of colloids and
the application of colloidal chemistry to industry.
References: Bogue, Colloidal Behaviour, Vols. I and II,
McGraw-Hill; Freundlich, Colloid Chemistry, Methuen;
Reports on Colloid Chemistry by British Association for
Advancement of Science.
Prerequisites: Chemistry 3 and 4.
Two hours a week. First Term. 1 unit.
(Given in 1933-34 and alternate years.)
17. Chemical Thermodynamics.—Study of first, second and third laws. Derivation of fundamental equations
and application gas laws, chemical equilibrium, theory of
solutions, electro-chemistry and capillarity.
Text-book: Lewis & Randall, Principles of Thermodynamics, McGraw-Hill. Reference: Sackur, Thermochemistry and Thermodynamics, Macmillan. Chemistry 121
Prerequisite: Chemistry 7.
One lecture a week. 1 unit.
(Given in 1933-34 and alternate years.)
18. Advanced Inorganic Chemistry.—A more detailed
treatment of chemistry of the metals than is possible in
Chemistry 1, together with the Chemistry of the Rare Elements.
Prerequisites: Chemistry 2 and 4.
Two lectures a week. Second Term. 1 unit.
(Given in 1934-35 and alternate years.)
19. Biochemistry. — This course will deal with such
topics as, some special applications of colloid chemistry to
Biology, the determination of hydrogen-ion concentration,
the chemical and physical processes involved in the digestion, absorption and assimilation of foodstuffs in the animal
body, the intermediate and ultimate products of metabolism, and nutrition.
Prerequisites: Chemistry 3 and 9 (a). Chemistry 9 (a)
and 19 may, on permission, be taken conjointly.
Two lectures a week. Second Term. 1 unit,
(Given in 1933-34.)
20. Methods in Teaching High School Chemistry.—
This course is offered primarily for students in the Teacher
Training Course and does not carry undergraduate credit.
References: Black and Conant, Practical Chemistry,
The Macmillan Company. Smith's College Chemistry, revised by Kendall, 1929 Edition. The Century Company.
Three lectures a week. First Term.
21. Chemical Kinetics.—The applications of statistical
mechanics to chemical problems, such as the rates of thermal and photo-chemical reactions, and the emission and
absorption of radiation by molecules. The Quantum theory
as applied to molecular processes and band spectra. 122 Faculty of Arts and Science
Reference: Tolman, Statistical Mechanics with Applications to Physics and Chemistry.
Two lectures a week. Second Term. 1 unit.
(Given in 1934-35 and alternate years.)
Department of Classics
Professor: Lemuel Robertson.
Professor: O. J. Todd.
Professor: H. T. Logan.
Greek
A.—Homeric Greek, A Book for Beginners, Clyde
Pharr, Heath.
History. — Robertson and Robertson, The Story of
Greece and Rome, Chap. I-XXXII.
Four hours a week. 3 units.
2. Lectures.—Homer, Iliad I, 304-611 and VI; Plato,
Apology, Adam, Pitt Press.
Composition.—North and Hillard, Greek Prose Composition, Longmans & Green. Selected passages will occasionally be set for Unseen Translation.
Literature.—Norwood, The Writers of Greece.
Four hours a week. 3 units.
3. Lectures.—Thucydides, History, Book VII, Marchant, Macmillan; Sophocles, Antigone, Jebb and Shuckburgh, Cambridge; Euripides, Iphigenia at Aulis, Headlam,
Cambridge.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
(Given in 1934-35 and alternate years.)
5. Lectures.—Homer, Iliad (Selections), Monro, Iliad,
2 Vols., Oxford; Greek Elegiac, Iambic, and Lyric Poets,
Harvard; Demosthenes, Third Olynthiac and Third Philippic, Butcher, Oxford (Vol. I).
Three hours a week. 3 units.
(Given in 1933-34 and alternate years.) Classics 123
6. Lectures.—Herodoti Historice (selections), Hude,
Oxford; Lysice Orationes XVI (selections), Shuckburgh,
Macmillan; Aristophanes, The Birds, Hall and Geldart, Oxford. (Open only to those who have taken or are taking
Greek 3 or 5.)
Three hours a week. 3 units.
(Given in 1934-35 and alternate years.)
7. Lectures.—Aristotle, Ars Poetica, Bywater, Oxford;
Plato, The Republic (Selections), Burnet Oxford. (Open
only to those who have taken or are taking Greek 3 or 5.)
Three hours a week. 3 units.
(Given in 1933-34 and alternate years.)
8. Composition.—Obligatory for Honour students; to
be taken in both Third and Fourth Years. 1 unit.
9. Greek History to 14 A.D.—The course will begin
with a brief survey of contributory civilizations of pre-
Hellenic times and will include a study of social and political life in the Greek world during the period. Knowledge
of Greek is not prerequisite.
Text-books: M. L. W. Laistner, Greek History, Heath;
E. S. Shuckburgh, Greece, Fisher Unwin.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
(Given in 1933-34 and alternate years.)
Latin
1. Lectures. — Cicero, De Senectute, Shuckburgh-
Egbert, Macmillan; A Book of Latin Poetry, Neville, Jol-
liffe, Dale and Breslove, Macmillan.
Composition. — Pilsbury, Latin Prose Composition,
Clarendon Press.
History.—Robertson and Robertson, The Story of
Greece and Rome, Dent, Chap. I to XXXII.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
2. (a) Lectures.—A Book of Latin Poetry, Macmillan;
Cicero, Pro Archia, Nail, Macmillan; Horace, Odes III,
Page, Macmillan. 124 Faculty of Arts and Science
History.—Robertson and Robertson, The Story of
Greece and Rome, Dent, Chap. XXXII-LIV.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
2. (b) Lectures.—Cicero, Pro Archia, Nail, Macmillan;
A Book of Latin Poetry, Macmillan.
History.—Robertson and Robertson, The Story of
Greece and Rome, Dent, Chap. XXXII-LIV.
Literature.—Duff, Writers of Rome, Oxford.
Composition. — Pilsbury, Latin Prose Composition,
Clarendon Press.
All students are expected to provide themselves with
Allen and Greenough New Latin Grammar.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
2 (a) and 2 (b) are alternate courses; students intending to read for Honours in the Third and Fourth Years are
expected, and students intending to offer Latin as a subject
in the Education course, are advised to take Latin 2 (b).
3. Lectures.—Terence, Phormio, Bond and Walpole,
Macmillan; Virgil, Bucolics and Georgics, Page, Macmillan.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
(Given in 1934-35 and alternate years.)
4. Lectures.—Tacitus, Histories, I, II, Godley, Macmillan; Horace, Epistles, Wilkins, Macmillan.
Literature.—Duff, Writers of Rome, Oxford.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
(Given in 1933-34 and alternate years.)
5. Lectures.—Juvenal, Satires, Duff, Cambridge; Seneca, Select Letters, Summers, Macmillan.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
(Given in 1934-35 and alternate years.)
6. Lectures.—Avery, Latin Prose Literature, Little,
Brown & Co.; Garrod, Oxford Book of Latin Verse (selections) , Oxford.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
(Given in 1933-34 and alternate years.) Economics 125
7. Lectures.—Roman History from 133 B.C. to 180
A.D.
Text-books: A Short History of the Roman Republic,
Heitland, Cambridge; A Short History of the Roman Empire, Wells and Barrow, Methuen.
A knowledge of Latin is not prerequisite for this course.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
(Given in 1934-35 and alternate years.)
8. Composition.—Obligatory for Honour students; to
be taken in both Third and Fourth Years.
One lecture a week; individual conferences at the pleasure of the instructor. 1 unit.
9. Methods of High School Latin. Spring term only.
This course is offered primarily for students in the Teacher
Training Course, and does not carry undergraduate credit.
Readings to be assigned.
Three hours a week, i
Department of Economics, Political Science,
Commerce and Sociology
Professor: H. F. Angus.
Professor: W. A. Carrothers.
Associate Professor: J. Friend Day.
Associate Professor: C W. Topping.
Assistant Professor: G. F. Drummond.
Lecturer in Accountancy: Frederick Field.
Honorary Lecturers:
J. Howard T. Falk.
Laura Holland, Cert. School of Social Work (Simmons College),
Part-time lecturer (Social Service Course).
Mary McPhedran, Diploma, Social Service Department (Toronto),
Part-time lecturer (Social Service Course).
Edna Pearce, B.S. (Knox, Illinois), Supervisor of Field Work,
(Social Service Course).
Economics
1. Principles of Economics.—An introductory study of
general economic theory, including a survey of the prin- 126 Faculty of Arts and Science
ciples of value, prices, money and banking, international
trade, tariffs, monopoly, taxation, labour and wages, socialism, the control of railways and trusts, etc.
Deibler, Principles of Economics, McGraw-Hill; Cole,
Intelligent Man's Guide Through World Chaos, Ryerson;
The Canada Year Book, 1933.
Additional readings will be assigned for students offering this course for credit in the Third or Fourth Year.
Economics 1 is the prerequisite for all other courses in
this department, but may be taken concurrently with Economics 2, with Sociology 1, or with Government 1.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
2. Economic History.—A survey of the factors of economic significance from earliest recorded times, leading to
consideration of the more important phases of European
organisation, with special reference to the Industrial Revolution, the progress of agriculture, and resultant social conditions.
Knight, Barnes and Flugel, Economic History of Europe,
Houghton Mifflin; Toynbee, Industrial Revolution, Longman; Knowles, Industrial and Commercial Revolutions,
Dutton; and assigned readings.
Three hours a week. Mr. Day. 3 units.
3. Labour Problems and Social Reform.—A study of
the rise of the factory system and capitalistic production,
and of the more important phases of trade unionism in England, Canada and the United States. A critical analysis of
various solutions of the labour problem attempted and proposed; profit-sharing, co-operation, arbitration and conciliation, scientific management, labour legislation and
socialism.
Patterson, Social Aspects of Industry, McGraw-Hill;
Simkhovitch, Marxism versus Socialism, Williams & Nor-
gate; and assigned readings.   Beveridge, Unemployment,
Longmans. Three hours a week. Mr. Carrothers.  3 units.
(Given in 1933-34 and alternate years.) Economics 127
4. Money and Banking.—The origin and development
of money. Banking principles and operations, laws of coinage, credit, price movements, foreign exchange. Banking
policy in the leading countries, with particular reference to
Canada.
Kilborne, Principles of Money and Banking, McGraw-
Hill; Edie, Money, Bank Credit and Prices, Harpers; and
assigned readings.
Three hours a week. Mr. Carrothers. 3 units.
5. Government Finance.—An outline course dealing
with the principles and methods of taxation, and administration of public funds. Topics examined include: Growth
of taxation methods; theories of justice in taxation; classification, increase, economic effects and control of expenditures; property, business, personal, commodity and inheritance taxes, with reference to Canada, Britain and other
countries; the single tax; double taxation; shifting, incidence and economic effects of taxation; flotation, administration, conversion and redemption of government loans.
Assigned readings.
Three hours a week. Mr. Carrothers. 3 units.
(Given in 1934-35 and alternate years.)
6. International Trade and Tariff Policy.—A survey of
the theory of international trade and the foreign exchanges;
the balance of trade, foreign investments and other fundamental factors; the problem of Reparations and of War
Debts; the protective tariff and commercial imperialism;
the commercial policy of the leading countries, with considerable attention to Canada.
Taussig, International Trade, Macmillan; Griffin, Principles of Foreign Trade, Macmillan; Taussig, Selected Readings in International Trade and Tariff Problems, Ginn; and
assigned readings.
Three hours a week. Mr. Drummond. 3 units.
7. Corporation Economics.—Historical development
of the different forms of industrial organization, including 128 Faculty of Arts and Science
the partnership, joint stock company and the corporation,
and the later developments, such as the pool, trust, combination and holding company. Methods of promotion and financing, over-capitalization, stock market activities, the
public policy toward corporations, etc.
Readings to be assigned.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
(Not given in 1933-34.)
9. History of Economic Thought.—A study of the development of modern economic theory, with special reference to the Mercantilists; the Physiocrats; Adam Smith;
the Classical School and its critics; the Historical School;
Jevons and Austrian School; Marshall; together with a
study of recent trends in economic thought.
Texts.—Gide and Rist, History of Economic Doctrines,
Harrap; Cannan, Review of Economic Theory, King;
Homan, Contemporary Economic Thought, Harpers;
Gray, Development of Economic Doctrine, Longmans; and
selected readings.
Three hours a week. Mr. Carrothers. 3 units.
(This may be made a Reading Course in 1933-34.)
10. Economic Geography (formerly Geography 5).—
A general survey of the principal resources and industries
of the world, with emphasis on those entering into international trade, leading to a study of the principles and
problems of transportation by sea.
MacFarlane, Economic Geography, latest edition, Pitman; and assigned readings.
Three hours a week. Mr. Day. 3 units.
11. Transportation.—A comprehensive study of the
fundamentals of railroad development and organisation,
with the legal and economic problems involved; theory and
practice of rate-making; discriminations; factors in public
control; etc.
Acworth, Elements of Railway Economics, Clarendon
Press, Oxford; Jackman, Economics of Transportation, Economics 129
University of Toronto Press; and assigned readings.
(Not given in 1933-34.)
Three hours a week. 3 units.
12. Statistics 1.—Statistical methods in relation to economic and social investigations. Statistical groups; types
of average. Statistical series in time; trend and fluctuation.
Index numbers. Methods of measuring correlation. Elementary probabilities and the normal curve of error. Problem of sampling.
Mills, F. C, Statistical Methods; Mills, F. C, and Davenport, D. H., A Manual of Problems and Tables in Statistics,
Henry Holt and Company.
Prerequisite: Mathematics 3.    fc
One lecture and two hours laboratory a week.   3 units.
13. Statistics 2.—This course is a continuation of Statistics 1, and aims at giving an understanding of statistical
technique in its application to problems of business and
economic research. It involves a study of more advanced
methods of correlation analysis, cyclical fluctuations and
business forecasting. In addition to covering a wide course
of reading, students will be required to construct tables,
diagrams, etc., based on original data (official or private)
of the statistics of trade, production, sales, prices, wages,
etc., and to write reports and precis.
Texts: Ezekiel, Methods of Correlation Analysis, John
Wiley & Sons; Riggleman and Frisbee, Business Statistics,
McGraw-Hill; Haney, Business Forecasting, Ginn & Co.;
Persons, The Problem of Business Forecasting, Houghton,
Mifflin; Warren-Pearson, Prices, Wiley.
Brown, Bingham and Temnomeroff, Laboratory Hand
Book of Statistical Methods, McGraw-Hill.
Mills, Economic Tendencies in the United States, National Bureau of Economic Research.
Assigned readings.
Three hours a week. Mr. Drummond. 3 units. 130 Faculty of Arts and Scdence
Courses Open Only to Candidates for the Degree
of B.Com.
14. Accountancy 1.—An introductory course to give a
broad perspective of accounting principles and methods,
and to promote an intelligent appreciation of business transactions in their relation to the balance sheet and income
account.
Kester, Accounting Theory and Practice, Vol II, Ronald
Press; and assigned readings.
Prerequisites: Economics 2, Economics 10, Mathematics 3.
Three hours a week. Mr. Day. ^ 3 units.
15. Accountancy 2.—More advanced work in connection with the accounting and financial problems of corporations, including liquidations and consolidations, and the
miscellaneous details connected therewith.
Prerequisite: Accountancy 1.
Three hours a week. Mr. Field. 3 units.
16. Accountancy 3.—A study of the principles involved in cost accounting, including the practical working
through a model set of accounts and a consideration of the
managerial use of cost records.
Prerequisite: Accountancy 1.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
(Not given in 1933-34.)
17. Commercial Law 1.—The formation, operation,
construction and discharge of contracts; bills of exchange,
promissory notes and cheques; company law; principal and
agent; the Bank Act; sales of goods.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
(Not given in 1933-34.)
18. Commercial Law 2.—Bankruptcy; mortgages and
liens; trusts; partnership; certain principles in the law of
real property and landlord and tenant.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
SB Economics 131
19. Marketing and Problems in Sales Management.—
A detailed study of marketing functions, leading up to the
analysis of problems which have to be solved by sales executives.       Three hours a week. Mr. Day. 3 units.
(Given in 1934-35 and alternate years.)
Agricultural Economics
1. Agricultural Economics.—The principles of Economics as applied to Agriculture; historical background, the
agricultural problem; and some special topics, such as the
agricultural surplus, production in relation to population
growth, the farm income and the share of Agriculture in
the national income.
Taylor, Agricultural Economics, Macmillan.
References and assigned readings from Gray, Carver,
Nourse and others.
Three lectures a week. Mr. Clement. 3 units.
2. Marketing.—The principles of Marketing as applied
to the individual farm and to Agriculture as a whole. The
general principles of Marketing, the marketing of agricultural products as compared to wholesale and retail distribution of manufactured goods, the contributions of national
Farmer Movements, co-operative marketing as illustrated
by the marketing of wheat, fruit and milk in Canada.
Hibbard, Marketing Agricultural Products, Appleton;
Mackintosh, Agricultural Co-operation in Western Canada,
Ryerson Press, Toronto; references and assigned readings
from Macklin, Boyle, Benton, Black, Patton and others.
Three lectures a week. Mr. Clement. 3 units.
Government
1. Constitutional Government.—This course deals with
the nature, origin and aims of the State; and with the organization of government in the British Empire, the United
States of America, France and Germany.
Readings to be assigned.
Three hours a week. Mr. Angus. 3 units. 132 Faculty of Arts and Science
2. Introduction to the Study of Law.—(a) A rapid survey of Legal History,  (b) Outlines of Jurisprudence.
Readings to be assigned.
Three hours a weejk. Mr. Angus. 3 units.
3. Imperial Problems.—A course on problems of government within the British Empire.
Readings to be assigned.
Three hours a week. Mr. Angus. 3 units.
(Not given in 1933-34.)
4. Problems of the Pacific.—A course on the problems
of the Pacific Area discussed at the Conference of the Institute of Pacific Relations in 1933. Each problem will be
related to its economic and political background.
Readings to be assigned.
Three hours a week. Mr. Angus. 3 units.
(Given in 1933-34 and alternate years)
Sociology
1. Principles of Sociology.—The approach to the study
of society is by way of the local community and its institutions. An evaluation of the importance of the geographic,
the biological, the psychological and the cultural factors in
the determination of the rise, growth and functioning of
groups will be undertaken. There will be an attempt to
discover fundamental principles and to trace these principles in their interrelationships. Several of the problems
resulting from group contacts will be studied.
Texts: Dawson-Gettys, Introduction to Sociology,
Ronald; Lumley, Principles of Sociology, McGraw-Hill.
The rule that Economics 1 must be taken prior to this
course or concurrently with it may be waived in the case
of students in Nursing.
Three hours a week. Mr. Topping. 3 units.
2. Social Origins and Development.—The different
views relating to the origin and evolution of human society;
the geographic factor and economic methods in their bear- Economics 133
ing upon social life; primitive mental attitudes; the development of ethical, etc., ideas among primitive peoples;
primitive institutions, tools, art and their modern forms;
the growth of cardinal social ideas through the ancient and
classical period to the present time.
Text: Wallis, Introduction to Anthropology, Harper.
Three hours a week. Mr. Topping. 3 units.
(Not given in 1933-34.)
3. The Urban Community.—The structural characteristics of the modern city will be outlined and the sociological
significance of the functions performed by its inhabitants
discussed. A factual study will be made of urban personalities, groups and cultural patterns. Methods of urban social
control will be investigated and solutions for urban problems will be evaluated.
Text: Anderson, Lindeman, Urban Sociology, Knopf,
1928.
Three hours a week. Mr. Topping. 3 units.
(Not given in 1933-34.)
Courses Open Only to Candidates for the Diploma
4 of Social Service
Note: A student must be of the full age of Twenty-
one years for admission to any of these courses.
1. Introduction to Social Service.—An introductory
course in which is presented a general view of the entire field
of social service as illustrated by its present scope and
methods.
Two hours a week. Mr. Topping. 2 units.
2. Social Organization and Case Work Methods.—An
introductory course in which the general principles of the
social treatment of unadjusted individuals and disorganized
families are elucidated.
One hour a week. Miss McPhedran. 1 unit. 134 Faculty of Arts and Science
3. Child Welfare.—An introductory course in which
methods of caring for dependent, neglected, and delinquent
children are presented and discussed.
One hour a week. Miss Holland. 1 unit.
4. Personal Hygiene.—An introductory course in which
basic facts concerning physiological processes, infection,
immunity and the more common diseases, as related to the
task of the social worker, are presented.
One hour a week. Miss Kerr. 1 unit.
5. Case Work Methods.—Selected case records which
present complex or difficult situations are studied with a
view to determining the principles of diagnosis and treatment involved.
One hour a week. Miss McPhedran. 1 unit.
6. Child Welfare Case Studies.—An intensive study of
the records of a child welfare organization will be undertaken. Field work to supplement the lectures is arranged for
in a child welfare agency.
One hour a week. Miss Collins. 1 unit.
7. Group Work.—The principles underlying community organization and group organization are established by
a study of case records and through the working out of
projects. Field work is arranged to supplement the lectures
and discussions.
One hour a week. Miss Pearce. 1 unit.
8. Public Health.—Such an understanding of the work
of the chief public and private health agencies will be given
as will encourage intelligent co-operation on the part of the
social worker with these agencies.
One hour a week. 1 unit.
9 and 10. Field Work Seminar.—The problems met by
the students in connection with field work are discussed as
well as certain other selected problems. The object of the
seminar is to unify and integrate the whole course. Education 135
One hour a week. Mr. Topping, Miss Pearce.
1 unit each session.
11. Administration.—One hour a week. Mr. Falk.
1 unit.
Department of Education
Professor: G. M. Weir.
Associate Professor: Jennie Wyman Pilcher.
Associate Professor: W. G. Black.
Special Lecturer: H. T. J. Coleman.
Instructor in Physical Education:
Lecturers in High School Methods: The following professors: R.
H. Clark, A. C. Cooke, J. G. Davidson, Janet T. Greig, A. H.
Hutchinson, L. Richardson, L. Robertson, G. G. Sedgewick.
Lecturers in Elementary School Methods: 	
Lecturer in Junior High School Organization and Administration:
Undergraduates who intend to register in the Teacher
Training Course are advised to take at least three units in
Education for credit towards the B.A. degree.
1. Introduction to the Study of Education, -r— This
course is intended to serve as a broad preparation for subsequent graduate courses. The following topics will be studied: The needs of society and of the individual; general and
specific objectives of education; educative agencies; the institutions of our public school system; school law; school
finance; school sites and buildings; administration and supervision of schools; problems of classification and promotion; school curricula; educational and vocational guidance; special rural and urban problems; some famous experimental schools; the development of the science of
education; opportunities in the field of education.
Text-books: Cubberley, Introduction to the Study of
Education (Rev. Ed.), Houghton Mifflin; Douglass, Secondary Education, Houghton Mifflin. 3 units.
2. Elementary Educational Psychology. — An introductory study of the science of psychology as applied to 136 Faculty of Arts and Science
education; inherited human characteristics; motivation;
individual differences; adaptation to environment; control
of environment; types of learning; efficiency in learning;
the laws underlying certain accepted methods of teaching;
discipline; intelligent behaviour; habits and their development; transfer of training; infancy, childhood, and adolescence; character and personality; educational psychology
as a science; important books, magazines, and year books.
Text-books: Sandiford, Educational Psychology, Longmans Green; Brooks, Psychology of Adolescence, Houghton Mifflin; Mueller, Teaching in Secondary Schools, Century Co. 3 units.
3. History and Principles of Education.—The meaning
and philosophic basis of education will be approached
through a study of the educational theories, practices, and
institutions of the classical, mediaeval, and modern periods.
Special attention will be given to developments in education during the Nineteenth and Twentieth Centuries in
Canada, United States, Great Britain, France, and Germany.
Text-book: Kandel, History of Secondary Education,
Houghton Mifflin. 3 units.
(Not offered in 1933-34.)
Note:—Courses in Education for undergraduates in
Arts of the Third and Fourth Years are preparatory to the
Teacher Training Course, and do not exempt candidates
from any of the work prescribed for the latter course.
Courses Open Only to Students in the
Teacher Training Course
A. Courses given throughout the University Session:
(1)  Educational Psychology.
Texts: Gates, Psychology for Students of Education,
(Revised Edition), Macmillan.
Prerequisite: Philosophy 1 (a). Education 137
(2) School Administration and Law.
Texts: Douglass, Organization and Administration of
Secondary Schools, Ginn & Co. (Selected Chapters); School
Law of British Columbia; Report of the School Survey
Commission of British Columbia; Koos, The Junior High
School, Ginn & Co.
N.B.:—A list of references will be provided at the opening of the Session.
(3) History and Principles of Education.
(a) A study of educational leaders and movements
and of school practices, with special attention
to the period since 1800.
(b) Modern educational systems: Canada, with
special reference to British Columbia; England;
France; Germany; the United States.
Text books: Cubberley, A Brief History of Education,
Houghton Mifflin; Kandel, Comparative Education,
Houghton Mifflin.
(4) Interpretation and Construction of Educational
Tests and Measurements.
The above courses are obligatory for all students.
B. Courses given during the First Term only:
(1) Psychology of Elementary Education.
Texts: Reed, Psychology of Elementary Education,
Ginn & Co.; Dolch, The Psychology and Teaching of Reading, Ginn & Co.
N.B.:—A list of references will be provided at the opening of the Session.
(Obligatory for all students.)
(2) Methods in Elementary School Subjects: Art, Music, Writing, Primary Grade Activities.
Assigned reading.
One hour a week for each of these methods courses. 138 Faculty of Arts and Science
(3) Junior High School Organization and Administration.
Assigned readings.
Three hours a week.
(Candidates will select at least three hours of work a
week from (2) and (3) above.)
C. Courses given during the Second Term only:
(1) Methods in High School Subjects.
Texts: Judd, Psychology of Secondary Education, Ginn
& Co.; Douglass, Modern Methods in High School Teaching, Houghton Mifflin.
(2) Methods courses in the following high school subjects are offered: English, History, Latin, French, Mathematics, Biology, Physics, Chemistry, Art, Physical Education. Two courses are obligatory (for teaching and examination purposes), while one course may be attended as an
auditor. Nine hours a week.
D. Observation Assignments and Practice Teaching.
(1) First Term: At least forty (40) hours in the elementary schools of the Province. Obligatory for
all students.
( 2) Second Term: At least sixty ( 60) hours in the high
schools of the Province. Obligatory for all students.
Department of English
Professor: G. G. Sedgewick.
Porfessor: W. L. MacDonald.
Associate Professor: F. G. C. Wood.
Associate Professor: Thorleif Larsen.
Associate Professor: F. C. Walker.
Assistant Professor: M. L. Bollert.
Assistant Professor: H. C. Lewis.
First Year
1.  (a)  Literature.—Elementary study of a number of English 139
literary forms to be chosen from the short story, the play,
the novel, the essay, the simpler sorts of poetry.
Texts for 1933-34: Bates, Twentieth Century Short
Stories, Houghton Mifflin. Euripides, Bacchae, in Gilbert
Murray's paraphrase. Shakespeare, Julius Caesar. Sheridan,
The School for Scandal, Everyman. Ibsen, The Doll's
House, Everyman. Monro, Twentieth Century Poetry,
Chatto and Windus.
Two hours a week.
(b) Composition.—Elementary forms and principles of composition.
Text: Foerster & Steadman, Writing and Thinking,
Houghton Mifflin.
Two hours a week. 3 units.
The work in composition consists of (i) themes and
class exercises, and (ii) of written examinations. Students
will be required to make a passing mark in each of these two
parts of the work. v
Second Year
2. Literature.—Studies in the history of English Literature. ]
Lectures and texts illustrative of the chief authors and
movements from Tottel's Miscellany to Shelley. Reynolds,
English Literature in Fact and Story, The Century Co.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
Thdxd and Fourth Years
9. Shakspere.—This course may be taken for credit
in two successive years. In 1933-34, 9 (a) will be given as
follows:
i. A detailed study of the text of Romeo and Juliet,
Twelfth Night, Hamlet, King Lear, Coriolanus.
ii. Lectures on Shakspere's development, on his use
of sources, and on his relation to the stage and
the dramatic practice of his time. 140 Faculty of Arts and Science
Students will provide themselves with annotated editions of the five plays named above, and with The Facts
About Shakespeare, by Neilson and Thorndike, Macmillan.
They are advised to get the Cambridge Shakespeare, ed.
Neilson, or the Oxford Shakespeare, ed. Craig.
Three hours a week. Mr. Sedgewick. 3 units.
9. (b)   (Given in 1934-35 and alternate years.)
10. The Drama to 1642.—The course begins with a
study of the Theban plays of Sophocles and of Aristotle's
Theory of Tragedy. The main subject of the course is Elizabethan Drama: (1) its beginnings in the Miracle and Morality Plays and in the Interludes; (2) its development in
Shakespeare's predecessors—Lyly, Peele, Greene, Kyd and
Marlowe; (3) its culmination in Shakespeare; (4) and its
decline in Jonson, Beaumont and Fletcher, Middleton,
Webster, Massinger, Shirley and Ford.
Texts: Lewis Campbell, Sophocles in English Verse,
World's Classics, Oxford; Everyman and Other Interludes,
Dent; Chief Elizabethan Dramatists, ed. Neilson, Houghton Mifflin; Shakespeare, ed. Craig, Oxford or the Cambridge Shakespeare, ed. Neilson, Houghton Mifflin.
Three hours a week. Mr. Larsen. 3 units,
13. The English Novel from Richardson to the present
Time.—The development of English fiction will be traced
from Richardson, Fielding, Smollett, and Sterne through
Goldsmith, Mrs. Radcliffe, Jane Austen, Scott, C. Bronte,
Dickens, Thackeray, and George Eliot to Trollope, Meredith, Stevenson, Hardy and a few representative novelists
now living.
A fair knowledge of the works of Jane Austen, Scott,
Dickens, Thackeray and George Eliot is a prerequisite for
those taking this course.
Three hours a week. Mr. Wood. 3 units
14. Eighteenth Century Literature.—This course aims
to give a view, as comprehensive as possible, of the main English 141
currents of English thought and literature during the period 1660-1800. It is mainly concerned with the work of
such men as Dryden, Pope, Swift, Addison, Steele, Johnson,
Goldsmith, Burke and Burns.
Three hours a week. Mr. MacDonald. 3 units.
16. Romantic Poetry, 1780-1830.—Studies in the beginnings and progress of Romanticism, based chiefly on the
work of Wordsworth, Coleridge, Byron, Keats, Shelley,
Scott.
Text: Bernbaum, Guide Through the Romantic Movement.
For reference: Elton, A Survey of English Literature,
1780-1830.
Three hours a week. Mr. Walker. 3 units.'
17. Victorian Poetry.—This course is concerned chiefly
with the work of Tennyson, Browning, and Arnold. A
few weeks at the close of the term will be devoted to a survey of the development of later poetry.
Texts: Browning, Complete Poetical Works, Cambridge Edition; Arnold, Poems, Oxford Edition; Tennyson,
Poems, Globe Edition; Pierce, Century Readings in the
Nineteenth Century Poets, The Century Co.
For reference: Elton, A Survey of English Literature,
1830-1880.
Three hours a week. Mr. Sedgewick. 3 units.
19. Contemporary Literature.— Some tendencies of
English Literature of the present generation, in poetry and
the essay and the novel, will be studied in this course.
Texts: Brown, Essays of Our Times, Scott, Foresman
Company; Sanders and Nelson, Chief Modern Poets, Macmillan Company. Three novels, to be assigned.
Students intending to take this course should secure
copies of the list for summer reading, from the Registrar's
office, as soon as possible.   If they desire, students can ar- 142 Faculty of Arts and Science
range with the Library to have books sent to them during
the Summer vacation.
Three hours a week. Mr. Lewis. 3 units.
25 (a) Private Reading.—Students who are candidates
for an Honours degree in English may elect a course of
private reading in their Third Year. 3 units.
25 (b) Private Reading.—Students of the Fourth Year
may pursue, with the consent and under the direction of
the Department, a course of private reading. 3 units.
In such courses examinations will be set, but no class
instruction will be given.
20. Chaucer and Middle English.—(a) Middle English grammar with the reading of representative texts, (b)
The Canterbury Tales.
Texts: A Middle English reader; The Oxford Chaucer,
ed. Skeat; Manly, The Canterbury Tales, Holt.
Three hours a week. Mr. Sedgewick. 3 units.
(Given in 1934-35 and alternate years.)
21a. Anglo-Saxon.—Moore & Knott, The Elements of
Old English, George Wahr; Bright, Anglo-Saxon Reader,
Holt.
Two hours a week. Mr. Walker. 2 units.
21b. Anglo-Saxon.—Beowulf.
Two hours a week. Second Term. Mr. Walker. 1 unit.
22. Studies in Linguistic History.—Origins, growth,
and development of the English language. A brief introduction to Germanic philology; the Indo-European language group; Grimm's Law; the Anglo-Saxon period;
Norman, French, and Latin influences; study of the gradual evolution of forms, sounds and meanings.
Two hours a week. First Term. Mr. Walker.     1 unit.
24. Seminar.—In this class advanced students will get
practice in some of the simpler methods of criticism and in- Geology 143
vestigation. The subject for 1933-34 will be announced at
the beginning of the session.
Two hours a week. Mr. Sedgewick. 2 units.
Teacher Training Course
26. Methods in High School English.—This course does
not carry undergraduate credit.
Three hours a week. Second Term. Mr. Sedgewick.
Department of Geology and Geography
Professor: R. W. Brock.
Professor of Physical and Structural Geology: S. J. Schofield.
Professor of Palaentology and Stratigraphy: M. Y. Williams.
Associate Professor of Mineralogy and Petrology: T. C. Phemister.
Lecturer: Victor Dolmage.
Lecturer in Mineralogy and Petrology: Harry Warren.
Geology
1. General Geology.—This course serves as an introduction to the science of Geology. The following subjects are
treated in the lectures and laboratory.
(a) Physical Geology, including weathering, the work
of the wind, ground water, streams, glaciers, the ocean and
its work, the structure of the earth, earthquakes, volcanoes,
and igneous intrusions, metamorphism, mountains and
plateaus and ore deposits.
Two lectures a week. First Term. Mr. Williams.
(b) Laboratory Exercises in Physical Geology, include
the study and identification of the most common minerals
and rocks, the interpretation of topographical and geological maps, and the study of structures by the use of models.
Two hours laboratory a week. Mr. Schofield and Mr.
Williams.
(c) Historical Geology, including the earth before the
Cambrian, the Palaeozoic, the Mesozoic, the Cenozoic and
Quaternary eras.
Two lectures a week.  Second Term. Mr. Williams. 144 Faculty of Arts and Science
(d) Laboratory Exercises in Historical Geology, consist of the general study of fossils, their characteristics and
associations, their evolution and migration as illustrated by
their occurrence in the strata. The principles of Palaeogeography are taken up and illustrated by the study of
palaeogeography of North America.
Two hours laboratory a week. Second Term. Mr. Williams.
Field Work will replace laboratory occasionally, and
will take the form of excursions to localities, in the immediate neighborhood of Vancouver, which illustrate the subject matter of the lectures.
Prerequisite: Matriculation Chemistry or Physics, or
Chemistry 1 or Physics 1, taken either before or concurrently.
Text-book: Pirsson and Schubert, Foundations of
Geology, Wiley.
Students will be required to make a passing mark in
each of the above subdivisions. 3 units.
2. (*) General Mineralogy. — A brief survey of the
field of Mineralogy.
Lectures take the form of a concise treatment of (1)
Crystallography, (2) Physical Mineralogy, and (3) Descriptive Mineralogy of 40 of the most common mineral
species, with special reference to Canadian occurrences.
Laboratory Work consists of the study of the common
crystal forms and of 40 prescribed minerals, accompanied
by a brief outline of the principles and methods of Determinative Mineralogy and Blowpipe Analysis.
Text-book: Dana, Text-book of Mineralogy, revised by
Ford, Wiley.
Prerequisite: Chemistry 1.
Two lectures and two hours laboratory a week. First
Term. Mr. Phemister. 1 l/z units. Geology 145
2. (b) Descriptive and Determinative Mineralogy.—
This course supplements 2 (a) and consists of a more complete survey of Crystallography, Physical and Chemical
Mnieralogy, with a critical study of about 50 of the less
common minerals, special emphasis being laid on their crystallography, origin, association and alteration.
Text-book: Dana, Text-book of Mineralogy, revised bv
Ford, Wiley.
Prerequisite: Geology 2(a).
Two lectures and two hours laboratory a week. Second
Term. Mr. Phemister. 11/2 units.
4. Structural and Physiographical Geology.—The following subjects are treated in the lectures: Fractures, faults,
flowage, structures common to both fracture and flow,
mountains, major units of structure, forces of deformation, the origin and development of land forms with special
reference to the physiography of British Columbia.
Text-book: Leith, Structural Geology, 2nd Ed., Holt.
Prerequisite: Geology 1.
Three hours a week. Mr. Schofield. 3 units.
5. (a) History of Geology.—A brief history of the
study of the earth and the development of the geological
sciences. Mr. Brock.
(b) Geology of Canada.—The salient features of the
geology and economic minerals of Canada. Mr. Williams,
Mr. Schofield, Mr. Brock.
(c) Regional Geology.—The main geological features
of the continents and oceanic segments of the earth's crust,
and their influences upon life. Mr. Brock.
Prerequisite: Geology 1.
Three lectures and one hour laboratory a week. 3 units.
6. Palaeontology.—A study of invertebrate and vertebrate fossils, their classification, identification and distribution, both geological and geographical. 146 Faculty of Arts and Science
Reference books: Grabau and Shimer, North America
Index Fossils; Zittel-Eastman, Text-book of Palaeontology.
Prerequisite: Geology 1.
Two lectures and two hours laboratory a week. Mr.
Williams. 3 units.
7. Petrology.—This course consists of systematic studies of (i) optical mineralogy and (ii) petrography, with an
introduction to petrogenesis.
The laboratory work deals with the determination of
rocks, first under the microscope and then in hand specimen.
Text-books: Harker, Petrology for Students, Cambridge University Press; Johannsen, Essentials for the Microscopical Determination of Rock-forming Minerals and
Rocks, University of Chicago Press; Dana, Text-book of
Mineralogy, revised by Ford, Wiley.
Prerequisites: Geology 1 and 2.
Two lectures and two laboratory periods of 2 hours a
week. Mr. Phemister. 4 units.
8. Economic Geology.—A study of the occurrence,
genesis, and structure of the principal metallic and non-
metallic mineral deposits with type illustrations; and a description of the ore deposits of the British Empire, special
stress being placed on those in Canada.
Text-book: Ries, Economic Geology (6th edition),
Wiley.
Prerequisite: Geology 1. Geology 7 must precede or accompany this course.
Four hours a week. Mr. Brock, Mr. Williams, Mr. Schofield, Mr. Phemister. 4 units.
9. Mineralography.—Principally a laboratory course
dealing with the study and recognition of the opaque minerals by means of the reflecting microscope.
The work consists of practice in cutting, grinding and
polishing of ore specimens, accompanied by training in
microchemical methods of mineral determination. Geology 147
During the second term each student is assigned a suite
of ores from some mining district for a critical examination
and report.
Text-book: Davy and Farnham, Microscopic Examination of the Ore Minerals, McGraw-Hill.
Prerequisite: Geology 7 and 8 must precede or accompany this course.
Two hours laboratory a week. Mr. Schofield and Mr.
Phemister. 1 unit.
10. Field Geology.—The methods taught are the fundamental ones used by professional geologists and by the
officers of the Geological Survey of Canada. The course is
essentially practical, and is designed to teach methods of
observing, recording and correlating geological facts in the
field. The students construct geological maps of selected
areas in the vicinity of Vancouver which require the use of
the various methods and instruments employed in field
geology.
Text-books: Lahee, Field Geology; Hayes, Handbook
for Field Geologists; Spurr, Geology Applied to Mining.
Prerequisite: Geology 1. Geology 4, if not already
taken, must be taken concurrently.
Three hours a week. Mr. Schofield. 3 units.
12. Meteorology and Climatology.—A course covering
in a general way the whole field, with practice in using instruments, constructing and using weather charts, and
weather predicting.
Two lectures and one laboratory period of two hours a
week. Second Term. Mr. Schofield. 11/2 units.
14. Crystallography.—This course consists of a systematic study of the morphology of crystals, with an introduction to mathematical crystallography.
The practical work deals, with the measurement of
crystals and, in the case of students in chemistry, a certain 148 Faculty of Arts and Science
number of the crystals measured will be grown in the laboratory.
Students are advised to consult with the instructor before registering for this course.
Text-book: Tutton, Crystallography and Practical
Crystal Measurement, Macmillan.
Two lectures and six or eight hours laboratory work a
week. Mr. Phemister.
5 or 6 units, dependent on amount of laboratory work.
Geography
1. Principles of Geography.—This introductory course
aims to develop in the student the point of view of modern
geography and to furnish a foundation or background that
will be useful not alone to those who may intend to continue a study of geography or to teach it in the schools but
also to those who intend to study history, economics and
other subjects, or to enter business or professional careers,
into which geographical considerations enter.
Since geography is a study of the surface of the earth
and its relation to life, particularly to human life, physical
geography (fairly well covered by the prescribed textbook) must be mastered. The second fundamental is a
study of man, to which the lectures are to a large extent
devoted. The characteristics of man and the influence of
geographical environment are most easily discerned in
primitive societies; consequently these are examined in
some detail. From these as a starting point the relationships between man and his environment in complex western civilization is investigated.
A knowledge of the main facts in the geography of
Canada is assumed so that if the student is not already familiar with them he must become so by private study, for
he is expected to be able to give the principles brought out
in class work Canadian applications and to be able to furnish Canadian illustrations. History 149
Text-book: Peattie, New College Geography, Ginn &
Co.
An Atlas—failing a large comprehensive atlas, one of
following cheap ones will serve: Philip's Senior School Atlas,
Geo. Philip & Son; Canadian School Atlas, J. M. Dent;
Goode's School Atlas, Rand McNally Co.
Three hours a week. Mr. Brock. 3 units.
Department of History
Professor: W. N. Sage.
Associate Professor: F. H. Soward.
Assistant Professor: A. C. Cooke.
Students who intend to specialize in History are advised
to study one or more modern languages. A reading knowledge of at least one foreign language will be required for
Honours.
First and Second Years
1. Main Currents in Modern History.—Intended primarily for First Year students and dealing with the following subjects: The waning of the Middle Ages; Consolidation
of Monarchy in France, Spain and England; the Peace of
Westphalia and the Emergence of the European States System; the Balance of Power; Rise of Russia and Prussia; the
Revolutionary and Napoleonic Era; the Industrial Revolution; Growth of Democracy and Nationality; the Eastern
Question; Expansion of Europe; the Awakening of the Far
East; Armed Peace (1870-1914); World War; the Russian
Revolution; the League of Nations and Post-war Problems.
Text-books: Hyma, Europe from the Renaissance to
1815; Higby, History of Europe (1492-1815); Schapiro,
Modern and Contemporary European History.
Essays will be assigned throughout the session.
Three hours a week. Mr. Soward. 3 units.
2. (a) Outlines of Canadian History—Geographical
factors; exploration and early settlements; political and
constitutional development to Confederation; economic 150 Faculty of Arts and Scence
and social history; The Dominion of Canada since 1867;
Canada in the Empire; Canada in the world.
(b) The History of British Columbia.—Early explorations, Spanish, Russian and British; Maritime fur-trade;
overland fur-trade; the North West Company; The Hudson's Bay Company in Old Oregon; the Colonial Period;
Confederation; the Province of British Columbia.
Text-books: Lucas and Egerton, A Historical Geography of Canada, Parts I and II; Skelton, The Canadian Dominion; Newbigin, Canada; Wittke, A History of Canada;
Howay, British Columbia, the Making of a Province; Sage,
Sir James Douglas and British Columbia; Sage, Outline of
British Columbia History.
Essays will be assigned throughout the session.
Three hours a week. Mr. Sage. 3 units.
4. Mediaeval History.—A sketch of Mediaeval History
from the Council of Nicaca to the Fall of Constantinople.
The following subjects will be discussed: The triumph of
Christianity; the breakdown of the Western Roman Empire, the Barbarian Invasions; the earlier monastic movements; Mohammed and Islam; the rise of the Papacy; the
Franks and Charlemagne; the struggle between Empire and
Papacy; the Normans in Europe; the Crusades; the Mediaeval Towns; the later monastic movements; the rise of
the Universities; Frederick II; the later Mediaeval Empire;
the national kingdoms in France, Spain and England; the
Turks and the Byzantine Empire.
Text-books: Thompson, History of the Middle Ages;
Munro and Sontag, The Middle Ages.
This course is intended primarily for Second Year Students who hope to specialize in history.
Essays will be assigned throughout the session.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
(Not given in 1933-34.) History 151
Third and Fourth Years
History 10, 11, 12, 13 and 14 are intended for Third
Year students; History 15,19 and 20 for Fourth Year. History 10 must be taken by all candidates for Honours.
All Honours students (whether in History alone or in
a combined course) must take the History Seminars in their
Third and Fourth Years. The Seminar is offered as a training in intensive work and carries no credits.
If the graduating essay be written in History it will
count as 3 units.
10. British History to the Revolution of 1688.—The
geographic factors; Roman Britain; character and institutions of the Anglo-Saxons; relations of Church and State;
the Norman Conquest and the Manorial System; royal supremacy under Normans and Angevins; the Great Charter; the evolution of Parliament; social conditions in the
14th Century; the Lancastrian Experiment; the Tudor
Monarchy and the Middle Class; the National Church;
agrarian and commercial development; struggle between
King and Parliament; the Puritan Rebellion; the Commonwealth; the Restoration and the Revolution.
Text-books: Trevelyan, A History of England; Williamson, The Evolution of England; Davis, England under
the Normans and Angevins; Trevelyan, England under the
Stttarts; Lunt, History of England; Adams and Stephens,
Documents of English Constitutional History.
Essays will be assigned throughout the session.
Three hours a week. Mr. Sage. 3 units.
11. Development of the British Empire and Commonwealth.—The British Empire since the American Revolution; the Old Colonial System; India under this Company;
Colonization of Australia; Dutch and British in South Africa; Responsible Government; Development of the Dominions; Victorian Imperialism; African Colonies and
Protectorates; Indian Nationalism and Reforms; the Dependent Empire and the Government of National Peoples; 152 Faculty of Arts and Science
Mandates; Evolution and Problems of the British Commonwealth of Nations.
Text-books: Robinson, Development of the British Empire; or Muir, Short History of the British Commonwealth,
Vol. II; or Williamson, Short History of British Expansion;
Elliott, The New British Empire.
Essay subjects will be assigned throughout the session.
Three hours a week. Mr. Cooke. 3 units.
12. History of the United States of America.—This
course begins with a sketch of the American colonies at the
outbreak of the Revolution and traces the history of the
United States from the commencement of the War of Independence to the close of the World War.
Text-books: Charles and Mary Beard, The Rise of
American Civilisation; J. T. Adams, The Epic of America;
H. Faulkner, American Economic History; F. J. Turner,
The Frontier in American History.
Essays will be assigned throughout the session.
Three hours a week. Mr. Soward. 3 units.
13. The Age of the Renaissance and Reformation.—
The Cultural Development of Europe from the 14th to the
17th centuries; the transition from the mediaeval to the
modern world; humanism; renaissance art; overseas exploration and expansion; the rise of'modern capitalism and
national states; the Reformation; the counter-Reformation; the scientific revolution and intellectual developments.
Text-books: Hulme, Renaissance and Reformation;
Smith, Age of the Reformation.
Essays will be assigned throughout the session.
Three hours a week. Mr. Cooke. 3 units.
14. The Age of Louis XIV; The Revolutionary and
Napoleonic Era.—Europe in the 17th Century; the establishment of absolutism; the ascendancy of France; expansion and conflict overseas; the enlightened despots; the age History 153
of reason; the French Revolution; Napoleon; the Congress
of Vienna.
Text-books: Wakeman, The Ascendancy of France;
Gottschalk, The Era of the French Revolution; or Rose,
The Revolutionary and Napoleonic Era; Fournier or Kir-
scheisen, Napoleon.
Essays will be assigned throughout the session.
Three hours a week. Mr. Cooke. 3 units.
15. Europe, 1815-1919.—The political, social and economic history of the chief countries of continental Europe,
with especial attention to international relations.
Text-book: Hazen, Europe Since 1815; Fueter, World
History; Moon, Imperialism and World Politics; Buell, International Relations.
Essays will be assigned throughout the session.
Three hours a week. Mr. Soward. 3 units.
19. Great Britain Since 1688.—This course aims at an
interpretation of the constitutional, political, economic and
religious development of the British Isles since 1688.
Text-books: Grant Robertson, England Under the
Hanoverians; Williamson, The Evolution of England; Fay,
Great Britain from Adam Smith to the Present Day; Trevelyan, British History in the Nineteenth Century.
Essays will be assigned throughout the session.
Three hours a week. Mr. Sage. 3 units.
20. The Evolution of Canadian Self-Government.—A
survey of the period from the Peace of Utrecht to the present day. The following subjects will be dealt with: French
and British Colonial Systems; British experience in Acadia;
British policy after the Treaty of Paris; the Quebec Act;
the effect of the American Revolution; the Constitutional
Act; the opening of the West; the War of 1812; the forma-
ion of parties and the struggle for Reform; Durham's Report; the achievement of Responsible Government; Confederation and the completion of the Dominion, the de- 154 Faculty of Arts and Scence
velopment of Responsible Government and the growth of
nationhood.
Text-books: Martin, Empire and Commonwealth;
Kennedy, The Constitution of Canada; Kennedy, Statutes,
Treaties and Documents of the Canadian Federation,
1713-1929.
Essays will be assigned throughout the session.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
(Not given in 1933-34.)
21. Methods in High School History.—This course is
offered primarily for students in the Teacher Training
Course and does not carry undergraduate credit.
Readings to be assigned.
Three hours a week in Spring term only. Mr. Cooke.
22. Honours Seminars:
(a) Third Year: Historical Method. Mr. Soward.
(b) Fourth Year: The Stuart Constitutional Problem, 1603-1660. Mr. Sage.
Department of Mathematics
Professor: Daniel Buchanan.
Professor: F. S. Nowlan.
Associate Professor: E. E. Jordan.
Associate Professor: L. Richardson.
Instructor: F. J. Brand.
Mathematics 2 and 3 are Second Year Courses. Mathematics 2 is a prerequisite for all the Honour Courses.
Pass Courses
1. (a) Algebra.—An elementary course, including
ratio, proportion, variation, interest and annuities, theory
of quadratic equations, simple series, permutations, combinations, the binominal theorem, logarithms.
Wilson and Warren, Intermediate Algebra, Chapters I
to XV, Oxford.
Students intending to take Mathematics 2 or to enter
Applied Science should purchase the larger edition of The
Intermediate Algebra.        Four hours a week. First Term. Mathematics 155
(b) Analytical Geometry. — Fundamental concepts,
loci, the straight line and circle.
Nowlan, Analytical Geometry, McGraw-Hill.
Two hours a week. Second Term.
(c) Trigonometry.—An elementary course involving
the use of logarithms.
Playne  and Fawdry,  Practical  Trigonometry, Copp
Clark.
Wentworth and Hill, Tables (Ginn).
Two hours a week. Second Term. 3 units.
2. (a) Analytical Geometry.—A review of the straight
line and circle, and a study of the other conies.
Nowlan, Analytical Geometry, McGraw-Hill.
Two hours a week. First Term. Mr. Nowlan.
(b) Algebra.—The binominal theorem, induction, remainder theorem, Horner's method of approximating roots,
exponential, logarithmic and other series, undetermined coefficients, partial fractions. Introduction to convergence
and divergence and to determinants.
Wilson and Warren, Intermediate Algebra (Larger Edition) , Oxford, f ^
Two hours a week. Second Term. Mr. Nowlan.
(c) Calculus.—An introductory course in differential
and integral calculus, with various applications.
Woods and Bailey, Elementary Calculus (Revised Edition) , Ginn.
One hour a week. Mr. Buchanan. 3 units.
3. The Mathematical Theory of Investments. — This
course deals with the exponential law, the power law, curve
fitting, the theory of interest, annuities, debentures, valuation of bonds, sinking funds, depreciation, probability and
its application to life insurance.
Bauer, Mathematics Preparatory to Statistics and Finance, Macmillan; Hart, Mathematics of Investment (Revised) , Heath.
Three hours a week. Mr. Brand. 3 units. 156 Faculty of Arts and Science
Honour Courses
10. Calculus.—The elementary theory and applications
of the subject.
Granville, Differential and Integral Calculus, Ginn.
Three hours a week. Mr. Buchanan. 3 units.
11. Plane and Spherical Trigonometry.—The work in
plane trigonometry will deal with the following: Identities
and trigonometrical equations, the solution of triangles with
various applications, circumscribed, inscribed and escribed
circles, De Moivre's theorem, expansions of sin n<*, etc.,
hyperbolic and inverse functions. The work in spherical
trigonometry will cover the solution of triangles with various applications to astronomy and geodesy.
Loney, Plane Trigonometry, Parts I and II.
Two hours a week. 2 units.
(Given in 1933-34 and alternate years.)
13. Plane and Solid Analytical Geometry.—A general
study of the conies and systems of conies, and elementary
work in three dimensions.
Two hours a week. Mr. Nowlan. 2 units.
(Given in 1933-34 and alternate years.)
14. Theory of Equations and Determinants.—A course
covering the main theory and use of these subjects.
Dickson, Elementary Theory of Equations, Wiley.
Two hours a week. 2 units.
(Given in 1934-35 and alternate years.)
15. Higher Algebra.—Selected topics in higher algebra,
including infinite series, continued fractions, the theory of
numbers, probability.
Hall and Knight, Higher Algebra, Macmillan; Chrystal,
Text-book of Algebra, Part II.
Two hours a week. Mr. Jordan. 2 units.
(Given in 1933-34 and alternate years.)
16. Calculus and Differential Equations.—A continuation of the previous course in calculus, treating partial dif- Mathematics 157
ferentiation, expansions of functions of many variables,
singular points, reduction formulz, successive integration,
elliptic integrals, and Fourier series.
Ordinary and partial differential equations, with various applications to geometry, mechanics, physics and chemistry.
Granville, Differential and Integral Calculus, Ginn.
Murray, Differential Equations, Longmans.
Three hours a week. Mr. Buchanan. 3 units.
17. Applied Mathematics.—A course dealing with the
applications of mathematics to dynamics of a particle and
of a rigid body, and to the two body problem in celestial
mechanics.
Loney, A Treatise on Dynamics of a Particle and Rigid
Bodies, Cambridge.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
(Given in 1934-35 and alternate years.)
18. History of Mathematics.—A reading course covering the historical development of the elementary branches
of mathematics from the earliest times to the present.
Ball, History of Mathematics; Cajori, History of Elementary Mathematics; Smith, History of Mathematics.
1 unit.
19. Methods in High School Mathematics.
This course is offered primarily for students in the
Teacher Training Course and does not carry undergraduate
credit.
Readings to be assigned.
Three hours a week. Second Term. Mr. Richardson.
e^L 158 Faculty of Arts and Scdznce
Department of Modern Languages
Professor: H. Ashton.
Professor: D. O. Evans.
Professor: A. F. B. Clark.
Associate Professor: Isabel Maclnnes.
Assistant Professor: Janet T. Greig.
Instructor: Joyce Hallamore.
Instructor: W. Tipping.
Instructor: D. Dallas.
Assistant: Mrs. Alice Roys.
With the consent of the Professor in charge of the course,
a student taking a Pass Degree may be admitted to any
course in the Third and Fourth years in addition to, but not
in lieu of, 3 (a) and 4(a). Students from other universities
who have already taken the work of 3 (a) or 4 (a), may be
given special permission by the Head of the Department
to substitute other courses.
French
1. Moliere, Le Bourgeois Gentilhomme, Didier; Victor
Hugo, Prose et Poesies (Wilson Green), Cambridge; Kastner and Marks, French Composition, Pt. 1, Dent; Ashton,
A Preface to Moliere, Longmans, Toronto. (Chaps. I to VI,
and VIII); Weekley, Tutorial French Grammar, Clive.
Summer Reading: See the announcement after the
Fourth Year Courses. 3 units.
Prerequisite: Junior matriculation French or its equivalent.
2. La Fontaine, Fables, (Dent); Moliere, Les Femmes
Savantes, Didier; Balzac, Gobseck, Oxford University Press;
Ashton, A Preface to Moliere, Longmans (Chaps. VII, LX
to XVI).
Conversation in French on the above. Written resumes.
Composition from Kastner and Marks, French Composition, Pt. 1, or Mills, Free Composition, Nelson.
There will be oral tests. 3 units.
Summer Reading: See the announcement after the
Fourth Year Courses. Modern Languages 159
Prerequisite: French 1 or its equivalent.
3. (a) The Literature of the Age of Louis XIV.—Lectures on the history and social conditions of the period, and
on the development of the literature. Careful reading and
discussion of the following texts: Correille, Le Cid, Didier;
Racine, Iphiginie (American Book Co.) or Phedre, Didier;
Moliere, Le Misanthrope, Didier, or L'Avare (Manchester
Univ. Press) ; Le Tartruffe, Heath.
Conversation and written resumes based on the above.
This course is obligatory for all students taking Third
Year French. French 2 is a prerequisite. Students who cannot write French with some facility are advised not to
attempt 3 (a). They will not be admitted to 3 (b), which
is intended for Honours students.
Students who intend to take French throughout the
four years or who wish to teach this subject should also take
3 (c). C 3 units.
3. (b) The Literature of the XlXth Century (Poetry
and Novel). Berthon, Nine French Poets (Macmillan);
Hugo, Selected Poems, Methuen; Balzac, Eugenie Grandet
(Oxford). 3 units.
3. (c) Bibliography, French Composition and Translation from English into French. Kastner and Marks,
French Composition, Pt. 2. 3 units.
(Not given in 1933-34.)
Summer Reading:  See the announcement after the
Fourth Year Courses.
4. (a) The Romantic Drama.—Lectures on the evolution of the drama during the 19 th century. Extensive independent reading will be expected. Hugo, Hernani; Alfred
de Vigny, Chatterton, Oxford; Musset, Three Plays, Nelson; Rostand, Cyrano de Bergerac. 3 units.
French 3 (a) is a prerequisite. Students who cannot
write accurate French with facility and understand spoken
French are advised not to attempt 4(a). 160 Faculty of Arts and Science
4. (b) Literature and Society in the XVIIth Century.
—Mme. de La Fayette, La Princesse de Cleves, Cambridge;
La Bruyere, Les Caracteres, Cambridge; Mme. de Sevigne,
Lettres, Manchester; Moliere, Les Precieuses Ridicules,
Longmans; Les Femmes Savantes, Hatier; L'Avare, Hatier;
Le Bourgeois Gentihomme, Hatier. French 3 (a) and 3 (b)
are prerequisite. The requirements for entrance to 4(b)
are accurately written French and a sufficient mastery of
spoken French to permit conversation on a literary subject.
4. (c) Composition and Oral French.—Book required:
Kastner and Marks, French Composition, Pt. 3.      3 units.
Prerequisite: French 3(c).
(Not given in 1933-34.)
4. (e) The Literature of the Eighteenth Century.—
Lectures on the history and social conditions of the period,
with special emphasis on the philosophe movement, and the
beginnings of romanticism. The inter-relations of French
and English thought and literature will be touched upon.
Careful reading and discussion of the following texts: Selections from Voltaire (Havens), Century Co.; Rousseau,
Morceaux choisis (Mornet), Didier; Diderot, Ex traits
(Fallex), Delgrave; Beaumarchais, Le Bar bier de Seville,
Macmillan.
French 3 (a) and 3 (b) are prerequisites. The requirements for entrance are the same as for 4 (b). 3 units.
5. (a) Methods in High School.—Modern Languages.
Phonetics during First Term (1 hour a week). Methods
during Spring Term. (2 hours a week.) Texts for discussion: Hedgcock, Practical French Teaching, Pitman; Mod-
ern Studies, 19IS. This course is primarily for students in
the Teacher Training course and does not carry undergraduate credit.
5. (b) Old French and XVIth Century. Texts: Aucas-
sin et Nicolette; Montaigne, Essais; Ronsard, Poesies; Rabelais, Gargantua. (For M.A. candidates only.) Modern Languages 161
5. (c) The French Novel.—A study of the evolution
of the French Novel with special reference to the Nineteenth Century. Independent readings are required.
Summer Reading
Upon entering the courses for the years stated, the student must satisfy the instructor that he has read the books
mentioned below.
Second Year:
1. Bernardin de St. Pierre, Paul et Virginie.
2. Balzac, Eugenie Grandet.
3. Saintine, Picciola; or Vigny, Poesies Choisies.
Third Year:
1. Chateaubriand, Atala.
2. Le Sage, Gil Bias.
3. Vigny, Servitude et grandeur militaires.
4. Banville, Gringoire; or Musset, Poesies Choisies.
FourthYear:
1. Moliere, L'Avare.
2. Moliere, Le Bourgeois Gentilhomme.
3. Moliere, Les Femmes Savantes.
4. Racine, Andromaque.
5. Racine, Les Plaideurs.
6. Musset, Fantasio.
7. Musset, Un Caprice.
The above have all been chosen from the series Les
Classiques pour tous so as to lighten the cost of buying books
for vacation reading. At the present rate of exchange they
can be bought at the University Bookstore for ten or fifteen cents each. As these books can be carried in the pocket
and read at odd moments, no excuse will be accepted for
failure to do summer reading. 162 Faculty of Arts and Science
German
Beginners' Course.—Zinnecker, Deutsch fur Anf anger,
Ex. 1-32, Heath; Koischwitz, Bilderlesebuch, Crofts.
3 units.
1. Completion and Revision of Zinnecker. Composition and conversation based on texts read. Diamond and
Uhlendorf, Mitten im Leben, Holt; Bruns, Book of German Lyrics, Heath.
Science Section with alternate reading. 3 units.
Junior Matriculation or Beginners' German is prerequisite for this course.
2. Whitney and Stroebe, Easy German Composition,
Holt.  Composition and conversation based on texts read.
Heine, Die Harzeise, Allyn and Bacon; Lessing, Minna
von Barnhelm, Heath; Bruns, Book of German Lyrics.
3 units.
German 1, or its equivalent, is prerequisite for German 2.
3. Introduction to the Classical Period.
Lectures on the development of Eighteenth Century
literature. Texts for special study: Lessing, Emilia Galotti,
Heath; Goethe, Faust I, Heath; Schiller, Die Jungfrau von
Orleans, Holt. Composition text: Whitney and Stroebe,
German Composition, Holt. 3 units.
Summer Reading: Before entering German 3 students
must read: J. G. Robertson, The Literature of Germany
(Home University Library.)
Department of Philosophy
Professor: H. T. J. Coleman.
Associate Professor of Psychology and Education:
Jennie Wyman Pilcher.
1.  (a)  Elementary Psychology.
Text-book: Warren, Elements of Human Psychology,
(Revised Edition), Houghton Mifflin.
Three hours a week. Mrs. Pilcher. 3 units. 5D Philosophy 163
1 (b) Introduction to Philosophy. This course is intended for two classes of students: First, those who contemplate specializing in Philosophy either as Honour or Pass
students in their Third and Fourth Years; and second, those
who wish a single course which will give in an untechnical
way a statement and discussion of fundamental philosophical problems and thus assist them in their special studies in
other departments.
Text: Patrick, Introduction to Philosophy, Houghton
Mifflin.
References:Brightman, An Introduction to Philosophy;
Cunningham, Problems of Philosophy; Dralb, An Invitation to Philisophy; Alexander, A Short History of Philosophy; Perry, The Approach to Philosophy.
Three hours a week. Mr. Coleman. 3 units.
2. Ethics.
Text-book: Urban, Fundamentals of Ethics, Holt.
A special study will be made of selected portions of
Aristotle's Ethics, Mill's Utilitarianism, and Kant's Meta-
physic of Morals.        I
Three hours a week. 3 units.
3. History of Greek Philosophy from Thales to Plato
(inclusive).
Text-books: Bakewell, Source Book in Ancient Philosophy, Scribners. Burnet, Greek Philosophy (Part I), Macmillan. In connection with this course a special study will
be made of Plato's Republic, Phaedo, and Philebus.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
(Given in 1934-35 and alternate years.)
4. The History of Philosophy from the Renaissance to
the Present time.
Text-book: Alexander, A Short History of Philosophy,
Macmillan. 164 Faculty of Arts and Science
References: Rand, Modern Classical Philosophers, and
the various Histories of Philosophy.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
(Given in 1933-34 and alternate years.)
5. The Philosophy of Kant, with special study of the
Critique of Pure Reason.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
(Given in 1933-34 and alternate years.)
6. Philosophic Movements since the time of Kant. Post-
Kantian Idealism, Pragmatism, Modern Realism, Bergson
and others.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
(Given in 1934-35 and alternate years.)
7. Philosophy of Education. A course of lectures and
discussions dealing with educational movements since the
beginning of the 19th century, and with the theories of
life and of mind which are implicit in these movements.
Texts: Spencer, Education, Everyman Edition. Dewey
Democracy and Education, Macmillan.
References: Butler, The Meaning of Education; Rousseau, Emile; Locke, The Conduct of the Understanding;
Froebel, The Education of Man; Dewey, The School and Society; Articles in the Cyclopedia of Education, Macmillan.
Philosophy 1 (a) or Philisophy 1 (b) is recommended
as preparatory to this course.
Three hours a week. Mr. Coleman. 3 units.
8. Social Psychology.—A study of those particular
phases of mental life and development which are fundamental in social organization and activity.
Texts: McDougall, Social Psychology, The Group Mind,
Methuen, London; Ginsberg, Psychology of Society, Methuen, London. Collateral reading will be prescribed from
the following: Hobhouse, Mind in Evolution, Morals in
Evolution; Sutherland, Origin and Grmvth of the Moral
Instinct; Cooley, Human Nature and the Social Order; Physics 165
Wallas, Human Nature in Politics, The Great Society; Ross,
Social Psychology; Trotter, Instincts of the Herd in Peace
and War; Bernard, Introduction to Social Psychology.
Philosophy 1 (a) or Philosophy 1 (b) is recommended
as preparatory to this course.
Three hours a week. Mr. Coleman. 3 units.
9. (1) A Study of the Concept of Intelligence.—Current theories of the nature and growth of intelligence. Its
practical bearing in modern life. Principles and applications of the measurement of intelligence. History of the
movement. The nature and causes of mental defects and
peculiarities.
(2) Principles of Experimental Procedure.—Method
of Measurement. Practical training in the methods of group
examinations. Treatment of subnormal, normal and gifted
children. Treatment of problem cases.
Text: Terman, Measurement of Intelligence, Houghton
Mifflin.
Three hours a week. Mrs. Pilcher. 3 units.
Department of Physics
Professor: T. C. Hebb.
Professor: A. E. Hennings.
Associate Professor: J. G. Davidson.
Associate Professor: G. M. Shrum.
Assistant: Ronald Smith.
Assistant: Ronald Makepeace.
Assistant: Rognvald T. Hamilton.
Primarily for First and Second Year students.
1. Introduction to Physics.—A general study of the
principles of mechanics, properties of matter, heat, light,
sound and electricity, both in the lecture room and in the
laboratory. The course has two objects: (1) to give the minimum acquaintance with physical science requisite for a
liberal education to those whose studies will be mainly literary; (2) to be introductory to the courses in Chemistry, 166 Faculty of Arts and Sceence
Engineering and Advanced Physics. Students must reach
the required standard in both theoretical and practical
work. Open only to students who have not matriculated
in Physics.
Text-book: Millikan, Gale and Edwards, A First Course
in Physics for Colleges.
Three lectures and two hours laboratory a week. 3 units.
2. Elementary Physics.—This course consists of a general course in Physics suitable for those students who have
obtained standing in Junior Matriculation Physics or its
equivalent. It covers mechanics, properties of matter, heat,
light, sound, electricity and some of the more recent developments and theories.
Text-book: Stewart, Physics, A Text-book for Colleges,
Ginn.
Prerequisite: High School Physics.
Three lectures and one two-hour laboratory period a
week. 3 units.
References: Watson, A Text-book of Physics, Longmans; Kaye and Laby, Physical and Chemical Constants,
Longmans.
3. Mechanics, Molecular Physics and Heat.—A study
of statics and dynamics of both a particle and a rigid body,
the laws of gases and vapors, temperature, hygrometry,
capillarity, expansion, and calorimetry.
Text-books: Reynolds, Elementary Mechanics, Prentice-Hall; Draper, Heat and the Principles of Thermodynamics, Blackie & Sons.
Prerequisite: Physics 1 or 2.
Two lectures and three hours laboratory a week. 3 units.
Primarily for Third Year Students
5. Electricity and Magnetism.—A study of the fundamentals of magnetism and electricity, including alternating
currents and electron physics. Physics 167
Text-book: Zeleny, Elements of Electricity, McGraw-
Hill.
Prerequisite: Physics 1 or 2.
Two lectures and three hours laboratory a week. 3 units.
6. Theoretical Mechanics.—A selected course in statics,
dynamics of a particle and of a rigid body.
Text-book: Smith and Longley, Ginn.
Two lectures a week. 2 units.
7. Introduction to Theoretical Physics.—A course of
lectures upon selected topics, including elasticity, viscosity,
and hydromechanics.
Two lectures a week. 2 units.
8. Physical Optics.—A course of lectures accompanied
by laboratory work, covering optical instruments, interference, diffraction, polarisation, the nature of light and
experiments on ether drift.
Text-book: Robertson, Introduction to Physical Optics, Van Nostrand.
Two lectures and one three-hour laboratory period a
week. J 3 units.
Primarily for Fourth Year Students
10. Light.—A short lecture course for students who
have not taken Course 8. A study of optical instruments,
light sources and filters, spectroscopy, photometry, energy
measurements, refractometers, interference, diffraction
and polarized light.
Text-book: Hardy and Perrin, The Principles of Optics, McGraw-Hill.
One lecture a week. 1 unit.
11. Electricity and Magnetism.—In this course especial attention is given to the theoretical phases of Electricity and Magnetism.
Text-book: Starling, Electricity and Magnetism.
Prerequisites: Physics 3 and 5 and Mathematics 10.
Two lectures a week. 2 units. 168 Faculty of Arts and Scdznce
12. Introduction to Atomic Structure.—A course of
lectures dealing with the conduction of electricity through
gases, cathode and positive rays, elementary spectroscopy,
X-rays, radioactivity and other atomic phenomena.
Text-book: Richtmyer, Introduction to Modern Physics, McGraw-Hill.
Prerequisites: Courses 3 and 5, and Differential and Integral Calculus.
Two lectures a week. 2 units.
13. Kinetic Theory of Gases.—A course of lectures giving an exposition of the classical deductions and an outline
of recent experimental advances of the subject.
Text-book: Loeb, Kinetic Theory of Gases.
Two lectures a week. 2 units.
14. Thermodynamics.—A course of lectures covering
the fundamental principles of the subject.
Text-book: Birtwistle, The Principles of Thermodynamics.
One lecture a week. 1 unit.
19. Experimental Physics.—This is chiefly a laboratory
course covering work in thermionics, spectroscopy, high
vacua and general laboratory technique.
Carefully prepared reports, abstracts and bibliographies
will constitute an essential part of the course.
Six hours laboratory a week. 2 to 3 units.
With the consent of the head of the department Fourth
Year students may select one or more units from the following graduate courses:
Primarily for Graduate Students
20. Spectroscopy.—A study of the methods of excitation and observation of spectra, series in arc and spark
spectra, multiplets, Zeeman and Stark effects, and band
spectra.
One lecture a week. 1 unit. Physics 169
21. Radiation and Atomic Structure.—A study of the
theories of radiation and miscellaneous related topics selected from current literature.
One lecture a week. 1 unit.
22. Advanced Electricity and Magnetism.—A study of
the Electromagnetic theory and its application, the theories
of metallic conduction, and electrical oscillations.
One lecture a week. 1 unit.
23. Vector Analysis.—A course of lectures upon the
applications of Vector Analysis to problems in Physics.
One lecture a week. 1 unit.
24. X-rays and Crystal Structure.—A study of the
modern methods of production and observation of X-rays,
the Compton effect, X-ray analysis, and the structure of
crystals.
One lecture a week. . 1 unit.
2 5. The Theory of Sound.—A course of lectures covering the propagation of sound, and the general phenomena
associated with vibrating systems.
One lecture a week. 1 unit.
26. The Theory of Potential.—A general course giving
the applications of the Theory of Potential to Physics.
One lecture a week. 1 unit.
27. The Theory of Relativity.—An introductory course
to the Theory of Relativity.
One lecture a week. 1 unit.
28. Quantum Mechanics.—An introduction to the
theory of Quantum Mechanics, and the application of
Wave Mechanics to atomic problems.
One lecture a week. 1 unit.
40. Methods in High School Physics.—This course is
offered primarily for students in the Teacher Training
Course and does not carry undergraduate credit. Readings
to be assigned.
Three hours a week. Second Term. 170 Faculty of Arts and Science
Department of Zoology
Professor: C. McLean Fraser.
Assistant Professor: G. J. Spencer.
Assistant Professor: Gertrude M. Smith.
Note:—Biology 1 is prerequisite to all courses in Zoology.
1. General Morphology.—General morphology of animals. Comparative anatomy. The relationships of animal
groups.  Comparative life-histories.
Text-books: Parker and Haswell, Manual of Zoology,
Macmillan.
This course is prerequisite to other courses in Zoology.
Two lectures and two hours laboratory a week. 3 units.
2. Comparative Anatomy of Vertebrates.—A detailed
comparative study of a member of each of the classes of
Vertebrates.
Two lectures and four hours laboratory a week. First
Term. 2 units.
3. Comparative Anatomy of Invertebrates.—A detailed
comparative study of a member of each of the main classes
of Invertebrates.
Two lectures and four hours laboratory a week. Second
Term. 2 units.
4. Morphology of Insects.—General Entomology.
A collection of insects is required.
Two lectures and four hours laboratory a week. First
Term. 2 units.
This course is prerequisite to other courses in Entomology.
(Not given in 1933-34.)
5. Histology.—Study of the structure and development
of animal tissues. Methods of histology.
Ten hours a week.  Second Term. 3 units. Zoology 171
6. Embryology.—A general survey of the principles of
vertebrate embryology. Preparation and examination of
embryological sections.
Ten hours a week. First Term. 3 units.
7. Economic Entomology.—A study of the insect pests
of animals and plants; means of combating them.
Lecture and laboratory work, six hours a week. First
Term. 2 units.
8. Private Reading.—A course of reading on Biological
theories. In this course examinations will be set, but no
class instruction will be given. 2 units.
9. Advanced Entomology.—A course in (a) Insect
Morphology and wing venation, or (b) Internal Anatomy
and Histology, or (c) Taxonomy.
Prerequisite: Zoology 4.
Lecture and laboratory work seven hours a week. First
Term. 2 units.
Courses correlated with the work for the major thesis
are given to graduate students.
(-0^)  THE
FACULTY
OF
APPLIED SCIENCE
(ENGINEERING, NURSING AND HEALTH)  FACULTY OF APPLIED SCIENCE
FOREWORD
The object of the courses in Applied Science is to train
students in exact and fertile thinking, and to give them a
sound knowledge of natural laws and of the means of utilizing natural forces and natural products for the benefit of
man and the advancement of civilization. Experience shows
that such a training is the best yet devised for a large and
increasing proportion of the administrative, supervisory
and technical positions.
The object, then, is to turn out, not finished engineers
or industrial leaders—these are the product of years of
development in the school of experience,—but young men
with a special capacity and training for attaining these
goals, and thus for helping to develop the industries of the
province. Consequently the undergraduate course is made
broad and general rather than narrow and highly specialized.
Furthermore, such a course is not only better suited to
the British Columbia conditions that the graduate will encounter in his after-life, but also better for later specialization, for it furnishes a more solid foundation, a better
background, a broader outlook and a more stimulating atmosphere, all necessary if the specialist is to achieve the
maximum results of which he is capable.
The student is offered a full undergraduate course and
an additional year of graduate study. The First Year is
intended to increase the student's general knowledge and to
broaden his outlook. It is hoped that enough interest will be
aroused to encourage the student to continue some study of
the humanities as a hobby or recreation.
The Second and Third years in Applied Science are spent
in a general course that includes Mathematics and all the
basic sciences. This gives not only a broad training, but
enables the student to discover the work for which he has
special liking or aptitude and to select more intelligently
the subjects in which to specialize during the final two years. 176 Faculty of Applied Science
During these two years students acquire more detailed
knowledge and get practice in applying scientific principles
and knowledge, in solving problems, in doing things; and
there is also training in Economics, Law and Industrial Management.
During the long period between sessions, the student is
required to engage in some industrial or professional work
that will afford practical experience not obtainable in the
laboratory or field classes, but that is a necessary supplement
to academic study.
An engineering degree in the Applied Science Course of
the University is accepted by the Association of Professional Engineers of the Province of British Columbia in lieu
of four of the six years' practical experience required by the
Engineering Act of the Province for registration to practise
engineering.
Students are advised to register with the Association of
Professional Engineers of British Columbia in their third
year; and to associate themselves with the appropriate
engineering societies.
FACILITIES FOR WORK
For laboratory and other Facilities see Pages 25-39.
ADMISSION
The general requirements for admission to the University are given on Pages 43-46.
As for Arts, complete Junior Matriculation or its equivalent is required for admission to Applied Science, and no
student may enter with any outstanding supplemental in
Junior Matriculation.
Admission to the Second Year in Applied Science may
be granted to students who have fulfilled the requirements
of the First Year, as outlined below, by Senior Matriculation
or similar work taken outside of the University; but students who are considering entering Applied Science are
recommended to take the First Year at the University of Courses in Applied Science 177
British Columbia, if they can, for, while they may master
the required subject matter as well outside, in the opinion
of the Faculty it is highly desirable to have had a year's
experience at the University before entering Second Year
Applied Science.
This experience includes special orientation lectures,
contact with Arts students, with Applied Science senior
students, with specialists, with college organizations, and
generally with the University methods and adjustments
which prepare him to attack the difficult and heavy work
of the Second Year efficiently from the outset, or to select
another University course, if desired, on the basis of a year's
experience and without loss of time.
DEGREES
The degrees offered students in this Faculty are:
Bachelor of Applied Science (B.A. Sc.). (See below.)
Master of Applied Science (M.A.Sc).   (See Page 210.)
COURSES LEADING TO THE DEGREE OF B.A.Sc.
The degree of Bachelor of Applied Science is granted
on the completion of the work in one of the coursesf given
below:
I.    Chemical Engineering.
II.    Chemistry.
III. Civil Engineering.
IV. Electrical Engineering.
V.    Forest Engineering.
VI.    Geological Engineering.
VII.    Mechanical Engineering.
VIII.    Metallurgical Engineering.
EK.    Mining Engineering.
X.    Nursing and Health.
A double course in Arts and Science and in Applied
Science is offered, leading to the degrees of B.A., and
B.ASc.   (See Page 208.)
tThe curriculum described in the following pages may be changed from
time to time as deemed advisable by the Senate. 178 Faculty of Applied Science
This course is strongly recommended to students who
are young enough to afford the time and to students wishing
to enter Applied Science, and who have to their credit some,
but not all, of the requirements of First Year Applied
Science as set forth on Page 180. The latter can select subjects in their Second Year Arts that will satisfy the Arts
requirements for the double degree, and at the same time
complete the work of First Year Applied Science. Thus they
may qualify for an Arts degree without expending any more
time than would be required to qualify them for entrance
into Second Year Applied Science.
PRACTICAL WORK OUTSIDE THE
UNIVERSITY
In order to master professional subjects it is very important that the work done at the University should be
supplemented by practical experience in related work outside. Therefore students are expected to spend their summers in employment that will give such experience.
Before a degree will be granted, a candidate is required to
satisfy the Department concerned that he has done at least
four months' practical work related to his chosen profession. Fourth and Fifth Year Essays (See Page 182) should
be based, as far as possible, upon the summer work.
Upon approval of the Dean and the head of the Department concerned, University credit may be granted for work
done outside the University under the immediate supervision of the University staff, during the University session.
Practical work such as Shop-work, Freehand Drawing,
Mechanical Drawing, Surveying, etc., done outside the
University, may be accepted in lieu of laboratory or field
work (but not in lieu of lectures) in these subjects, on the
recommendation of the Head of the Department and approval of the Dean. Students seeking exemption as above
must make written application to the Dean, accompanied
by certificates indicating the character of the work done
and the time devoted to it. Courses in Appldzd Science 179
OPENING OF SESSION
Lectures begin on Wednesday, September the 27th, and
it is essential to the success of the student that he should be
in attendance at the opening of the session, for, in order to
allow as much time as possible for practical work in the
summer, the length of the session has been reduced to the
minimum consistent with the ground to be covered. Consequently a student requires the full session to master the
work. A mere pass standing is a very unsatisfactory preparation for subsequent work or professional life. Further,
from this standpoint, the opening work is the most important of the whole session for the student, for in it are given
the general instructions necessary for the proper attack
upon the work.
The only exception is when the summer employment
affords experience necessary for the course the student is
specializing in, which will lighten to some extent the work
of the session (such as in Geological Survey field work for
geological students) and then only when the nature of this
work makes it impossible for the student to reach the University on the opening day. Under these circumstances, if
the student furnishes a statement from his employer showing it was impossible for him to release the student earlier,
the Dean may allow the student to enter without penalty.
The student must, however, register at the opening of the
session in accordance with the regulations in reference to
registration.
SUPPLEMENTARY EXAMINATIONS
A student with supplemental must write them off at
the regular time for supplemental examinations before the
opening of the session, for he will need the entire session for
the current year's work. It is also necessary, for a successful
year, to have a satisfactory knowledge of the foundational
work of the preceding year. No exceptions to the above rule
will be granted except as under Paragraph 2, Page 179. 180 Faculty of Applted Science
GENERAL OUTLINE OF UNIVERSITY COURSES
Students in Nursing and Health register directly in Applied Science and take the special course outlined on Pages
199-208. All other students of Applied Science have a general course common to all for the first three years as under:
FIRST YEAR
The students register in Arts and take the following
classes as Arts students:
English 1 (a and b).
Mathematics 1 (Algebra, Geometry, Trigonometry).
Chemistry 1.
Physics 1 or 2.
Latin 1 or French 1 or * German B.
The passing grade is 5 0 per cent, for English, Chemistry,
Physics, and each of the Mathematical subjects, but in the
others a mark of 40 per cent, will be accepted provided an
average of 60 per cent, has been obtained in the total work
of the year. No student with any supplemental outstanding
will be admitted to Second Year Applied Science.
Biology 1, if taken as an optional extra subject, and
passed with a grade of at least 50 per cent., need not be repeated in the Second Year. Economics 1, taken in Arts, is
accepted in lieu of Economics in Applied Science.
A reading knowledge of French and German is desirable
for students in Engineering.
Students who have passed First Year Arts and Science,
but who have failed to make the necessary entrance requirements for the Second Year Applied Science, may take the
September Supplemental Examinations of Arts and Science.
First Year students are advised to attend the noon-hour
talks on the choice of a profession and on the life and work
in various callings likely to be selected by Applied Science
graduates, as these may assist the student in determining
whether Applied Science is the best course for him. If he
•Applied Science students contemplating specializing In Chemistry or
Geology are advised to take German B. Courses in Applied Science
181
finds it is not, he can proceed in Arts without any loss of
time.
The work of the Second and Third Years is the same in
all courses, except those in Nursing and Health.
SECOND YEAR
Subject
First Term
Ik
III
Second Term
SB!
$2*
Math. 1 Trigonometry	
Math. 2 Solid Geometry	
Math. 3 Algebra	
Math. 4 Calculus	
C.E. 1 Descriptive Geom	
M.E. 1 Drawing 1	
Physics 3 Mechanics	
Physics 4 Heat	
Chem. 2a Qual. Analysis	
M.E. 2a Shop Practice	
Biology 1* Introductory	
C.E. 2 Surveying	
C.E. 30 Engineering Prob. 1
243
244
244
244
221
245
261
261
217
246
214
221
231
Field Work
I     4    1...
•Biology 1, Arts, passed with a grade of at least 50 per cent., will be
accepted in lieu of this course.
THIRD YEAR
fNo student with any supplemental outstanding will
be admitted to the Third Year of Applied Science.
Subject
a..
First Term
P
is.-
ii!
3W
Second Term
is*
J"
Math. 6 Calculus	
Math. 7 Anal. Geom	
Chem. 2b Quan. Analysis	
C.E. 4 Graphics.. 	
M.E. 6a Elem. Theory...	
Physics 5 Electricity.	
Physics 6 Mechanics.	
C.E. 5 Mapping	
C.E. 6 Surveying	
Geology 1 General	
JC. E. 7 Surveying	
C.E. 31 Engineering Prob. 2..
244
244
217
221
247
262
262
222
222
239
222
232
3
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
3
Field
2
Work
3
tThis regulation will not be enforced until the opening of the 1934-35
Session.
^Students entering Civil, Forest, Geological, Metallurgical, and Mining
Engineering are required to take Civil Engineering 7 (see Page 222) immediately after the spring examinations. 182 Faculty of Applied Science
FOURTH AND FIFTH YEARS
Essays
Essays are required of all students entering the Fourth
and Fifth Years, and must conform to the following:
1. The essay shall consist of not less than 2,000 words.
2. It must be a technical description of the engineering
aspects of the work on which the student was engaged
during the summer, or of any scientific or engineering
work with which he is familiar. In the preparation of
the essay, advantage may be taken of any source of information, but due acknowledgment must be made of
all authorities consulted. It should be suitably illustrated
by drawings, sketches, photographs or specimens.
3. It must be typewritten, or clearly written on paper of
substantial quality, standard letter size (8^4x11
inches), on one side of the paper only, leaving a clear
margin on top and left-hand side. Students are recommended to examine sample reports to be found in the
library or in the departments.
4. All essays must be handed in to the Dean not later than
November 15th.
All essays, when handed in, become the property of the
Department concerned, and are filed for reference. Students may submit duplicate copies of their essays in competition for the students' prizes of the Engineering Institute of Canada, or the Canadian Institute of Mining and
Metallurgy.
Essays will be considered as final Christmas examinations. A maximum of 100 marks is allowed, the value being
based on presentation, English, including spelling, and matter. In Fourth Year essays, presentation, that is, the manner
in which the material is arranged and presented to the
reader, is given most weight, with English second and matter third. In Fifth Year essays, most emphasis is placed on
matter, but the other two are still rated highly. Courses in Applued Sceence
183
COURSES
I.    Chemical Engineering
The course in Chemical Engineering should prepare the
student for the duties of managing engineer in a chemical
manufactory. As such he must be conversant not only with
the chemical processes involved, but he must be prepared to
design and to oversee the construction of new buildings and
to direct the installation and use of machinery. In the industrial life of British Columbia the chemical engineer may be
more particularly concerned with the manufacture of acids
and alkalies, the preparation from natural sources of various organic and inorganic compounds, the pulp and paper
industry, and the utilization of the waste from a number of
industrial plants indigenous to the Province. Accordingly,
the course of study includes a number of courses in the older
branches of engineering along with the maximum of chemical training allowed by the time at the disposal of the
student.
Fourth Year
Subject
&..
*E Oi
First Term
Second
w a
O pfe.
3»
$4
•-1 a
9. Q-i,
Essay	
Economics 1 (Arts)	
Met. 1 Introductory	
Geol. 2 (a) Mineralogy	
Chem. 3 Organic	
Chem. 4 Theoretical	
Chem. 5 Adv. Analysis	
E.E. 1 General	
Physics 7 Light (Reading Course)
C.E. 12 Hydraulics	
182
232
3
3
258
2
2
240
2
2
218
2
3
2
218
2
3
2
218
1
9
1
250
2
2
2
262
1
1
225
1
3
1 184
Faculty of Applied Scdsnce
Fdtth Year
ja..
as
First Term
Second Term
Subject
2%
ssi
>2R
Essay. 	
182
219
219
219
220
220
259
2
2
2
2
2
2
"i
3
3
12
2
2
2
2
2
2
Chemistry 6 Industrial. _	
Chem. 7 Physical 	
Chem. 8 Electro	
3
3
Chem. 16 Engineering	
Met. 2 General	
3
Thesis.... _	
15
II.    Chemistry
The aim of this course is to train the students in the practice of Chemistry, and to give a thorough knowledge in the
fundamental principles of this subject, that they may be
prepared to assist in the solution of problems of value to the
industrial and agricultural life of the Province. The course
is arranged to give in the first two years a knowledge of the
fundamental principles of Chemistry and Physics, with
sufficient mathematics to enable the theoretical parts of the
subject to be understood.
In the Fourth Year, Analytical, Organic and Physical
Chemistry are studied from the scientific side and in relation to technology; while in the Fifth Year a considerable
amount of time is devoted to a short piece of original work. Courses in Appleed Scbence
185
Fourth Year
SB
Sft,
Q,
I1
First Term
Second Term
Subject
si
II
h
in
si
h
111
Essay	
182
232
218
218
218
258
240
259
162
262
"i
2
2
1
2
2
1
3
1
"3
3
6
2
5
"i
2
2
1
2
"s
1
Economics 1 (Arts)	
Chem. 3 Organic	
3
Chem. 4 Theoretical	
3
Chem. 5 Adv. Analysis	
6
Met. 1 Introductory. 	
Geol. 2 (a) Mineralogy 	
Met. 5 Assaying	
German (Arts) B 	
Physics 7 Light (Reading Course)
Fifth Year
fa
Qft.
First Term
Second Term
Subject   A
V  »-
I*-
SSJt
IP
si
h
ft*
w
Essay. _	
Bacteriology 1 (Arts)	
182
108
262
219
219
219
220
259
2
2
2
2
2
2
~'i
"3
3
3
"9
"2
2
2
2
2
2
....
Physics 12 Advanced	
Chem. 6 Industrial	
Chem. 7 Physical.	
3
Chem. 8 Electro	
3
Chem. 9 Adv. Organic	
3
Met. 2 General	
Thesis	
18
III.    Civil Engineering
The broad field covered by Civil Engineering makes it
an adjunct of many other branches of engineering, yet the
Civil Engineer occupies a distinctive field and is intimately
associated with a wide group of undertakings vitally affecting the health, comfort and prosperity of the commonwealth. 186 Faculty of Applied Science
The various branches of Civil Engineering deal with
problems in water supply and water purification; in sewerage systems, sewage disposal plants, and the handling of
municipal and industrial wastes; in hydraulic power development; in irrigation and drainage for agricultural activities; in all types of structures, bridges and buildings, piers
and docks, sea walls and protective works; in transportation, canals, locks, highways, electric and steam railways;
and in the management and direction of public works, public utilities, industrial and commercial enterprises.
The course in Civil Engineering is designed to provide,
in so far as time will permit, foundations for continued
growth along those lines which the student's interest and
environment determine, without compelling too early specialization. Training in pure and applied science, in the
humanities, in economics and engineering law, and in the
technical phases of professional work establishes a broad
basis for the stimulation of a sincere spirit of public service
and for the development of that capacity for reliable work
and judgment which makes safe the assumption of responsibilities.
The methods of instruction are planned with the view
of bringing out the powers and initiative of the students
while training them in the habits of accurate analysis and
careful work. Students are encouraged to secure summer
work which will give them an insight into the various phases
of the career upon which they are about to enter, and the
summer essays lay the foundation for the ability to set forth,
in clear and precise language, descriptions and analyses of
projects and engineering activities. In the Fifth Year thesis
an opportunity is given for special investigation and research under the supervision of experienced engineers. Courses in Applied Science
187
Fourth Year
Subject
Qft,
First Term
§1
3«
Second Term
58
5 o?
3«
Essay	
C.E. 8 Foundations	
C.E. 9 Elementary Design	
C.E. 10 a & b Strength of Mtls,
C.E. 11 Railways	
C.E. 12 a & b Hydraulics	
C.E. 13 Mapping	
C.E. 14 Surveying	
C.E. 15 Drawing	
M.E. 6(b) Laboratory	
E.E. 1 General	
Economics 1 (Arts)	
C.E. 16 Surveying	
C.E. 21 Water Power	
C.E. 28 Seminar	
182
223
223
224
224
225
225
225
225
248
250
232
226
227
231
Field Work
Fifth Year
Subject
3|
Qft.
First Term
s-a
t!
662
a**
Second Term
,a oP
,3"
Essay	
C.E. 17 Structural Design.,	
C.E. 18(a) Engineering Economics
C.E. 18(b) Engineering Economics
C.E. 19 Law—Contracts	
CE. 20 Geodesy	
C.E. 22 Municipal	
C.E. 23 Transportation	
C.E. 24(a) Mechanics of Mtls	
C.E. 24(b) Reinforced Concrete
Design	
C.E. 25 Theory of Structures	
C.E. 26 Trips	
C.E. 27 Thesis	
C.E. 28 Seminar	
C.E. 29 Hydraulic Machines	
182
226
226
226
227
227
228
228
229
229
230
230
231
231
231
2
6
Required Sat. A.M. 188
Faculty of Applied Scdence
TV.    Electrical Engineering
This course is designed for those students who desire a
general training in the theory and practice of Electrical
Engineering. The Fourth Year of the course is devoted to
the study of the basic principles of Mechanical and Electrical Engineering, and is intended to prepare the student
for the more specialized courses which are given in the Fifth
Year. In the Fifth Year an intensive course in all the important branches of Design, Transmission, Electro-Technology,
Radio and Electric Traction, is given, together with thorough laboratory work in most of these subjects.
Fourth Year
Subject
Qft,
First Term
U
h
S&sj
Second Term
!|
III
$n
Essay	
*E.E. 2 Direct Current Technology..
*E.E. 3 Elementary AC Technology.
•Math. 8 or 9 (Adv. Calculus)	
*M.E. 3 Kinematics	
•M.E. 7 Heat Engines	
•M.E. 4 Dynamics	
•E.E. 5 Electrical and Magnetic
Measurements and Instruments	
•E.E. 6 Electrical Problem Course....
•C.E. 12 Hydraulics	
•M.E. 5 Machine Design 	
M.E. 5(a) Problem Course in
Strength of Materials and
Design	
CE. 10 Strength of Materials	
tM.E. 2 b	
182
252
252
244
246
248
246
253
253
225
246
247
224
246
•Prerequisite for Electrical Students entering Fifth Tear.
tOptional. Courses in Appldsd Science
189
Fifth Year
Subject
•3"
la
ft.
First Term
m
2n
Second Term
III
2«
Essay _	
E.E. 7 Design of Electrical
Machinery	
E.E. 8 Electrical Traction	
E.E. 9 Transmission and Distribution
of Electrical Energy	
M.E. 15 Prime Movers	
M.E. 14 Mechanical Design	
E.E. 10 Electrical Problem Course ....
E.E. 11 Radio Telegraphy and
Radio Telephony	
Math. 8 or 9 (Differential Equa.
or Adv. Calculus)	
E.E. 12 Electro-technology.	
E.E. 13 Transient Phenomena and
Oscillations	
M.E. 8 Steam Turbines	
182
263
254
254
250
249
254
254
244
255
256
248
V.    Forest Engineering
In British Columbia the forest industries, including logging and the manufacture of lumber, pulp and paper, lead
all others. They must always play a very important part in
the economy of the Province, because seven-eighths of the
productive land is absolute forest soil, that will grow good
timber but no other crop of value; and because over half the
remaining stand of saw-timber—the last big reserve—of
Canada is here. The development of these industries is requiring more and more the services of engineers, and especially is this true in logging. Furthermore, most of the forest
land is owned by the public, and the management of these
vast estates is a task that will require constant growth on the
part of the government forest services. 190 Faculty of Applied Science
This indicates very briefly the various fields of service
open to Forest Engineers, and for which the course of
studies is designed. Primarily the course is planned for the
lumber industry, and a major part of the time—apart from
the preliminary foundation work—is devoted to the
branches of engineering most used to it. In addition, the
fundamental subjects of forestry are covered. As in other
engineering courses, the students are expected to obtain
practical experience during the summer vacations, this
being an essential supplement to the studies at the University.
Vancouver contains large sawmills, wood-working
plants, and plants for seasoning and preserving wood—
more, in fact, than any other place in the Province. Pulp
mills, logging operations and extensive forests are within
easy reach. The advantages of location are therefore exceptional. A special feature is the affiliation of the Forest Products Laboratory of Canada, maintained at the University
by a co-operative arrangement with the Dominion Forestry
Branch. A description of the laboratory and its activities is
given on Page 237. It affords opportunities for instruction
in testing the mechanical properties of timber and other
structural materials, and facilities are now provided for
experimental and demonstration work in wood seasoning.
The University Forest
A great asset to the University site is the forest, a small
remnant of the luxurious stand that once covered the whole
peninsula. Not only does it add very much to the beauty of
the surroundings, but it is valuable as a shelter belt, a place
of recreation, and a convenient demonstration and field
study area for the departments of Forestry, Botany and
Zoology. Courses in Applied Science
191
The forest is in the form of a long narrow belt on the
western side of the site, flanking Marine Drive for nearly
a mile, and containing over 85 acres. In composition it is
typical of the lowland stands of the southern coast, and all
the principal species of trees and shrubs of the region are
represented, including specimens of the old trees as well as
a large amount of young growth of different ages.
A small forest nursery is being developed and used for
experimental and demonstration work in silviculture and
also to provide planting stock for the forest.
Fourth Year
Subject
3 a
Qft.
First Term
O Q.L
3*
§|
Second Term
I*
.3*
3»
Essay	
F.E. 1 General Forestry....
F.E. 2 Mensuration*	
F.E. 3 Protection	
F.E. 4 Finance	
Bot. 1 General Botany	
Bot. 5 (b) Dendrology	
E.E. 1 Fundamentals	
C.E. 8 (a) Foundations	
CE. 9 Structural Design..
C.E. 10 Strength Material;
C.E. 11 Railways	
C.E. 13 Mapping	
C.E. 14 Surveying	
CE. 12 Hydraulics	
182
233
1
233
1
234
234
214
2
215
1
250
2
223
1
223
224
2
224
2
225
225
2
225
1
•Also 1 week Meld Work immediately after spring examinations. 192
Faculty of Appued Scdsnce
Fifth Year
Subject
Qft.
First Term
Second Term
*i
M 0.
Laboratory
Hours per
Week.
si
Ill
J"
Essay.	
F.E. 6 Technology	
F.E. 6 Organization	
F.E. 7 History	
F.E. 8 Silviculture*	
F.E. 9 Lumbering	
F.E. 10 Logging*	
F.E. 11 Milling*	
F.E. 12 Products and Marketing..
Bot. 6 (b) Pathology   1.	
Zool. 7 Entomology    /	
Bot. 7 (a) Ecology	
C.E. 17 Structural Design	
C.E. 18 Economics	
C.E. 19 Law	
M.E. 6 (b) Steam Lab ._
182
234
2
3
2
235
1
1
235
1
1
235
2
2
236
2
1
236
i\
4
-1
236
237
21
216
267
1
216
i
2
226
l
3
1
226
2
2
227
l
1
248
....
•Field trips are required in these courses and students should be prepared for a total expense which should not exceed $20 each.
VI.     Geological Engineering
This course is designed to meet the requirements of students who intend to enter Geology as a profession, and such
students are strongly advised to take this particular course
of training.
It gives a broad training not only in Geology, but also
in the sciences of Biology, Chemistry, Physics, and Mathematics, which are extensively applied in the solution of
geological problems. The engineering subjects are useful
not only to the Mining and Consulting Geologist and the
Geological Surveyor, but to the Geologist engaged in original research in any branch of the science.
The course therefore furnishes a foundation for the professions of Mineralogist, Geological Surveyor, Mining Geologist, Consulting Geologist, Palaeontologist, Geographer,
etc., and is useful for those who will be in any way connected with the discovery or development of the natural
resources of the country. Courses in Applied Science
193
As a supplement to the work in the classroom, laboratory and field during the session, the student is expected to
obtain practical experience during the summer vacation.
Students are advised to become student members of the
Canadian Institute of Mining and Metallurgy.
Fourth Year
Subject
First Term
A op
Second Term
ft.
IP
Essay _ _	
Geol. 2 Mineralogy-	
Geol. 4 Structural	
Geol. 5 Regional	
Chem. 4 Theoretical _
Min. 1 Metal Mining	
Met. 5 Fire Assaying	
Met. 1 General	
Ore Dressing 1 General...
Zool.l	
C.E. 13 Mapping	
Chem. 5* Adv. Analysis-
Met. 6* Wet Assaying...I
182
240
241
241
218
257
259
258
260
267
225
218
260
2
3
3
2
2
2
1
2
•Either Chem. 5 or Met. 6 must be taken.
Fifth Year
Subject
a..
31
qft.
First Term
r
III
2*
Second Term
II
III
Essay _	
Geol. 6 Palaeontology	
Geol. 7 Petrology	
Geol. 8 Economic	
C.E. 18 Engr. Economics....
Geol. 9 Mineralography.	
Geol. 10 Field.	
Min. 2 Coal and Placer	
Min. 3 Metal Mining	
Min. 5 Surveying	
Mat. 2 Smelting	
Ore Dressing 1 __	
Ore Dressing 2 Laboratory..
Thesis	
182
241
241
242
226
242
243
257
257
268
259
260
260 194 Faculty of Applied Scdince
VII.    Mechanical Engineering
The course in Mechanical Engineering has been designed
to give the student a thorough knowledge of the theory and
application of those basic subjects which are essential in this
branch of Engineering.
With this in view stress has been laid upon such subjects
as Mathematics, Physics, Applied Mechanics, Strength of
Materials, Applied Thermodynamics and Hydraulics.
Graduates of this course are therefore qualified to enter
upon any of the many specialized branches of this profession, especially in British Columbia, whose rapid industrial
development demands Mechanical Engineers prepared to
attack a great diversity of problems.
Although fundamentally general in character, the course
embodies design of prime movers; mechanical and hydraulic
machinery design; power plant operation and design; and
the testing of engines and power plants, thus giving sufficient specialized training in Mechanical Engineering to enable students to enter the field of design or research should
they so desire.
Students following this course are given a general course
in the fundamentals of Electrical Engineering. Courses in Applied Science
195
Fourth Year
Subject
n
ft.
First Term
IS*
Second Term
5 o|S
*CE. 10 Strength of Materials	
*M.E. 3 Kinematics	
•M.E. 4 Dynamics of Machines.	
•M.E. 5 Machine Design—	
M.E. 5 (a) Problems in Materials
and Design _	
*M.E. 7 Heat Engines	
•M.E. 13 Physical Treatment of
a^JL 6l*&1s
E.E. 2 andl~3 Electrical D C and
AC Technology _	
•C.E. 12 Hydraulics	
•Math. 8 Advanced Calculus or  /
Math 9 Differentail Equations    j
fM.E. 2 (b) Shop ^
•Essay _ _	
224
246
246
246
2
2
2
2
8
2
2
2
2
247
248
"3
1
3
3
249
1
2
1
252
225
3
1
4
3
3
1
244
246
182
3
2
3
•Prerequisite for Mechanical students entering the Fifth Year.
■(Optional. s.  ^
Fifth Year
Subject
S:
■3 9
oi J?
a*
First Term
Si
Oft,.'
JW
n
i>
5
i
i
i
3
2
o
5
1
1
....
2
2
5
3
....
Z
~2
Second Term
M.E. 8 Steam Turbines	
M.E. 9 Internal Combustion Eng..
M.E. 10 Refrigeration	
fM.E. 11 Heating and Ventilation
M.E. 12 Power Plant Design	
M.E. 15 Prime Movers	
M.E. 16 Machine Design—	
M.E. 17 Mechanics of Materials...
fM.E. 18 Aeronautics	
M.E. 19 Problems in Mech. and
Elec. Eng	
E.E. 14 General	
Math. 9 Differential Equations or
Math. 8 Adv. Calculus 	
Essay _	
•M.E. (2b) Shop	
tAlternative subjects!.
•Optional.
248
248
248
249
249
250
250
250
250
250
256
244
182
246
;}
i
i
2
2
1
1 196 Faculty of Appijed Science
VIII.-IX.    Metallurgical and Mining Engineering
Modern Mining and Metallurgy cover too large a field
to cover in detail in a University course, therefore the
courses given are intended to give the students a broad training and knowledge of the fundamental, technical, economic
and social principles involved, to serve as a sufficient foundation for advancement in any branch of the work that the
student may enter after graduation. Sufficient specialized
training is given in draughting, assaying and mine surveying
to equip the student for the actual job which he is likely to
enter upon graduating.
Laboratory equipment is sufficient to give a thorough
laboratory drilling in Assaying, Ore Dressing, Pyrometry
and Metallurgical Analysis.
Coal, Iron and Steel are covered in general courses and
specialization is chiefly in non-ferrous mining and metallurgy, with particular reference to British Columbia conditions.
Students are expected to spend their vacations at practical works in connection with mining or metallurgy and
are required to do so between the fourth and fifth year as
an essential part of their course, without which a degree will
not be granted.
Vancouver is conveniently located in proximity to coal
and metal mining districts, and is an important mining
centre. Students and graduates have normally little trouble
in getting positions, through the generous co-operation of
the mining companies in the Province.
Students are advised to become student members of the
Canadian Institute of Mining and Metallurgy. Courses in Applied Science
197
VIII.    Metallurgical Engineering
Fourth Year
to
si
First Term
Second Term
Subject
h
IF
ii
P
h
ill
3*
Essay   '.	
Economics 1 (Arts) 	
182
232
228
224
225
225
248
240
250
257
260
258
259
260
'"£
"~i
i
2
2
2l
1
2
1
3
3
"3
2
2
"5
3
3
1
2
1
2
2
2
1
2
....
C.E. 9 Elem. Design _	
CE. 10 Str. of Materials	
3
3
C.E. 12 Hydraulics...._	
CE. 13 Mapping	
3
3
M.E. 6 (b) Laboratory...-	
Geol. 2 Mineralogy	
3
2
E.E. 1 General	
2
Min. 1 Metal Mining	
Ore Dressing 1 General	
Met. 1 General	
Met. 5 Fire Assay	
Met. 6 Wet Assay	
3
FrFTH Year
Subject
&&
First Term
IK
j«
Second Term
ill
Essay ..	
Geol. 9 Mineralography.	
Geol. 8 Economics	
C.E. 18 Engr. Economics...
Chem. 8 Electro-	
Ore Dressing 2 Laboratory
Min. 3 Metal Mining.	
Met. 2 Smelting	
Met. 3 Calculations	
Met. 4 Analysis	
Ore Dressing 1 	
182
242
242
226
219
260
257
259
259
259
260
IX.    Mining Engineering
Fourth Year
As in Metallurgical Engineering.   (See Page 197.) 198
Faculty of Applied Science
Fifth Year
Subject
a..
First Term
8|
>.»
-I
3«
ii
Second Term
Essay _  	
Geol. 7 Petrology	
Geol. 8 Economics	
C.E. 18 Engr. Economics-.
Met. 2 Smelting _.
Ore Dressing 2 Laboratory.
Min. 2 Coal and Placer	
Min. 3 Metal Mining	
Min. 4 Machinery 	
Min. 5 Surveying	
Min. 7 Methods	
Min. 6 Design	
Ore Dressing 1 	
182
241
242
226
259
260
257
257
258
258
258
258
260
2
3
2
2
"2
2
2
1
4 2
1 3
2
2
9
w 2
2
2
-        "l
3
1
Short Courses in Mining
In place of the short day-time courses in Mining given
at the University in previous years, Short Courses in Mining
Subjects will be given each year as night classes in connection with the British Columbia Chamber of Mines and the
Vancouver School Board. Classes are held on Monday and
Thursday evenings and include lectures on Mining, Smelting, Ore Dressing, Geology and Mineralogy, with practical
laboratory work in Mineralogy. These courses usually begin
about November 15 th and continue until the end of February.
The classes are open to prospectors, business men and
any others interested. A fee of $5.00 is charged for the full
courses, and registration should be made at the office of the
Chamber of Mines, 402 Pender St. W., Vancouver, B. C.
Correspondence in regard to the courses and applications
for registration, accompanied by fee, should be addressed to
the Chamber of Mines. Courses in Applied Science 199
X.    Nursing and Health
1. Nursing A.—A five-year undergraduate course. (See
below.)
2. Nursing B.—A graduate course of one academic year
in Public Health Nursing.   (See Page 204.)
3. Nursing C.—A graduate course of one academic year
in Teaching and Supervision in Schools of Nursing. (See
Page 205.)
4. A double course for the combined degrees of B.A.
and B.A.Sc. (Nursing).   (See Page 208.)
Registration for these courses will be subject to the general University Regulations (see Pages 46-49) and to the
special requirements of the Department.
All regulations are subject to change from year to year,
and subjects or courses may be modified during the year as
the Faculty may deem advisable.
Nursing A (Five-year Undergraduate Course)
This is a five-year combined course leading to the Degree
of B.A. Sc. (Nursing) and to the Diploma in Nursing of an
associated hospital. It is given by the University in cooperation with the Schools of Nursing of associated hospitals, which means those hospitals that have signified their
willingness to supply the professional part of the course,
and have received the approval of the University Senate for
that purpose. Up to the present time the Vancouver General
Hospital is the only hospital which has entered into association with the University to this end.
The course is open to applicants who meet the general
requirements mentioned above, and who, in the opinion of
the Department, are personally fitted for the profession of
nursing. In addition they must satisfy the entrance requirements of the associated Hospital Schools of Nursing; the
individual applicant must make her arrangements for admission to the associated hospital directly with the Superintendent of Nurses and in advance of the opening of the
University term. 200 Faculty of Applied Science
Nurses who have graduated from a hospital that is in
affiliation with this University or otherwise approved of by
the Senate, may be awarded the degree on complying with
the following conditions:
1. They shall have matriculated.
2. They shall take, or shall have taken, the full academic training laid down for this course. At least one
year of such training shall be, or shall have been,
taken in the University of British Columbia.
3. Except under special circumstances, the course shall
be entered upon within two years of the time of graduating as a nurse.
The aim of the five-year combined course is to afford a
broader education than can be given by the Hospital Schools
of Nursing alone, and thus to build a sound foundation for
those who desire to fit themselves for Teaching and Supervision in Schools of Nursing or for Public Health Nursing
service.
The First and Second Years (of the Five-Year course),
or the First, Second and Third Years (of the Double
Course), which are academic, give the students an introduction to general cultural subjects and a foundation in the
sciences underlying the practice of nursing. Between the
Second and Third Years (of the Five-Year Course), or between the Fird and Fourth Years (of the Double Course),
a probationary period of four months will be spent in an
Associated Hospital School of Nursing. The Third and
Fourth Years (in the Five-Year course) and the Fourth and
Fifth Years (in the Double Course) are devoted to professional training in an associated Hospital, and are planned to
afford experience and training in the care of the sick, and
to develop the skill, observation and judgment necessary to
the efficient practice of nursing. The Final Year (which is
the same for the Five-Year and the Double Course) affords
two alternative courses, one in Public Health Nursing Courses in Applied Science
201
(Nursing B) and the second in Teaching and Supervision in
Schools of Nursing (Nursing C).
First Year (Academic)
a..
3|
a*
First Term
Second Term
Subject
ft
SI
h
ft
■3"
English 1 (a)	
English 1 (b)	
Choice of Mathematics l..\   	
138
139
154
123
158
149  .
125
116
110
263
2
2
3
3
3
2
1
3
2
2
2
3
3
3
2
1
....
or Latin 1  1	
or French 1 [ - „	
or History 1, 2 or 4—   .]	
Economics! 	
Chemistry 1	
"s
Biology 1	
2
History of Nursing	
Probationary Period (Hospital)
It is expected that the hospital probationary period will
be taken during the summer following the first two academic years (or in the Double Course following the first
three academic years). The students must meet all admission requirements of the associated Hospital Schools of
Nursing (which requirements each student will learn upon
making application to the School). Among other requirements students must have attained such age as is fixed by the
School—in the Vancouver General Hospital School of
Nursing the student must have reached her nineteenth
birthday before she may enter upon the Hospital Course.
During this probationary period the student will undergo rigid examination as to fitness in physique, temperament
and character for the practice of nursing. This will afford
the Hospital School of Nursing information upon which to
judge the student's qualifications for the profession of
nursing. It also enables the student to determine whether
she feels herself personally fitted or inclined to proceed in 202
Faculty of Applied Science
the course. The Hospital Schools of Nursing reserve the
right to reject candidates who do not reach the required
standards.
Second Year (Academic)
Subject
First Term
,2 lis
,3"
Second Term
h
3&M
ggS
o flfe.
English2	
Zoology 1	
Physics 1 or 2	
Philosophy 1 a _	
Bacteriology 1	
Bacteriology 2	
Anatomy and Physiology
139
170
165
162
108
109
263
Third and Fourth Years (Professional)
The Third and Fourth Years (or the Fourth and Fifth
Years of the Double Course) will be spent in practical training in an associated Hospital School of Nursing. Students in
these years are required to register with the University even
though during this portion of the course they are in residence at the Hospital. During these professional years students are subject to the authority and are under the direction
of the officers of the associated Hospital Schools of Nursing.
The required professional period is twenty-eight months, in
which is included the probationary period of four months.
Full maintenance and such allowance as the associated Hospital authorities may designate are provided, and a yearly
vacation is granted at the convenience of the Superintendent of the School of Nursing. A registration fee may be required by the associated Hospital.
The following is an outline of the course as given in the
Hospital as present associated with the University (the
Vancouver General Hospital). Courses in Applied Science 203
Instruction in the following Nursing subjects is given
by members of the medical staff and by qualified nurse instructors: Introductory Ethics of Nursing; Practical Nursing Procedures; Elementary Nutrition and Cookery; Drugs
and Solutions; Materia Medica; Surgical Nursing; Medical
Nursing (including charting); Gynecological Nursing;
Nursing of Communicable Diseases; Obstetrical Nursing;
Diet in Disease; Pediatric Nursing and Infant Feeding;
Nursing in Diseases of the Eye, Ear, Nose and Throat;
Nursing in Tuberculosis; Urinalysis; Introduction to
Anaesthesia; Introduction to Physiotherapy and X-Ray.
This schedule is open to change at any time, at the discretion of the associated Hospital School of Nursing.
The period of Hospital service includes actual nursing
experience in the following departments:
Medical Operating Room
Surgical Eye, Ear, Nose and Throat
Gynecological Obstetrical
Pediatric and Orthopxdic Infectious
Observation and Neurological Tuberculosis
Infants Diet Kitchen
In order to give the student an understanding of the
tuberculosis situation in the Province, and of the value of
sanatorium treatment, an arrangement has been made between the Vancouver General Hospital and the Provincial
Sanatorium at Tranquille, and an opportunity will be given
to as many of the students as possible to receive instruction
in the nursing care of tuberculosis in this latter institution,
in lieu of the course in the tuberculosis department of the
Hospital.
The Social Service Department of the Hospital offers
opportunity for a four weeks' service to a limited number
of students. Selection will be made by the Superintendent
of Nurses from the students desirous of receiving this course. 204
Faculty of Applied Science
Fifth Year (Academic and Professional)
The Fifth Year will be spent in either Nursing B or
Nursing C, at the option of the student. The selection between these courses need not be made until registering with
the University for the Fifth Year.
Nursing B (Public Health Nursing)
A graduate course of one academic year, including work
in the University and appropriate field work under the
supervision of the various associated Public Health organizations. This course leads to a Certificate in Public Health
Nursing.
Nursing B
Subject
For Details
See Page:
Total Hours
Lctures.
Total Hours
Laboratory
Preventable Diseases.	
263
264
264
. 264
264
264
264
264
264
265
265
265
265
265
265
266
266
165
137
266
266
266
17
17
8
9
11
17
4
4
16
51
2
34
17
13
6
2
51
51
18
18
To run c
with   the
work.
Epidemiology	
Tuberculosis	
Mental Hygiene	
*
Infant Welfare	
Public Health	
Public Health Administration	
Public Health Organizations	
Vital Statistics	
Principles and Practice of Public
Health Nursing	
Urban Visiting Nursing Programme ....
Health Education	
Contemporary Nursing Problems	
School Hygiene  	
Social Case Work _	
Hospital Social Service	
Philosophy 9	
(2) School Administration and Law
Public Speaking and Parliamentary
Procedure	
Sociology.         . .
Motor Mechanics	
10
Field Work	
oncurrently
•Hours to be arranged. Courses in Applied Science
205
Nursing C (Teaching and Supervision)
A graduate course of one academic year, including work
in the University, and opportunity for practice teaching
and for the observation of Training School administration
and ward supervision in associated Hospitals. This course
leads to a Certificate in Teaching and Supervision in Schools
of Nursing.
Nursing C
Subject
For Details
See Page:
Total Hours
Lectures.
Total Houn
Laboratory.
Preventable Diseases _	
Mental Hygiene 	
Bacteriology	
Contemporary Nursing Problems	
Teaching in Schools of Nursing	
Principles of Supervision in Schools
of Nursing.	
(1) Educational Psychology.	
1. Introduction to the Study of
Education	
Public Speaking and Parliamentary
Procedure	
Sociology	
Social Case Work- _	
Electives from Nursing B or from
related Science Courses (to make
up three units)	
Field Work	
263
264
264
265
265
265
266
135
266
266
266
17
9
17
51
34
51
51
18
18
6
Below
•Hours to be arranged.
Field Work in Nursing B and C
The academic work and * field work will run concurrently throughout the two University terms, with the exception of the last weeks of the Second Term, which, in
Nursing B, will be devoted entirely to field work under the
supervision of the Provincial Rural Public Health Nursing
•That students may have some idea of the probable expenses of the
course, they are reminded that in addition to the usual expenses of a University course, there will be additional expenses in connection with the term
of approximately eight weeks field work. The sum of one hundred dollars is
mentioned as probably the maximum amount required to cover the expense
of board and lodging while with the rural nursing organization, and of
transportation. 206 Faculty of Applied Science
organizations and, in Nursing C, to such Hospital Service
as may be arranged by the Associated Hospitals. Field work
for some students may have to be delayed until after the
close of the University year.
During the period spent in the Hospital, or with a Public
Health or Social Welfare organization, all students will be
subject to the authority, and under the direction, of the
officers of the Associated Hospital School of Nursing or of
the Organization.
Through the courtesy and co-operation of the following
agencies, arrangements have been made for supervised field
work or observation:
FOR NURSING B
Vancouver General Hospital.—The Social Service Department, Mrs. Laura B. Gordon, Director.
The Provincial Department of Health.—Dr. H. E.
Young, Provincial Health Officer.
The Victorian Order of Nurses.—Miss M. Duffield, District Superintendent. /
The Medical Department of the Vancouver Public
Schools.—Dr. H. White, Medical Director; Miss E. Breeze,
Director, Department of School Hygiene.
The Department of Child Hygiene, City of Vancouver.
—Dr. J. W. McIntosh, City Health Officer; Miss L. Sanders,
Supervisor, Department of Child Hygiene.
The Children's Aid Society of Vancouver.—Miss Zella
Collins, Manager.
The Family Welfare Bureau of Greater Vancouver.—
Miss Mary McPhedran, Director.
The Government Venereal Disease Clinic.—Dr. J.
Ewart Campbell, Director; Miss E. V. Cameron, Nurse in
charge.
The Provincial Mental Hospital, Essondale.—Dr. A. L.
Crease, Medical Superintendent; Miss Hicks, Superintendent of Nurses. Courses in Applied Science 207
FOR NURSING C
The Vancouver General Hospital.—Dr. A. K. Haywood, Superintendent; Miss Grace Fairley, Superintendent
of Nurses.
Admission to Nursing B and C
The courses are open to students of the five-year course,
and also to nurses who have graduated from recognized
Schools of Nursing, who are eligible for registration in
British Columbia and who are personally fitted for their
proposed work. For Nursing B applicants shall have received adequate instruction and practical experience in the
nursing care of communicable diseases and of diseases of infancy and childhood. For Nursing C it is required that
applicants shall fulfil the University educational requirement of Junior Matriculation.
The enrolment of graduate nurses for the certificate
course, Nursing B, may have to be restricted temporarily
owing to the fact that opportunities for Field Work are at
present limited. In the selection of candidates consideration
will be given firstly to residents of the Province, and secondly to those whose preparation (academic and professional)
best fits them for the special branch for which they wish to
register. The certificate course, Nursing C, will only be
offered to graduate nurses when at least two candidates
enrol.
Applications for admission to the courses of Nursing B
or C should be sent to the Department of Nursing and
Health not later than July 15 th of the current year. A certificate of good health and physical condition, signed by a
regular practising physician, must be presented with the applications.
As a preparation for Nursing B, nurses without previous
Public Health Nursing service are advised to obtain at least
one month's experience in a visiting nursing agency, or
other public health or social agency approved by the Department. While not obligatory, this month is most im- 208 Faculty of Applied Scdence
portant, and various Field Agencies—the Provincial Board
of Health, the Vancouver General Hospital Social Service
Department and the Victorian Order of Nurses, have each
agreed to receive nurses for this month in so far as it can be
arranged. Inquiry should be made at as early a date as possible to the Department of Nursing and Health that arrangement may be made with the Field Agencies; the
nurses will be responsible for their own maintenance, and
will receive no remuneration during this period.
Nurses registering for Nursing C who have had no experience in family case-work, social service or visiting nursing, are also advised to secure this month's experience with
one of the Public Health organizations if possible.
For the convenience of graduate nurses already engaged
in nursing, who wish to take Nursing B or C, but are unable
to take a year off, provision is made that either one may be
taken as a part-time course over a period of two or more
years. Nurses registering in this way must fulfil the same
requirements as the regular-course students.
DOUBLE COURSES FOR THE DEGREES OF
B.A. AND B.A.Sc.
I.   Arts and Science, and Nursing:
First Year Second Year
English 1 English 2
Mathematics 1 Language 2
Language 1 Chemistry 1 or
Physics 1 or 2 or Physics 1 or 2
Chemistry 1 Zoology 1
Biology 1 Economics 1 or
History of Nursing History 1 or
Philosophy 1
Anatomy and Physiology
Third Year
Bacteriology 1 and 2 4 units
Sociology or Public Health 3 units Courses in Applied Science 209
Nine additional units to be chosen in accordance with
Calendar regulations, not more than three of which may
be chosen from First and Second Year Subjects.       9 units
Fourth and Fifth Years (Professional)
The degree of B.A. is granted upon completion of the
Fifth Year. The diploma from the Hospital School of Nursing is also awarded upon the completion of the Fifth Year.
Sixth Year
As in the present Fifth Year—i.e., a choice between the
two courses, Nursing B and Nursing C. The degree of B.A.
Sc. (Nursing) is granted upon completion of the Sixth
Year. k^
II.   Arts and Science, and Engineering:
Two complete years in Arts and Science and four complete years in Applied Science are required for a Double
Degree. Consequently students must not select courses in
Arts and Science that are included in the Applied Science
years, on account of time-table difficulties.
The requirements for the first and second years are as
set forth in the Calendar for the first and second years of
Arts (Pages 79-81) except as follows:
1. Physics 1 or 2 and Chemistry 1 must be taken. The
passing grade for each of these subjects and for Algebra, Geometry and Trigonometry is fifty per cent.
(See also, admission to Applied Science, Page 76.)
Students are recommended to take Mathematics 2
(c)  (calculus).
2. Biology 1, Chemistry 2, Geology 1, Mathematics 2
(a) and 2 (b), and Physics 3 or 5 or 6 may not be
taken. These subjects are covered later in Applied
Science.
3. A course in German is recommended (and, for those
intending to enter Geological or Civil Engineering,
French also). Two years in the language elected is
necessary to count towards a degree. 210 Faculty of Applied Science
The third, fourth, fifth and sixth years of the double
course correspond to the second, third, fourth and fifth
years of Applied Science. The degree of B.A. is conferred on
completing the fifth year of this course.
COURSES LEADING TO THE DEGREE
OF M.A.Sc.
1. Candidates for the degree of Master of Applied Science must hold a B.A.Sc. degree from this University, or
its equivalent.
2. A graduate of another university applying for permission to enter as a graduate student is required to submit
with his application an official statement of his graduation,
together with a certificate of the standing gained in the
several subjects of his course. The Faculty will determine
the standing of such a student in this University. The fee
for examination of certificates is $2.00.
3. Candidates with approved degrees and academic records who proceed to the Master's degree shall be required:
(a) To spend one year in resident graduate study;
or
(b) (At the discretion of the Faculty concerned):
(i.) To do two or more years of private
work under the supervision of the
University, such work to be equivalent to one year of graduate study; or
(ii.) To do one year of private work under
University supervision and one term
of resident graduate study, the total of
such work to be equivalent to one year
of resident graduate study.
4. One major and one minor shall be required and a
thesis must be prepared on some approved topic in the major subject. (Two typewritten copies of each thesis shall be
submitted. See special circular of "Instructions for the
Preparation of Masters' Theses.") Examinations and Advancement 211
The choice of and relationship between major and minor
subjects, and the amount of work in each, or of tutorial
work, must be approved by each of the departments concerned, by the Committee on graduate studies, and by the
Dean.
In the case of students who have completed the Teacher
Training Course, First or Second Class standing in each of
(1) History and Principles of Education, and in (2) Educational Psychology, is accepted as equivalent to a Minor
for an M.A.Sc. degree, subject in each case to the consent
of the Head of the Department in which the student wishes
to take his Major.
5. Examinations, written or oral, or both, shall be required, and standing equivalent to at least 75 per cent, in
the major subjects and 65 per cent, in the minor.
6. Application for admission as a graduate student shall
be made to the Registrar by October 1st. For fees see pages
49-54.
EXAMINATIONS AND ADVANCEMENT
1. Examinations are held in December and in April.
December examinations will be held in all subjects of the
Second and Third Years, and are obligatory for all students
of these. December examinations in subjects of the Fourth
and Fifth Years, excepting those subjects that are completed
before Christmas, shall be optional with the Departments
concerned. Applications for special consideration on account of illness or domestic affliction must be submitted to
the Dean not later than two days after the close of the examination period. In cases where illness is the plea for absence
from examinations, a medical certificate must be presented
on the appropriate form which may be obtained from the
Dean's office, or if the illness occurs at the University the
student may report to the Nurse, Auditorium Bldg., who
may furnish the necessary certificate.
2. Candidates, in order to pass, must obtain at least 50
per cent, in each subject (For First Year see p. 180). The 212 Faculty of Appijed Science
grades are as follows: First Class, an average of 80 per cent,
or over; Second Class, 65 to 80 per cent.; Passed, 50 to 65
per cent. But in the First and Second Years of the course in
Nursing and Health the requirements for passing are the
same as those for the First and Second Years in Arts and
Science, namely
(a) 50 per cent, or over in each paper, or
(b) 60 per cent, on the total with a minimum of 40 per
cent, in each paper, provided the whole examination is taken at one time.
3. If a student's general standing in the final examinations of any year is sufficiently high, the Faculty may grant
him supplementary examinations in the subject or subjects
in which he has failed. Notice will be sent to all students to
whom such examinations have been granted.
A request for the re-reading of an answer paper must be
forwarded to the Registrar WITHIN FOUR WEEKS after
the results of the examinations are announced. Each applicant must state clearly his reasons for making such a request
in view of the fact that the paper of a candidate who makes
less than a passing mark in a subject is read at least a second
time before results are tabulated and announced. A re-reading of an examination paper will be granted only with the
consent of the Head of the Department concerned. The fee
for re-reading is $2.00.
4. Supplemental examinations will be held on September 19th, 20th, 21st and 22nd. Special examinations will
not be granted, except by special permission* of the Faculty
and on payment of a fee of $7.50 per paper, and»then only
during the third week in October or the second week of
January.
5. Applications for supplemental examinations, accom-
companied by the necessary fees (see Schedule of Fees, Pages
49-54) must be in the hands of the Registrar at least two
weeks before the date set for the examinations.
'Special permission of the Faculty is granted only under exceptional
circumstances, such as illness, or as outlined on Page 179. Examinations and Advancement 213
6. No student may enter the third or higher year with
supplemental examinations still outstanding in respect of
more than 4 units of the preceding year, or with any supplemental examination outstanding in respect of the work
of an earlier year unless special permission* to do so is
granted by Faculty (see regulation on page 181). Students
in Nursing A must remove all outstanding supplemental
examinations before entering their third year.
7. No student will be allowed to take any subject unless
he has previously passed, or secured exemption, in all prerequisite subjects. If any subject has another which is concurrent with it, both must be taken in the same session.
8. A student who is required to repeat his year will not
be allowed to take any work in a higher year. Such a student need not repeat, however, any of the following subjects: in which he has made 65 per cent.: Civil Engineering
2, 5, 7, 13, or Mechanical Engineering 1 or 2a.
9. A student who fails twice in the work of the same
year may, upon the recommendation of the Faculty, be required by the Senate to withdraw from the University.
10. Any student whose academic record, as determined
by. the tests and examinations of the first term of the Second
or Third Year, is found to be unsatisfactory, may, upon the
recommendation of the Faculty, be required by the Senate
to discontinue attendance at the University for the remainder of the session. Such a student will not be re-admitted
to the University as long as any supplemental examinations
are outstanding.
11. Term essays and examination papers will be refused
as passing mark if they are noticeably deficient in English.
12. Honours will be granted in any one of the last four
years to students who obtain at least 50 per cent, in each
subject and 80 per cent, on the whole at the annual examinations of that year.
•Special permission of the Faculty is granted only under exceptional
circumstances, such as illness, or as outlined on Page 179. 214 Faculty of Applied Science
13. Honour graduate standing will be granted to those
who obtain honours in the final year and who have passed
any one of the three preceding years with at least 50 per
cent, in each subject and 75 per cent, on the whole.
DEPARTMENTS IN APPLIED SCIENCE
N.B.—The following subjects may be modified during
the year as the Senate may deem advisable.
Department of Botany
Professor: A. H. Hutchinson.
Associate Professor: Frank Dickson.
Associate Professor: John Davidson.
Biology
1. Introductory Biology.—The course is introductory
to more advanced work in Botany or Zooloy; also to courses
closely related to Biological Science, such as Agriculture,
Forestry, Medicine.
The fundamental principles of Biology; the interrelationships of plants and animals; life processes; the cell and
division of labour; life-histories; relation to environment.
Text-book: Smallwood, Text-book of Biology, Lea &
Febiger, 1924.
The course is prerequisite to all other courses in Biology.
One lecture and one period of two hours laboratory per
week.
2. Principles of Genetics.—As in Arts. See Page 110.
3. General Physiology.—As in Arts. See Page 111.
Botany
1. General Botany.—A course including a general survey of the several fields of Botany and introductory to more
specialized courses in Botany.
Prerequisite: Biology 1.
Text-book: Coulter, Barnes & Cowles, Text-book of
Botany. Vol. I., University of Chicago Press.
This course is prerequisite to all courses in Botany except the Evening Course. Partial credit (2 units) toward Botany 215
Botany may be obtained through the Evening Course. (See
Page 115.)
Two lectures and one period of two hours laboratory
per week.
2. Morphology.—As in Arts. See Page 111.
3. Plant Physiology.—As in Arts. See Page 1.12.
4. Histology.—A study of the structure and development of plants; methods of killing, fixing, embedding, sectioning, staining, mounting, drawing, reconstructing. Use
of microscope, camera lucida; photo-micrographic apparatus.
Text-book: W. C. Stevens, Plant Anatomy, P. Blakiston.
Prerequisite: Botany 1.
One lecture and two periods of three hours laboratory
per week. Second Term.
5. Systematic Botany.
5. (a) Economic Flora.—An introduction to the classification of plants through a study of selected families of
economic plants of British Columbia; useful for food, fodder, medicine and industrial arts; harmful to crops and
stock. Weeds and poisonous plants. Methods of control.
Prerequisite: Botany 1.
Text-books: Jepson, Economic Plants of California,
Jepson University of California. Thomas and Sifton, Poisonous Plants and Weed Seeds, University of Toronto Press.
Two lectures and two hours laboratory per week. First
Term.
5. (b) Dendrology.—A study of the forest trees of
Canada, the common shrubs of British Columbia, the important trees of the United States which are not native to
Canada. Emphasis on the species of economic importance.
Identification, distribution, relative importance, construction of keys.
Prerequisite: Botany 1.
Text-books: Mortan & Lewis, Native Trees of Canada,
Dominion Forestry Branch,  Ottawa.   Sudworth, Forest 216 Faculty of Applied Science
Trees of the Pacific Slope, Superintendent of Documents,
Washington, D.C; Davidson and Abercrombie, Conifers,
Junipers and Yew, T. F. Unwin.
One lecture and one period of two or three hours laboratory or field work per week.
5. (c) Descriptive Taxonomy.—As in Arts. See Page
113.
6. (b) Forest Pathology.—Nature, identification and
control of the more important tree-destroying fungi and
other plant parasites of forests.
Text-book: Rankin, Manual of Tree Diseases, Macmillan.
One lecture and one period of two hours laboratory per
week during one-half of one term.
6. (c) Plant Pathology (Elementary). — A course
similar to 6(a), but including more details concerning the
diseases studied.
Text-book: Heald, Manual of Plant Diseases, McGraw-
Hill.
Prerequisite: Botany 1.
Two lectures and four hours laboratory a week. Second
Term.
7. (a) Forest Ecology and Geography.—The inter-relations of forests and their environment; the biological
characteristics of important forest trees; forest associations;
types and regions; physiography.
Reference books: Whitford and Craig, Forests of British Columbia, Ottawa; Zon and Sparhawk, Forests of the
World, McGraw-Hill; Hardy, The Geography of Plants,
Oxford University Press.
One lecture per week during term. Field trips and laboratory work during the session amounting to thirty hours,
one period per week. Chemistry 217
Department of Chemistry
Professor: R. H. Clark.
Professor of Analytical Chemistry: E. H. Archibald.
Associate Professor: W. F. Sever.
Associate Professor: M. J. Marshall.
Assistant Professor: William Ure.
1. General Chemistry.—This course is arranged to give
a full exposition of the general principles involved in modern Chemistry and comprises a systematic study of the
properties of the more important metallic and non-metallic
elements and their compounds, and the application of
Chemistry in technology.
Text-book: Smith's College Chemistry, revised by Kendall, 1929 Edn., Century Co.^
Three lectures and one period of three hours laboratory
per week. ^1
2. Qualitative and Quantitative Analysis.
(a) Qualitative Analysis.—During the first six weeks
of the term an additional lecture may be substituted for a
part of the laboratory work.
Text-book: A. A. Noyes, Qualitative Analysis, Macmillan.
- For reference: F. W. Millar, Elementary Theory of
Qualitative Analysis, Century Co.
Prerequisite: Chemistry 1.
One lecture and one period of three hours laboratory
per week.
(b) Quantitative Analysis.—This course embraces the
more important methods of gravimetric and volumetric
analysis.
Text-book: Engelder, Elementary Quantitative Analysis, John Wiley & Sons.
Prerequisite: Chemistry 1.
One lecture and one period of three hours laboratory
per week.
Course (b) must be preceded by Course (a). 218 Faculty of Applied Science
3. Organic Chemistry.—This introduction to the study
of the compounds of carbon will include the method preparation and a description of the more important groups of
compounds in both the fatty and the aromatic series.
Text-books: Holleman-Walker, Text-book of Organic
Chemistry, Wiley; Gattermann - Wieland, Laboratory
Methods of Organic Chemistry, Macmillan.
Two lectures and one period of three hours laboratory
per week.
4. (a) Theoretical Chemistry. — An introductory
course in the development of modern theoretical chemistry,
including a study of gases, liquids and solids, solutions, ionization and electrical conductivity, chemical equilibrium,
kinetics of reactions, thermochemistry and thermodynamics, colloids.
Text-book: Millard, Physical Chemistry for Colleges,
McGraw-Hill.
References: Noyes and Sherrill, Chemical Principles,
Macmillan. For laboratory use: Findlay, Practical Physical
Chemistry, Longmans; and Sherrill, Laboratory Experiments on Physical-Chemical Principles, Macmillan.
Prerequisites: Chemistry 2 (except for students majoring in Physics). Honor students majoring in Chemistry
should take Mathematics 10 concurrently.
Two lectures and three hours laboratory per week.
3 units
4. (b) This course is the same as Chemistry 4 (a) with
the omission of the laboratory, and is open only to students
not majoring in Chemistry. 2 units.
5. Advanced Qualitative and Quantitative Analysis,
(a)    Qualitative Analysis.—The work of this course
will include the detection and separation of the less common metals, particularly those that are important industrially, together with the analysis of somewhat complex
substances occurring in nature.
One lecture and two periods of three hours laboratory
■per week. First Term. Chemistry 219
(b) Quantitative Analysis.—The determinations made
will include the more difficult estimations in the analysis of
rocks, as well as certain constituents of steel and alloys. The
principles on which analytical chemistry is based will receive a more minute consideration than was possible in the
elementary course.
Prerequisite: Chemistry 2.
One lecture and two periods of three hours laboratory
per week. Second Term.
6. Industrial Chemistry.—Those industries which are
dependent on the facts and principles of Chemistry will be
considered in as much detail as time will permit. The lectures will be supplemented by visits to manufacturing establishments in the neighbourhood, and it is hoped that
some lectures will be given by specialists in their respective
fields.
Prerequisite: Chemistry 2 and 3.
Two lectures per week.
7. Physical Chemistry.—This course is a continuation
of Chemistry 4 and treats in more detail the kinetic theory
of gases, properties of liquids and solids, elementary thermodynamics and thermochemistry, properties of solutions,
theoretical electrochemistry, chemical equilibrium, kinetics
of reactions, radioactivity.
Books recommended: Getman, Outlines of Theoretical
Chemistry, Wiley; Noyes and Sherrill, Chemical Principles,
Macmillan; for Laboratory: Sherrill, Laboratory Experiments on Physico-Chemical Principles, Macmillan; Findlay, Practical Physical Chemistry, Longmans.
Prerequisites: Chemistry 2, 3 and 4.
Two lectures and three hours laboratory per week.
3 units.
8. Electrochemistry.—
(a) As in Arts.   (See Page 119.)
(b) Electric furnaces, electrolytic refining and deposition of metals will be studied in detail. 220 Faculty of Applied Science
Text-book: Thompson, Theoretical and Applied Electrochemistry, Macmillan.
Two lectures and three hours laboratory per week.
Second Term. ll/z units.
9. Advanced Organic Chemistry.—As in Arts. (See
Page 119.)
11. Physical Organic Chemistry.—As in Arts. (See
Page 120.)
(Given in 1933-34 and alternate years.)
12. Colloid Chemistry.—As in Arts.   (See Page 120.)
(Given in 1933-34 and alternate years.)
16. Chemical Engineering.—Theory and design of fractionating columns, condensers, multiple effect evaporators;
chamber, tunnel, drum, rotary and spray driers. Theory
and practice of technical filtration; calculation of capacity
of box filters, filter presses, centrifugals, etc. Principles of
counter current extraction.
Prerequisites: Chemistry 3 and 4.
Text-book: Walker, Lewis & McAdams, Principles of
Chemical Engineering, McGraw-Hill.
Reference books: Liddell, Handbook of Chemical Engineering, McGraw-Hill; Robinson, Elements of Practical
Distillation, McGraw-Hill.
Two letcures per week.
The following firms have kindly permitted the students
in Chemical Engineering to work one day a week in their
plants as part of their practical training:
British Columbia Electric Railway Co. (Gas Department) .
Sherwin-Williams Co. of Canada, Limited.
Royal Crown Soaps, Limited.
Imperial Oil Company, Limited.
B. C. Refractories, Limited.
Triangle Chemical Company, Limited.
Westminster Paper Mills.
Canadian Carbonate, Limited. Civil Engineering 221
17. Chemical Thermodynamics. — As in Arts. (See
Page 120.)
(Giveninl933-34 and alternate years.)
18. Advanced Inorganic Chemistry.—As in Arts. (See
Page 121.)
(Given in 1934-35 and alternate years.)
21. Chemical Kinetics.—As in Arts.   (See Page 121.)
(Given in 1934-35 and alternate years.)
Department of Civil Engineering
Professor:	
Associate Professor: £. G. Matheson.
Assistant Professor: F. A. Wilkin.
Assistant Professor: A. H. Finlay.
Assistant Professor: A. Lighthall.
Instructor: A. G. Stuart.
Instructor: E. S. Pretious.
Assistant: Archie Peebles.
1. Descriptive Geometry.—Geometrical drawing, orthographic, isometric and axometric projections.
Text-book: Armstrong, Descriptive Geometry, second
edition, Wiley.
One three-hour period per week.
Mr. Matheson, Mr. Lighthall, Mr. Stuart, Mr. Wilkin,
Mr. Peebles, Mr. Pretious.
2. Field Work 1. — Elementary surveying. Practical
problems involving the use of the chain, telemeter, compass, transit and level. Traverses, closed circuits, contour
and detail surveys. Levels for profiles, benches and contours.
Work commences immediately upon the close of spring
examinations, and consists of field work, eight hours per
day for twenty days, or equivalent.
Mr. Stuart, Mr. Peebles, Mr. Pretious.
4. Graphical Statics. — Elementary theory of structures; composition of forces; general methods involving the
force and equilibrium polygons; determination of resultants, reactions, centres of gravity, bending moments; stress 222 Faculty of Applied Science
in framed structures, cranes, towers, roof-trusses and
bridge-trusses. Algebraic check methods will be used
throughout.
Text-book: Hudson and Squire, Elements of Graphic
Statics, McGraw-Hill.
Prerequisites: Physics 6 must either precede or accompany Civil 4.
One two-hour periods per week. Mr. Finlay, Mr.
Peebles.
5. Mapping 1.—Draughting from notes obtained in
Civil 2. Maps of telemeter, compass and transit surveys.
Contour and topographical maps in convention or color.
Prerequisite: Civil 2.
One three-hour period per week. Mr. Stuart.
6. Surveying 1.—Chain and angular surveying; the
construction, adjustment and use of the transit, level, compass, stadia, minor field instruments, planimeter, and pantograph; leveling; topography; contour surveying; stadia;
railway curves; vertical curves; transition curves.
Prerequisite: Civil 2, Math. 1.
Text-book: Breed and Hosmer, Elementary Surveying,
Vol. 1., Wiley. Field Office Tables, Allen.
References:  Allen,  Curves and Earthwork;  Sullivan,
Spiral Tables, McGraw-Hill.
Two lectures per week. Mr. Stuart.
7. Field Work 2. — (a) Railway surveys, reconnaissance, preliminary and location surveys, methods of taking
topography, cross-sectioning; estimating quantities; running in easement and vertical curves, etc. The notes secured
will be used in class work for mapping and for estimating
quantities and costs.
(b) Hydrographie surveys, topography of a section of
river-bed by sounding and fixing position by transits and
sextants; the three-point problem; steam-gauging by surface and deep floats and by the current meter. Civil Engineering 223
(c) Solar and stellar observations for latitude and azimuth; adjustments of instruments; the use of plane table,
sextant and minor instruments.
Prerequisite: Civil 2 and Civil 6.
Time, same as for Civil 2.
Mr. Wilkin, Mr. Lighthall, Mr. Finlay, Mr. Matheson.
8. Foundations and Masonry.— (a) Borings; bearing
power of soils; pile and other foundations; cofferdams;
caissons; open dredging; pneumatic and freezing processes;
retaining walls; estimates of quantities and costs.
Prerequisite: Civil 4; Civil 10 must either precede or be
taken concurrently.
Text-book: Jacoby and Davis, Foundations of Bridges
and Buildings, McGraw-Hill.
One lecture and one three-hour period per week. First
Term.
Mr. Matheson.
(b) Theory of Earth Pressure; combined stresses, ellipse of stress, principal and conjugate axes, as applied to
the determination of earth pressures; Rankine's, Coulomb's,
Weyrauch's, Cain's and Rebhann's theories and solutions
for earth pressure; retaining walls; dams.
Prerequisite: Civil 4; Civil 8a must be taken with 8b
during the First Term.
References: Ketchum, Walls, Bins and Grain Elevators;
Howe, Retaining Walls for Earth; Cain, Earth Pressure,
Walls and Bins; Morley, Theory of Structures.
One lecture per week each term. Mr. Matheson.
9. Structural Design 1.—Problems in draughting, illustrating designs in structural engineering; estimates of quantities and costs; preparation of plans.
Text-book: Conklin, Structural Draughting and Elementary Design, Wiley; Carnegie, Pocket Companion, Carnegie Steel Co.
Prerequisite: First Term of Civil 10.
One lecture and one three-hour period. Second Term.
Mr. Matheson. 224 Faculty of Applied Science
10. Strength of Materials.—(a) A thorough introduction to the fundamental principles dealing with the strength
of materials; stress, deformation, elasticity and resilience;
the application of the laws of derived curves to the construction of load, shear, moment, inclination and deflection diagrams, fibre stress, deflection of simple, cantilever, and continuous beams under any loading; riveted joints; torsion;
columns; combined stresses; longitudinal shear; reinforced
concrete; special beams.
(b) Laboratory.—Proportioning of concrete and testing of cement, concrete, timber and steel specimens to determine the strength and elasticity of these materials.
About one-half of the laboratory time will be set aside
for the solution of problems in investigation and design.
Text-book: Maurer and Withey, Strength of Materials,
Wiley.
Reference: Swain, Strength of Materials; Morley,
Strength of Materials.
Prerequisites: Physics 6, Civil 4 and 31.
Two lectures and one three-hour period per week.
Mr. Lighthall, Mr. Pretious.
Notes—The laboratory testing is performed in the Forest Products Laboratories, under the supervision of Superintendent Brown and Mr. Lighthall.
11. Transportation 1. Railways. — The inception of
railway projects; reconnaissance, preliminary and location;
grade problems; grades, curvature and distance and their
effects upon operating costs and revenue; velocity and
pusher grades; adjustment of grades for unbalanced traffic; construction; railway economics, traffic, revenue,
branch lines.
Prerequisite: Civil 6 and 7.
Text-book: Williams, Design of Railway Location,
Wiley.
Reference: Allen, Railroads, Curves and Earthwork,
McGraw-Hill; Wellington, Economic Theory of the Location of Railways, Wiley. Civil Engineering 225
Two lectures per week. Mr. Wilkin.
12. Hydraulic Engineering 1.—(a) Fundamental prirt-
ciples and their applications. Problems on gauges, pressure
on surfaces. Bernouilli's theorem, flow through orifices,
short tubes, weirs, pipes, and open channels, and the dynamic action of jets.
(b) Laboratory period includes experimental work on
gauges, pipes, weirs, orifices, short tubes and stream measurements.
Prerequisite: Physics 6.
Text-book: Russell, Hydraulics, Holt, 3rd edition.
One lecture and one three-hour period per week.
Mr. Wilkin, Mr. Pretious.
13. Mapping 2.—Draughting from notes obtained in
Civil 7; railway location and hydrographie surveys: topographic maps from photographic plates.
One three-hour period per week. Mr. Lighthall.
14. Surveying 2. — (a) A continuation of Civil 6.
Theory and use of aneroid, sextant, plane-table and precise
instruments; plane-table surveying; mine, hydrographie
and photo-topographic surveying; Dominion and Provincial surveys. First Term.
(b)  Field Astronomy. Second Term.
Text-book: Breed and Hosmer, Surveying, Vol. IL,
Wiley.
References: Johnson and Smith, Theory and Practice
of Surveying, Wiley; Wilson, Topographic, Trigonometric
and Geodetic Surveying, Wiley; Green's Practical and
Spherical Astronomy, Ginn and Co.; Manual of Surveys of
Dominion Lands; Instructions for B. C. Land Surveyors.
Prerequisite: Civil 6.
Two lectures per week. Mr. Lighthall.
15. Perspective Drawing and Map Projections. — (a)
Mathematical perspective; perspective drawings of buildings and structures. First Term.
(b)  Map Projections. Second Term.
Prerequisite: Civil 1. 226 Faculty of Applied Science
Text-book Crosskey, Elementary Perspective, Blackie
& Son; Armstrong, Descriptive Geometry, Second Edition,
Wiley.
One two-hour period per week. Mr. Lighthall.
16. Field Work 3.—Problems in geodetic and precise
surveying; determination of latitude, azimuth and time by
solar and stellar observations; baseline measurements; precise levelling.
Prerequisite: Civil 7.
Time, same as for Civil 2. Mr. Lighthall.    '
17. Structural Design 2.—Selection of types of bridges;
determination of loadings; stresses; choice of cross-sectional
forms and areas; design of combination wood and steel
trusses, steel trusses; design of connections; masonry structures, dams and retaining walls; complete drawings.
Text-book: Kuntz, Design of Steel Bridges, McGraw-
Hill; Jacoby and Davis, Timber Design and Construction,
Wiley & Sons.
Reference: Johnson, Bryan and Turneaure, Modern
Framed Structures, Vol. III., Wiley; Kirkham, Structural
Engineering, McGraw-Hill; Carnegie, Pocket Companion.
Prerequisites: Civil 8, 9 and 10.
One lecture and two two-hour periods per week. First
Term.
One lecture and two three-hour periods per week. Second Term.
Mr. Matheson.
18. Engineering Economics.— (a) A general treatment
of sinking funds; yearly cost of service; collecting data; estimating; economic selection, reports.
Text-book: Fish, Engineering Economics, 2nd Edition,
McGraw-Hill.
Prerequisites: Economics 1.
Two lectures per week. First Term. Mr. Wilkin.
(b) Principles of financing; forms of business enterprises; stocks; bonds; operating and fixed charges; business
finance; capital and interpretation of financial statements.
SB Civil Engineering 227
References: Fish, Engineering Economics, Second Edition; Anger, Digest of Canadian Mercantile Law; Lough,
Business Finance
Two lectures per week. Second Term. Mr. Wilkin.
19. Engineering Law.—The engineer's status; fees; salary; as a witness; responsibility; engineering contracts; tenders; specifications; plans; extras and alterations; time; payments and certificates; penalty, bonus or liquidated damages; maintenance and defects; subcontractors; agents;
arbitaration and awards; specification and contract writing.
Text-book: Kirby, Elements of Specification Writing,
Wiley & Sons.
References: Anger, Digest of Canadian Mercantile Law
of Canada, W. H. Anger; Ball, Law Affecting Engineers,
Constable & Co.
One lecture per week. Mr. Pretious.
20. Surveying 3.—Geodesy; the determination of azimuth, longitude, latitude, time, the figure of the earth;
measurement of baselines; triangulation systems; adjustments and reductions of observations; precise levelling.
References: Hosmer, Geodesy, Wiley; Cary, Geodetic
Surveying, Wiley; Publications of Geodetic Survey, Ottawa.
Prerequisite: Civil 14.
One lecture per week. Mr. Lighthall.
21. Hydraulic Engineering 2.—Waterpower engineering; rainfall, runoff, stream flow; investigation of power
problems; selection of hydraulic machines; hydrographs;
auxiliary power; mass curves, load factors and characteristics; impulse and reaction wheels; methods of control and
operation of various forms of machines; transmission of
hydraulic power.
Text-books: Mead, Water-power Engineering, McGraw-Hill.
References: Gibson, Hydroelectric Engineering, Vol. 1.,
Blackie; Mead, Hydrology, McGraw-Hili. 228 Faculty of Applied Science
Prerequisites: Civil 12 must either precede or be taken
concurrently.
One lecture per week, and fifteen hours in laboratory.
Second Term. Mr. Wilkin.
22. Municipal Engineering. — Sewerage and Sewage
Disposal. General methods and economic consideration;
quantity and run-off; design of sewers, man-holes, flush
tanks, etc.; construction methods, materials and costs; estimate, design, maintenance and management.
Sewage Disposal: Physical, chemical, biological and economical aspects of sewage treatment; dilution; screening,
sedimentation, filtration; disinfection; maintenance and
management costs.
References: Metcalf and Eddy, Sewerage and Sewage
Disposal, 3 Vols., McGraw-Hill.
Water Supply, Rainfall; evaporation; run-off; quantity, quality and pressure required; pumping machinery;
storage; aqueducts, pipe lines and distribution systems;
purification systems; valves, hydrants and fire service; materials, estimates and designs; construction methods and
costs.
References: Flinn, Westbrook, Bogart, Waterworks
Handbook, McGraw-Hill.
Town Planning; covering the economical and artistic
development of a city, city management. Street cleaning
and disposal of waste; composition and quantity of city
wastes; collection, dumping and disposal; land treatment;
incineration and reduction; costs and returns.
Reference: Lewis, City Planning, Wiley.
Prerequisite: Civil 12.
Two lectures and one two-hour period per week. Mr.
Matheson.
23. Transportation 2.— (a) Railways. Organization
and rules of maintenance-of-way; roadway; ballast; ties;
lumber preservation; rails and appurtenances; turnouts,
tracks, accessories; structures and their design; stresses in Civil Engineering 229
track; track tools; track work; work-train service; maintenance-of-way records and accounts; expenditures; betterments; improvements of old lines, yards and terminals;
maximum capacity of single track.
Prerequisite: Civil 11.
Two lectures per week, First Term. Mr. Pretious.
(b) Highways. Highway economics, surveys and locations; grades; cross-sections; paving materials; construction methods; designs and estimates.
Streets and pavements; materials, design, construction,
maintenance and repairs.
Text-book: Agg, Construction of Roads and Pavements, McGraw-Hill.
Reference: Harger and Bonney, Highway Engineer's
Handbook.
Prerequisite: Civil 11.
Two lectures per week, Second Term. Mr. Pretious.
24. (a) Mechanics of Materials. — A continuation of
Civil 10, Strength of Materials; the application of the
Principle of Least Work to the determination of statically
indeterminate forces in beams and rigid frames; stress and
deflection of unsymmetrical sections and beams with variable moment of inertia; analysis and design of reinforced
concrete rigid frames and arches.
Text-book: Hool and Kinne, Concrete Engineer's
Handbook, McGraw-Hill.
References: Ketchum, Steel Mill Buildings; Hool, Reinforced Concrete, Vol. III.; Urquhart and CRourke, Design of Concrete Structures, McGraw-Hill.
Prerequisite: Civil 10.
Two lectures and one three-hour period per Week.
Mr. Finlay.
24. (b) Reinforced Concrete Design. — Intended to
familiarize the student with the basic principles involved in
the design of reinforced concrete structures, including 230 Faculty of Applied Science
beams, columns, continuous girders and flat slabs, and to
form a foundation for the more advanced work encountered
in CE. 24.
Text-book: Turneaure and Maurer, Principles of Reinforced Concrete Construction, 4th ed., John Wiley.
References: Taylor, Thompson and Smulski, Concrete,
Plain and Reinforced, Vol. I., Wiley, 4th ed.
Prerequisite: CE. 10.
One lecture and one two-hour period per week first
term.
Mr. Finlay.
25. Theory of Structures.—The analysis of statically
determinate framed structures under dead and live loads;
distortion of framed structures; the use of influence lines
for analysis of stresses and deflections; hinged and hingeless
arches; secondary stresses and redundant members.
Text-book: Kuntz, Design of Steel Bridges, McGraw-
Hill.
References: Johnson, Bryan and Turneaure, Modern
Framed Structures, Vols. I. and II., Wiley; Hool and Kinne,
Framed Structures, McGraw-Hill; Morley, Theory of
Structures, Longmans Green and Co.
Prerequisite: Civil 10.
One lecture and two three-hour periods per week.
Mr. Finlay.
26. Class Excursions.—Members of the Fifth Year class
in Civil Engineering, under the supervision of an instructor,
Will visit such factories, industrial developments, public
works, docks, shipyards and important examples of engineering construction as are calculated to assist the student
best to grasp the application and scope of the studies pursued
and to broaden his vision of the engineering field. Written
reports of trips are required.
Note:—In periods where no trips are taken, tests of
hydraulic machines will be made in Hydraulic Laboratory.
(See Civil 29). Civil Engineering 231
27. Civil Engineering Thesis.—Original research on selected topics; analysis of engineering projects; experimental
or theoretical investigations. Topics may be selected from
divisions of the Civil Engineering Course: Geodetics, Railways, Hydraulics, Municipal, Highways, Economic and
Business Engineering, Structures. Copy of thesis in regular
form and binder must be filed with the department.
28. Seminar.—Written and oral discussion of articles
appearing in the current Transactions and Proceedings of
the various engineering societies, also reviews of important
papers in engineering periodicals; reports on local engineering projects visited in Civil 26; written outlines must be
prepared for all oral reports; training in technical writing
and public speaking.
Required of all Fourth and Fifth Year students in Civil
Engineering.
Reference: Rickard, Technical Writing, McGraw-HilL
One hour per week.
29. Hydraulic Engineering 3.—Theory, investigation
and design of hydraulic motors and machinery. Turbines,
Pelton and impulse wheels, centrifugal pumps, hydro-ele,c-
tric installations, plant design and operation.
Laboratory work, testing hydraulic machines, arranged
for periods when no trips are taken.   (See Civil 26) .
Prerequisite: Civil 12.
Text-book: Dougherty, Hydraulic Turbines, Third
Edition, McGraw-Hill.
Reference: Gibson, Hydro-electric Engineering, Volume I.; Gibson, Hydraulics and Its Application, Van Nos-
trand; Mead, Water Power Engineering, Second Edition,
McGraw-HilL
One lecture per week. Mr. Wilkin.
30. Engineering Problems 1.—Training in methods of
attacking, analyzing and solving engineering problems.
Coaching in proper methods of work and study, including 232 Faculty of Applied Science
drill in systematic arrangement and workmanship in calculations. The content is based upon the application of
mathematics to problems in physics and engineering.
Prerequisite: First Year Arts, or Senior Matriculation.
Text-books: Duckering, Notes and Problems, Second
Edition, McGraw-Hill.
Two two-hour periods per week.
Mr. Wilkin, Mr. Finlay, Mr. Lighthall, Mr. Pretious,
Mr. Peebles.
31. Engineering Problems 2.—A continuation of Engineering Problems 1, involving a thorough drill in problems
in the principal divisions of Mathematics given in the Second
and Third Years of Applied Science, drawn from the field of
mechanics, surveying, draughting and engineering.
Prerequisite: Civil 30, Math. 1, 2, 3 and 4.
Text-book: Duckering, Notes and Problems, Second
Edition, McGraw-Hill.
One three-hour period per week.
Mr. Lighthall, Mr. Finlay, Mr. Stuart, Mr. Pretious.
50. Elementary problems in rural engineering, dealing
with drainage, water supply, sewerage and sewage disposal,
ventilation, simple structures and surveying. Adapted to
the needs of students in Agriculture.
One lecture per week. Mr. Stuart.
Department of Economics
Professor: H. F. Angus.
Professor: W. A. Carrothers.
Associate Professor: J. Friend Day.
Associate Professor: C. W. Topping.
Assistant Professor: G. F. Drummond.
1. Principles of Economics.—An introductory study of
general economic theory, including a survey of the principles of value, prices, money and banking, international
trade, tariffs, monopoly, taxation, labour and wages, socialism, the control of railways and trusts, etc. Forestry 233
Text-books: Deibler, Principles of Economics, McGraw-Hill; Cole, Intelligent Man's Guide through World
Chaos, Ryerson; The Canada Year Book, 1933.
Three lectures per week.
Department of Forestry
Professor: 	
Assistant Professor: F. Malcolm Knapp.
Honorary Lecturer: R. M. Brown.
1. General Forestry.—A general survey of the subject.
Text-book: Fernow, Economics of Forestry, Toronto
University Press.
References: The Forests of Canada, Dominion Forest
Service, Ottawa; Forestry in Canada, Dominion Bureau of
Statistics, Ottawa; Forests and Forestry in British Columbia, B. C. Forest Branch, Victoria. Whitford and Craig,
Forests of British Columbia, Commission of Conservation,
Ottawa. Pinchot, Primer of Forestry, Superintendent of
Documents, Washington, D.C. Moon and Brown, Elements
of Forestry, Wiley, second edition. Allen, Practical Forestry
in the Pacific Northwest, Western Forestry and Conservation Association, Portland. Schlich, Forest Policy in the
British Empire, fourth edition, Bradbury Agnew. Zon and
Sparhawk, Forest Resources of the World, McGraw-HilL
Various government publications.
One lecture per week.
2. Forest Mensuration.—Measurement of felled timber,
of standing timber, and of growth of trees and forests.
Including scaling, timber estimating, and preparation of
tables of volume, growth and yield.
Text-book: Chapman, Forest Mensuration, Wiley, third
edition. Winkenwerder and Clark, Problems in Forest Mensuration, second edition, Wiley.
Reference books: Graves, Woodsman's Handbook, Superintendent of Documents, Washington, D.C. Graves, 234 Faculty of Applied Science
Forest Mensuration, Wiley. Carey, Manual for Woodsmen,
fourth edition, Harvard Press. Various bulletins.
One lecture and one period of four hours' field or laboratory work per week. One week field work after April examinations.
3. Forest Protection.—The fire problem, legislation,
organizations, prevention and control.
Text-book: Western Fire Fighters' Manual, Western
Forestry and Conservation Association, Portland.
Reference books: Millar, Methods of Communication
Adapted to Forest Protection, Dominion Forestry Branch,
Ottawa. U.S. Forest Service, Trail Budding in the National
Forests, Superintendent of Documents, Washington, D.C.
One lecture per week. Second Term.
4. Forest Finance.—Forestry from the financial standpoint, including studies of compound interest, valuation,
rotation, insurance and taxation.
Text-book: Roth, Forest Valuation, University of
Michigan, second edition.
Reference books: Chapman, Forest Finance, Wiley.
Woodward, Valuation of American Timber Lands, Wiley.
Two periods of one hour each, lectures and problems,
per week. Second Term.
5. Timber Physics and Wood Technology.—The structure of wood; the identification of different woods and their
qualities and uses; wood seasoning; wood preservation; emphasis on the Canadian woods of commercial importance.
Text-books: Record, Economic Woods of the United
States, Wiley, second edition. Forsaith, The Technology of
New York State Timbers, Technical Publication No. 18,
New York State College of Forestry, Syracuse, New York.
Reference books: Koehler, The Properties and Uses of
Wood, McGraw-Hill. Koehler and Thelen, Kiln Drying of
Lumber, McGraw-Hill. Snow, Wood and Other Organic
Structural Materials, McGraw-Hill. Roth, Timber, U. S.
Forest Service, Bui. 10, Superintendent of Documents,
Washington, D.C. Forestry 235
■""■      '        "'" - ■■'■'—    " '" ' ""' ' ■|l" ■■'»""    i        I "Hi ■inn —      .....,_,■■      f
Two lectures and one period of three hours laboratory
per week.
6. Forest Organization.—The principles and methods
of organizing forest areas for business management. Normal
forest, increment, rotation, felling budget, working plans.
Text-book: Roth, Forest Regulation, Roth, University
of Michigan, second edition.
Reference books: Recknagel, Bentley and Guise, Forest
Management, Wiley, second edition. Recknagel, Forest
Working Plans, Wiley, second edition. Schlich, Forest Management, Bradbury Agnew. Woolsey, American Forest
Regulation, Woolsey, New Haven.
One lecture per week.
7. History of Forestry and Forest Administration.—
The development of forestry in different parts of the world;
forest resources and industries; policy, legislation and education.
Reference books: Fernow, History of Forestry, University of Toronto Press, second edition. Schlich, Forest Policy
in the British Empire, Bradbury Agnew. Boerker, Our
National Forests, Macmillan. Ise, The United States Forest
Policy, Yale University Press. Zon and Sparhawk, Forest
Resources of the World, McGraw-Hill. Various government publications.
One lecture per week.
8. Silviculture.—Principles and methods of caring for
forests and growing timber crops.
Text-books: Hawley, Practice of Silviculture, Wiley,
second edition. Tourney and Korstian, Seeding and Planting
in the Practice of Forestry, Wiley.
Reference books: Graves, Principles of Handling Woodlands, Wiley. Woolsey, Studies in French Forestry, Wiley.
Schlich, Silviculture, Bradbury Agnew. Various government publications. 236 Faculty of Applied Science
Two lectures per week during the year, and one period
of three hours field or laboratory work during the second
term.
9. General Lumbering.—A general study of the principles and practice of logging and milling in the chief timber
regions of North America.
Text-book: Bryant, Logging, Wiley, second edition.
Reference books: Gibbons, Logging in the Douglas Fir
Region, U. S. D. A. Bui. 711, Superintendent of Documents,
Washington, D.C. Berry, Lumbering in the Sugar and Yellow Pine Region of California, U. S. D. A. Bui. 440, Superintendent of Documents, Washington, D.C.
Two lectures per week, First Term.
One lecture per week, Second Term.
10. Logging.—An intensive study of logging systems
and operations in the forests of western North America.
Reference books: Bryant, Logging, Wiley, second edition. Gibbons, Logging in the Douglas Fir Region, U. S.
D. A. Bui. 711, Superintendent of Documents, Washington, D.C.
Various articles in the Timberman, B. C. Lumberman
and other trade journals.
One lecture per week, First Term.
Two lectures per week, Second Term.
One period of four hours laboratory or field work per
week, alternating with Forestry 11 and 12.
11. Milling.—A study of the sawmilling and allied
woodworking industries of western North America.
Text-book: Bryant, Lumber, Wiley.
Reference books: Oakleaf, Lumber Manufacture in the
Douglas Fir Region, Commercial Journal Co. Brown, American Lumber Industry, Wiley. Berry, Lumbering in the
Sugar and Yellow Pine Region of California, U. S. D. A.
Bui. 440, Superintendent of Documents, Washington, D.C.
Seeley, Small Sawmills, U. S. D. A. Bui. 718, Superintendent
of Documents, Washington, D.C. Forestry 237
Two lectures per week; one period of four hours laboratory or field work per week alternating with Forestry 10.
First Term.
12. Forest Products and Marketing.—A study of marketing methods and problems of the lumber trade—domestic consumption and export—markets in foreign countries;
also of other forest industries, including pulp and paper,
shingles, veneers, boxes.
Text-books: Brown, Forest Products, Their Manufacture and Use, Wiley, second edition. Bryant, Lumber,
Wiley.
Reference books: Brown, The American Lumber Industry, Wiley. Joint authorship, The Manufacture of Pulp and
Paper, Vols. III. to V., McGraw-Hill. Knight and Wulpi,
Veneers and Plywood, Ronald Press Co.
Two lectures per week; one period of four hours laboratory or field work per week, alternating with Forestry 10.
Second Term.
Vancouver Laboratory
Forest Products Laboratories of Canada,
Forest Service,
Department of the Interior, Canada
R. M. Brown, B.Sc.F. (Toronto), Superintendent.
R. S. Perry, B.Sc. (McGill), Assistant Engineer.
Division of Timber Mechanics
J. B. Alexander, B.Sc. (New Brunswick), Chief, Timber Mechanics
Division.
J. T. Lee, Timber Tester.
D. S. Wright, Timber Tester.
W. W. Davidson, Assistant Timber Tester.
R. J. Eades, Assistant Timber Tester.
Division of Timber Products
J. H. Jenkins, B.A-Sc. (Brit. Col.), Chief, Timber Products Division.
H. W. Eades, B.Sc.F. ("Washington), Assistant Timber Pathologist.
F. W. Guernsey, B.A.Sc. (Brit. Col.), Assistant in Timber Products. 23 8 Faculty of Applied Science
The Forest Products Laboratories of Canada is a research
organization maintained by the Forest Service of the Department of the Interior, Canada. Research in forest products is carried on in two laboratories, one in Ottawa and the
other in Vancouver, while all questions relating to pulp and
paper research are dealt with by a co-operative laboratory
established at McGill University, Montreal, through an
arrangement between the Forest Products Laboratories of
Canada, the Canadian Pulp and Paper Association, and
McGill University.
The Vancouver laboratory was established in 1918 and
has been maintained in association with the University of
British Columbia since that time. Originally equipped only
for the mechanical testing of western woods, the organization has shown a rapid expansion and now includes research
in all branches of timber mechanics, lumber seasoning investigations, timber decay problems, mill studies, waste utilization, wood identification, etc.
One of the most important phases of the work of the
laboratory is its technical service to all branches of the timber industry in the dissemination of information on a wide
variety of subjects having to do with forest products. While
research in wood preservation, wood distillation, container
tests, pulp and paper, etc., is at present confined to the
Ottawa and Montreal laboratories, the close contact maintained between the three organizations permits the extension of this technical service to include such subjects as wood
utilization of all kinds, wood preservation, wood distillation, pulp and paper, new industries, etc.
A mutually beneficial scheme of co-operation is maintained between the Laboratory and the University, whereby
students of the University in Engineering and Forestry have
access to the Laboratory to watch the work being carried on
and to use the apparatus at times in testing strength of
materials. The staff of the Laboratory also has the benefit of
the University library and the advice and assistance of University specialists in related work. Geology 239
Department of Geology and Geography
Professor: R. W. Brock.
Professor of Physical and Structural Geology: S. J. Schofield.
Professor of Palaeontology and Stratigraphy: M. Y. Williams.
Associate Professor of Mineralogy and Petrology: T. C. Phemister.
Lecturer: Victor Dolmage.
Lecturer: Harry Warren. ;,<
Geology
1. General Geology.—This course serves as an introduction to the science of Geology. The following subjects are
treated in the lectures and laboratory:
(a) Physical Geology, including weathering, work of
the wind, ground water, streams, glaciers, the ocean and its
work, the structures of the earth, earthquakes, volcanoes
and igneous intrusions, metamorphism, mountains and plateaus, and ore-deposits.
Two lectures per week, First Term. Mr. Williams and
Mr. Brock.
(b) Laboratory Exercises in Physical Geology, including the study and identification of die most common minerals and rocks, the interpretation of topographical and
geological maps, and the study of structures by the use of
models. <
Two hours laboratory per week. First Term. Mr. Schofield and Mr. Williams.
(c) Historical Geology, including the earth before the
Cambrian, the Palaeozoic, the Mesozoic, the Cenozoic and
Quaternary eras.
Two lectures per week, Second Term. Mr. Williams and
Mr. Brock.
(d) Laboratory Exercises in Historical Geology, consisting of the general study of fossils, their characteristics
and associations, their evolution and migration as illustrated
by their occurrence in the strata. The principles of Palaeogeography will be taken up and illustrated by the study of
the palaeogeography of North America. 240 Faculty of Applded Science
Two hours laboratory per week, Second Term. Mr.
Williams.
Field Work will replace laboratory occasionally, and will
take the form of excursions to localities, in the immediate
neighbourhood of Vancouver, which illustrate the subject
matter of the lectures.
Prerequisite: Matriculation Chemistry or Physics, or
Chemistry 1 or Physics 1 or 2 taken either before or concurrently.
Text-book: Pirsson and Schuchert, Foundations of
Geology, Wiley.
Students will be required to make a passing mark in
each of the above subdivisions. 3 units.
2. (a) General Mineralogy.—A brief survey of the field
of mineralogy.
Lectures take the form of a concise treatment of (1)
Crystallography, (2) Physical Mineralogy, and (3) De-
scripitve Mineralogy of 40 of the more common mineral
species, with special reference to Canadian occurrences.
Laboratory Work consists of the study of the common
crystal forms and of 40 prescribed minerals, accompanied
by a brief outline of the principles and methods of Determinative Mineralogy and Blowpipe Analysis.
Text-books: Dana, Text-book of Mineralogy, revised by
Ford, Wiley.
Prerequisite: Chemistry 1.
Two lectures and one laboratory period of two hours
per week. First Term. Mr. Phemister.
2. (b) Descriptive and Determinative Mineralogy.—
This course supplements 2 (a) and consists of a more complete survey of Crystallography, Physical and Chemical
Mineralogy, with a critical study of about 50 of the less
common minerals, special emphasis being laid on their crystallography, origin, association and alteration.
Text-book: Dana, Text-book of Mineralogy, revised by
"ord, Wiley. Geology 241
Prerequisite: Geology 2 (a).
Two lectures and one laboratory period of two hours per
week. Second Term. Mr. Phemister.
4. Structural and Physiographical Geology.—The following subjects are treated in the lectures: Fractures, faults,
flowage, structures common to both fracture and flow,
mountains, major units of structures, forces of deformation, the origin and development of land forms with special
reference to the physiography of British Columbia.
Text-book: Leith, Structural Geology, Holt.
Prerequisite: Geology 1.
Three lectures per week. Mr. Schofield and Mr. Phe-
minster. 3 units.
5. (a) History of Geology.—A brief history of the
study of the earth and the development of the geological
sciences. Mr. Brock.
(b) Geology of Canada.—The salient features of the
geology and economic minerals of Canada. Mr. Williams,
Mr. Schofield, Mr. Brock.
(c) Regional Geology.—The main geological features
of the continents and oceanic segments of the earth's crust,
and their influences upon life. Mr. Brock.
Prerequisite: Geology 1.
Three lectures and one hour laboratory per week.
6. Palaentology.—A study of invertebrate and vertebrate fossils, their classification, identification and distribution both geological and geographical.
Reference books: Grabau and Shimer, North American
Index Fossils. Zittel-Eastman, Text-book of Palaeontology.
Prerequisite: Geology 1.
Two lectures and two hours laboratory per week. Mr.
Williams.
7. Petrology.—This course consists of systematic studies
of (i) optical mineralogy, and (ii) petrography, with an
introduction to petrogenesis. 242 Faculty of Applied Sceence
The laboratory work deals with the determination of
rocks, first under the microscope and then in hand specimens.
Text-books: Harker, Petrology for Students, Cambridge University Press. Johannsen, Essentials for the Microscopic Determination of Rock Forming Minerals and Rocks,
University of Chicago Press. Dana, Text-book of Mineralogy, revised by Ford, Wiley.
Prerequisites: Geology 1 and 2.
Two lectures and two laboratory periods of two hours
per week. Mr. Phemister. 4 units.
8. Economic Geology.—A study of the occurrence,
genesis, and structure of the principal metallic and non-
metallic mineral deposits with type illustrations; and a description of the ore deposits of the British Empire, special
stress being placed on those in Canada.
Text-book: Ries, Economic Geology, 6th Edition,
Wiley.
Prerequisite: Geology 1. Geology 7 must precede or accompany this course, d
Four hours per week.
Mr. Brock, Mr. Williams, Mr. Schofield, Mr. Phemister.
9. Mineralography.—Principally a laboratory course
dealing with the study and recognition of the opaque minerals by means of the reflecting microscope.
The work consists of practice in the cutting, grinding
and polishing of ore specimens, accompanied by training in
microchemical methods of mineral determination.
During the second term each student is assigned a suite
of ores from some mining district for a critical examination
and report.
Text-book: Davy and Farnham, Microscopic Examination of the Ore Minerals, McGraw-Hill.
Prerequisite: Geology 7 and 8 must precede or accompany this course.
One laboratory period of two hours per week. Mr. Phemister and Mr. Schofield. Mathematics 243
10. Field Geology.—The methods taught are the fundamental ones used by professional geologists and by the officers of the Geological Survey of Canada. The course is essentially practical and is designed to teach methods of observing, recording and correlating geological facts in the field.
The students construct geological maps of selected areas in
the vicinity of Vancouver which require the use of the
various methods and instruments employed in field geology.
Text-books: Lahee, Field Geology. Hayes, Handbook
for Field Geologists. Spurr, Geology Applied to Mining.
Prerequisite: Geology 1. Geology 4, if not already taken,
must be taken concurrently.
One period of three hours per week. Mr. Schofield.
14. Crystallography.—This course consists of a systematic study of the morphology of crystals, with an introduction to mathematical crystallography.
The practical work deals with the measurement of crystals, and, in the case of students in chemistry, a certain number of the crystals measured will be grown in the laboratory.
Students are advised to consult with the instructor before registering for this course.
Text-book: Tutton, Crystallography and Practical
Crystal Measurement, Macmillan.
Two lectures and six or eight hours laboratory per week.
Mr. Phemister.
5 or 6 units, dependent on amount of laboratory work.
Department of Mathematics
Professor: Daniel Buchanan.
Professor: F. S. Nowlan.
Associate Professor: E. E. Jordan.
Associate Professor: L. Richardson.
Instructor: F. J. Brand.
1. Plane Trigonometry.—Review of elementary work,
projection, inverse functions, hyperbolic functions, power
series, finite series, complex numbers, De Moivre's Theorem
and applications, elimination.
Text-book: To be announced. 244 Faculty of Applied Science
Two lectures per week. First Term.
2. Solid Geometry.—A study of the three-faced corner,
the various polyhedra and solid figures, and the theorems of
Pappus.
Text-book: To be announced.
Two lectures per week. Second Term.
3. Algebra.—A review of simple series, permutations,
combinations and the binomial theorem, and a study of exponential and other series, undetermined coefficients, partial
and continued fractions, graphical algebra.
Two lectures per week.
Text-book: Wilson and Warren, Intermediate Algebra
(Larger Edition), Oxford.
4. Calculus.—An introductory study of the differential
and integral calculus will be made, and some of the simpler
applications considered.
Text-book: Woods and Bailey, Elementary Calculus,
Ginn.
Two lectures per week.
6. Calculus.—Differential and integral calculus with
various applications.
Text-book: Woods and Bailey, Elementary Calculus,
Ginn.
Three lectures per week.
7. Analytical Geometry.—A study of the conies and
other curves occurring in engineering practice, and elementary work in three dimensions.
Text-book: Fawdry, Co-ordinate Geometry, Bell.
Two lectures per week.
8. Applied Calculus.—The applications of calculus to
various problems in engineering.
Three lectures per week.
(Given in 1934-3 5 and alternate years.)
9. Differential Equations.—A study of ordinary and
partial differential equations and their applications.
Three lectures per week.
(Given in 1933-34 and alternate years.) Mechanical and Electrical Engineering    245
Department of Mechanical and Electrical
Engineering
Professor: Herbert Vickers.
Associate Professor of Mechanical Engineering: F. W. Vernon.
Associate Professor of Mechanical Engineering: H. F. G. Letson.
Assistant Professor of Electrical Engineering: E. G. Cullwick.
Assistant Professor of Electrical Engineering: W. B. Coulthard.
Lecturer in Mechanical Engineering: John F. Bell.
Lecturer in Mechanical Engineering: R. Rolleston West.
Mechanical Engineering
1. Mechanical Drawing.—Practice in freehand lettering in accordance with common practice. Geometrical
Drawing, to give facility in the use of drawing instruments.
Freehand sketching of machine parts and structures from
which drawings are made to scale. Drawing to scale of simple
machine parts. Making of assembly drawings from detail
drawings, and detail drawings from assembly drawings.
Tracing and blueprinting.
Two three-hour periods per week.
2. (a) Shop Work.—This work is intended to supplement the manual training given in the high schools, and also
to give the student some knowledge of the more common
machine shop methods and processes as employed commercially. The object is to provide some basis for the intelligent
design of machines and structural parts.
Lectures.—Physical properties of the materials used in
machine construction. Modern methods of handling and
finishing wood. Forging and hammering of metals. Annealing and tempering. Making of patterns and cores. Cupola
practice.
Soldering and brazing, tinning, electroplating. Drilling
and tapping, turning and boring, calipering and fitting,
milling and milling cutters, reaming and reamers, screw
cutting. Grinding and abrasive wheels. Lapping. Punching
and shearing. Drop forging and die-casting. Metal spinning. 246 Faculty of Applied Science
Torch and electric welding. Cold sawing and torch cutting.
Tool-making and dressing. Use of jigs. Mechine shop standards, including wire and sheet metal gauges, threads, etc.
Text-book: Colvin & Stanley, American Machinists'
Hand-book, McGraw-Hill.
One lecture per week.
Practice in Metal-working.—Bench work, including
marking off, chipping, filing, scraping, tapping, and fitting;
lathe work, including turning and boring, screw-cutting
and finishing; lathe adjustments; shaping; nulling; gear-
cutting; tool-dressing.
One two-hour period per week.
2. (b) Machine Shop Practice.—A continuation of
Mechanical Engineering 2.
Two hours laboratory per week, First Term, and two
hours, Second Term.
3. Kinematics of Machines.—Velocity and Acceleration
diagrams of mechanisms. Instantaneous centre of Rotation.
Slider Crank and Quadric-crank chain; quick return mechanisms; inversion; straight-line motions; epi-cyclic trains;
valve-gears and miscellaneous mechanisms.
Text-book: McKay, Theory of Machines, Longmans
Green & Co.
One two-hour lecture period per week.
4. Dynamics of Machines.—Diagrams of crank effort,
piston velocity and acceleration; flywheel; balancing, rotating and reciprocating masses; secondary balancing; governors; brakes and dynamometers; belt-drives; dynamics of
the gyroscope; friction and friction-clutches; impulsive
forces in mechanisms.
Text-book: Low, Applied Mechanics, Longmans Green
&Co.
Two lectures per week.
Prerequisite subject for Fifth Year.
5. Machine Design.—A study of the theory of the properties of materials as applied to the design and construction
of machines. Mechanical and Electrical Engineering   247
Reference books: Case, Strength of Materials, Arnold;
Kimball and Bar., Elements of Machine Design, Wiley;
Spooner, Machine Design Construction and Drawing,
Longmans Green.
Two lectures per week. .
Prerequisite subject for Fifth Year.
5. (a) Problem Course in Materials and Design.—Examples and problems illustrating the lectures of M.E. 5 and
including the solution under supervision of actual design
problems.
Text-book: L. S. Marks, Mechanical Engineers' Handbook, McGraw-Hill.
Reference book: As in M.E. 5.
One one-hour period per week.
6. Elementary Thermodynamics.—(a) Fuels and combustion. General principles underlying the construction and
operation